7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance

STUDENT GUIDE

TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent



1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

2

Empty page

Switch to notes view!

This page is left blank intentionally




3

Terms of Use and Legal Notices

Switch to notes view!1. Safety WarningBoth lethal and dangerous voltages may be present within the products used herein. The user is strongly advised not to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone.The equipment used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

2. Trade MarksAlcatel-Lucent and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders, including Alcatel-Lucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel-Lucent or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented herein, which may be subject to change without notice.

3. CopyrightThis document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training purposes only. No other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel-Lucent’s written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel-Lucent.Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable legislation is hereby expressly prohibited.User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express written consent of Alcatel-Lucent.

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

4. DisclaimerIn no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not Alcatel-Lucent has been advised of the possibility of such damages.Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement, nor a recommendation.This course is intended to train the student about the overall look, feel, and use of Alcatel-Lucent products. The information contained herein is representational only. In the interest of file size, simplicity, and compatibility and, in some cases, due to contractual limitations, certain compromises have been made and therefore some features are not entirely accurate.Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-Lucent equipment and its operation, or contact your nearest Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information.The Alcatel-Lucent products described or used herein are presented for demonstration and training purposes only. Alcatel-Lucent disclaims any warranties in connection with the products as used and described in the courses or the related documentation, whether express, implied, or statutory. Alcatel-Lucent specifically disclaims all implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability, non-infringement and fitness for a particular purpose, or arising from a course of dealing, usage or trade practice.Alcatel-Lucent is not responsible for any failures caused by: server errors, misdirected or redirected transmissions, failed internet connections, interruptions, any computer virus or any other technical defect, whether human or technical in nature

5. Governing LawThe products, documentation and information contained herein, as well as these Terms of Use and Legal Notices are governed by the laws of France, excluding its conflict of law rules. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices, or the application thereof to any person or circumstances, is held invalid for any reason, unenforceable including, but not limited to, the warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, then such provision shall be deemed superseded by a valid, enforceable provision that matches, as closely as possible, the original provision, and the other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices shall remain in full force and effect.




4

Blank Page






5

Course Outline

About This CourseCourse outlineTechnical supportCourse objectives

1. Topic/Section is Positioned HereXxxXxxXxx

2. Topic/Section is Positioned Here






1. Product Overview1. System General Description2. System Operation Overview3. Boards Description4. Cabling Description

2. NE Operation1. Subrack and Board Declaration2. Optical Channel Configuration3. Optical Power Tuning

3. NE Maintenance1. Performance Monitoring2. Alarms Handling3. Boards Replacement

4. SPLM Operation1. SPLM Overview2. Topology Management3. Line Optimization

5. RMPM Operation and Maintenance1. RMPM Description2. RMPM Handling and Maintenance

6. Appendix1. Miscellaneous




6

Course Outline [cont.]






7

Course Objectives


Welcome to 1626 LM (Light Manager) R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

� describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A,� describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A,� describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards,� perform optical and electrical cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards,� declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the

software associations,� configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons,� monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for

maintenance reasons,� monitor the signal transmission quality in line,� handle the alarms raised by the NE,� replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A board respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate

procedure,� describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace,� setup the relevant SPLM configuration,� run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion, � describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM,� get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions.




8

Course Objectives [cont.]






9

About this Student Guide

� Switch to notes view!Conventions used in this guide

Where you can get further informationIf you want further information you can refer to the following:� Technical Practices for the specific product� Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com

Note Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed. Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful or interesting.

Technical Reference (1) 24.348.98 – Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.

WarningAlerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment damage or personal injury.




10

About this Student Guide [cont.]

� Switch to notes view!





11

Self-assessment of Objectives

� At the end of each section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire� Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training


Instructional objectives Yes (or globally

yes) No (or

globally no)

Comments

1 To be able to describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A

2 To be able to describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A

3 To be able to describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards

4 To be able to perform optical and electrical cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards

5 To be able to declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the software associations

6 To be able to configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons

7 To be able to monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for maintenance reasons

8 To be able to monitor the signal transmission quality in line

9 To be able to handle the alarms raised by the NE

10 To be able to replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A board respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate procedure

11 To be able to describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace

12 To be able to setup the relevant SPLM configuration

13 Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion

Contract number :

Course title :Client (Company, Center) :Language : Dates from : to :Number of trainees : Location :Surname, First name :

Did you meet the following objectives ?Tick the corresponding box

Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training

�




12

Self-assessment of Objectives [cont.]


Instructional objectives Yes (or Globally

yes) No (or

globally no)

Comments

14 To be able to describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM

15 To be able to get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions

Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire

Other comments

�

Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 1All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:


Module 1System General Description


Section 1Product Overview

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0AOperation and Maintenance





1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceProduct Overview � System General Description1 � 1 � 2

Blank Page


First editionSteunou L. 2009-03-2501RemarksAuthorDateEdition

Document History





Module Objectives

Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

� Describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A





Module Objectives [cont.]






Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 General points 71.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio 81.2 Regional Terrestrial Application 91.3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure 101.4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications 111.5 Raman applications 121.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking 131.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics” 141.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node151.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets 16

2 Main features 172.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 182.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? 202.3 Loading plan at 50GHz 222.4 Loading plan at 100GHz 23

3 Line structures 253.1 Line configuration without A/D 263.2 Line configuration with A/D 273.3 Ring configuration 283.4 Meshed Topology 29

4 1626 LM NE type configurations 314.1 NE types 324.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch.: pass-through) 344.3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of channels: add/drop) 354.4 Line Terminal (Long Haul application) 364.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir) 374.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir) 384.7 Line Repeater 394.8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE 404.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE 414.10 Band-OADM 424.11 Small OADM 434.12 ROADM (WB based) 444.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) 454.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) 464.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) 484.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based)) 514.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop 524.18 Back-to-Back Terminal 54

5 Existing infrastructure upgrade 555.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 565.1.2 Upgrade up to 52 channels 585.2.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards 595.2.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards 60

5.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 616 Ethernet applications 636.1 Traffic concentration and mapping 646.2 Boards interconnections: examples 656.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service 66

7 1626 LM system layout 677.1 Optinex Rack layout 687.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf 697.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example 707.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example 717.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application - Example 72





Table of Contents [cont.]

Switch to notes view! Page7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application - Example 737.7 Line Repeater Master shelf - Example 747.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example 757.9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example 767.10 BOADM Master shelf - Example 777.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf - Example 787.12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf - Example 797.13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 807.14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack - Example 817.15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 827.16 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example 837.17 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 - Example 847.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (8 first channels) 857.19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (From 9th to 72nd channel) 867.20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example 877.21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 887.22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example 897.23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf 907.24 Power Feeding sub-system 91





1 General points





1 General points1.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio

Access

Metro

CoreAg

grega

tion &

tran

sport

1830 PSS-1GBE

8 λλλλ at 10 GCWDM

1830 PSS-3244 λλλλ at 10 G

C&DWDMTR-OADMROADM

1626 LM96 λλλλ at 10 G80 λλλλ at 40 G

DWDMTR-OADMROADM

A Complete WDM Product Line� Simple design� Fast install & commission� Easy upgrade� Reduced maintenance� Bandwidth optimization� Best-in-class footprint

1626 LM : The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager (1626 LM in the following) is the platform of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Multi Reach systems for Regional, National, Pan-continental Networks.

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM is designed to address efficiently green field applications for new networks and links as well as to upgrade legacy platforms without traffic interruption. Carriers can keep their installed DWDM base and increase its capacity by loading new wavelengths from the 1626 LM. This provides to carriers a state-of-art technology and advanced features without wasting the investment previously granted.

The 1626 LM (Light Manager) provides a high transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568.6nm) or 80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561,82nm) in Rel5.0A.

1830 PSS-32 : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 is part of the 1830 PSS Metro WDM product family, which also includes the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices, including the 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device.

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is the next generation zero-touch transparent photonic network solution. A service-optimized, flexible platform delivers advanced OADM/CWDM/DWDM transport capabilities in a highly scalable and versatile package that supports interoffice facility/converged core transport and wavelength services such as SDH/SONET, GbE/10GbE and storage. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0 supports up to 44 DWDM wavelength channels in the C-band from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.692 recommendation. Channel spacing is 100 GHz. A future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support 88 channels on a 50-GHz grid.

It supports up to eight CWDM wavelength channels from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.694.2 recommendation.

1830 PSS-1 GBE : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device provides an optimized WDM access Platform. The 1830 PSS-1 GBE is an Edge Device providing the concentration of 10 GbE services over an 10.709 Gb/s optical channel. It is well-suited to provide GbE backhauling in a very compact format for Metro Access applications and interwork fully with the 1830 PSS-32 designed for Metro Core and Regional applications. In addition, the 1830 PSS-1 GBE can work as a GbE ADM which makes it uniquely efficient and flexible for building Metro Access Ethernet networks and meet the growing demand for Triple Play, Video services and Business LAN services.





RegionalRegional National &Pan-Continental

Up to 200 km32 channels

Up to 600 km48 channels

Up to 1500 km96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s

Unified Management

Traffic Aggregation Transport

The 1626 Light Manager is a multi-reach WDM system capable of supporting different reaches on different wavelengths to easily match the demand.

1 General points1.2 Regional Terrestrial Application

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM addresses terrestrial applications from Metro-Core (few hundreds of kilometers) to Ultra Long-Haul (up to 4500 km) and unrepeatered submarine applications (400 Km single span), from average capacity for regional networks up to large capacity for pan-continental networks.





1 General points1.3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure

� 1626 LM provides � in-service upgrades, reusing the line terminal and line repeater from existing Alcatel DWDM links

� flexibility to upgrade other vendors’ DWDM links

ExistingLine TerminalExisting Line RepeaterNew accessto traffic

Equipmentupgrade

Simply add the Optical Network

Extender shelf at both ends of the link where access to the traffic is needed

1626 LM is able to extend nominal capacity of installed 1686WM and 1640WM links by adding an Optical Network Extension shelf in traffic access points, composed of higher performance 1626 LM Transponders and corresponding Multiplexer/Demultiplexer modules.





1 General points1.4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications

� The Alcatel 1626 Light Manager provides an efficient solution� When the terrestrial route crosses difficult terrain � When operator incurs costly access problems

Festoon along a coast

Mainland-to-island connection

Island-to-island connection

Optimized features for single-span long distance transmission





1 General points1.5 Raman applications� Standard EDFA for standard span attenuation� Selected use of Raman pump in some high loss attenuation spans

RMPM Front Panel

High attenuation span(s) in a series of standard attenuation spans

Line Terminal

Line Repeater

Accessto traffic

Raman pump

High loss span

EDFA: Erbium Doped Fiber AmplifierRMPM : Raman Multi Pump Module

A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process. In this process an incident photon is scattered to a lower energy photon, while at the same time initiating a transition of the fiber molecules between two vibration states. In the Raman amplifier, stimulated Raman scattering produces a photon with the same wavelength, phase and polarization as the signal and thus the stimulated scattering mechanism can be used to amplify the signal. The gain medium in the case of the distributed Raman amplifier is the silica transmission fiber itself and amplification occurs along a few tens of kilometers adjacent to the pump unit.

The Raman unit is called RMPM1x00 which stands for Raman Multi Pump Module and where « x »represents the number of pumping diodes inside the module.

Only 2 different RMPM exist today : dual and triple pumps (RMPM1200 and RMPM1300 respectively).

The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM from R3.0A. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but in the Optinex ETSI rack. The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on a PC, either locally or remotely through a LAN. However some alarms and commands can be received or activated from the 1626LM Housekeeping board.

The Raman Multi Pump Module (RMPM) is to be used for long span masking in 1626LM terrestrial applications. It has to be inserted between the output of the long span and the input of the Line Optical Fiber Amplifier (LOFA). The LOFA can be either in a Line Terminal, in a Line Repeater or in a OADM site. Several RMPM can be used in a transmission system but only a few of them can be cascaded between regenerators due to optical performance reasons.





WDM technology offers the lowest cost per

transported bit ‘by design’

� Pure photonic traffic processing, limited electrical regeneration and processing (OEO) only at the end points

� Integrated any-type client interfaces and aggregation� But… not flexible, requires careful planning, manual

intervention and troubleshooting

Networking flexibility

Operational automation

Transforming WDM into a manageable transport networking layer for simplified operations, accelerated time-to-service and controlled TCO

� End to end wavelength rerouting up to the end points (clients) by NOC

� Flexible reuse of wavelengths for more available bandwidth� Support of 40G for increasing service demand, along with

existing line rates (2.5G, 10G) for compatibility� Multi-degree for meshed topologies� No need for planning, easy network reconfiguration from NOC

without manual intervention� End to end service provisioning in minutes� Extended photonic OAM and restoration capabilities

+

+

1 General points 1.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking

OEO : Optical Electrical OpticalOAM : Operation And MaintenanceTCO : Total Cost of Ownership





�Wavelength routing at intermediate nodes

Degree-2 ROADM (WB) � Increased

connectivity (mesh)

� Colorless ports� Directionless ports (Multicasting)

�Wavelength routing e2e

� Centralized automated intelligence

� Path set-up, monitoring, QoS

E2E Photonic Management

� Full Operations� Simple, NOC based, path set-up

� NOC based automated commissioning, supervision and operations

� Full Flexibility� Ultimate simplification of design, planning, operations and inventory

� No need to go to sites

� Easier design� Still need to go to sites for the add/drop

� Still need to go to sites for the add/drop

WSS TR-OADM ArchitectureTraditional ROADM Architecture

1 General points 1.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics”

ONDP & SPLMuniqueunique

standard

Multi-degree ROADM (WSS)

Multi-degree TR-OADM (WSS)

1626 LM transforms WDM into a true Transport Layer

WB: Wavelength BlockerWSS: Wavelength Selective SwitchQoS: Quality of ServiceONDP: Optical Network Design PlatformSPLM: Smart Photonic Layer ManagerNOC: Network Operating Center





1 General points1.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node

�A Multi-Degree Node is a Node that allows wavelengths connectivity across several directions� The degree of the Node equals the number of directions

�Examples of Multi-Degree Nodes:

� In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelengths connectivity is managed in a “true”optical domain without OEO conversions� In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelength connectivity can be managed “manually” (cabling) or remotely (R/TR-OADM)

Degree-2 Degree-3 Degree-6Degree-4 Degree-5





Acceleration of time-to-service

Optimization of Network Resilience

� Unified Photonic Layer Management for rapid end-to-end services delivery� Turn-up in minutes by NOC and not by field operations

� Restoration at the Photonic layer� Detection and management of degraded performance before outage events occur

Optimization of overall network expenses� Better resource utilization and CAPEX savings� Networking capability, OPEX savings

Helping Service Providers to quickly deliver simplified, reliable, highly flexible, fully managed, bandwidth on demand at the lowest TCO

Simplification of planning, commissioning and overall operations� Flexibility in network design and planning� “Plug and Play” Turn-up, commissioning, and SLA assurance

1 General points1.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets

NOC: Network Operating CenterCAPEX: Capital ExpenditureOPEX: Operating ExpenditureTCO: Total Cost of OwnershipSLA: Service Level Agreement





2 Main features





2 Main features 2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4

� A leading platform for Multi-Reach and Long Haul WDM networks� National & Pan-Continental networks

� 96 x 10G wavelengths (50GHz grid) with high performance amplifiers, high capacity fixed optical add-drop multiplexers (OADMs)� Regional networks

� 32 x 10G wavelengths (100GHz grid) with cost-optimized amplifiers, capacity-optimized fixed OADMs (48 x 10G wavelengths supported mixing 50 & 100 GHz grid) � Tunable universal transponders

� pluggable XFP optics for 10GE LAN/WAN, SDH, G.709, tunable C-band line� Integrated SDH and GbE transparent aggregation

� 4x2.5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC)� 2xGbE for 2.5 Gb/s applications and 9xGbE for 10G applications

� Optical Protection support: 1+1 O-SNCP with tributary protection� Reconfigurable Optical Add-Drop Multiplexers (ROADM)

� Improved network flexibility� Easy upgrade from fixed OADM based on Wavelength Blocker (WB) technology

Release 5 sets now a new milestone in product’s support for Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking

Other supported features- 1626 LM as a stand alone shelf can be used to upgrade legacy 1686 WM and 1640 WM- 1626 LM can be associated to 1696 MS in Greenfield installation





2 Main features 2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 [cont.]

� Line optical fibre amplifiers with optimized regional amplifiers� B-OADM (Band – Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer)� Point-to-point and ring configurations� 4x2.5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC)� Enhanced FEC� Ethernet aggregation and transport� JO and OTU2 traces management

� G709 10Gb/s transponder� Q3 management interface� Digital Performance Monitoring (SDH and Ethernet layer 1)� Optical supervisory channel� 2Mb/s UDC via TRBD and TRBC� Auxiliary channels via OSC� Analog Performance Monitoring





2 Main features 2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ?�Tunable and reconfigurable OADM (TR-OADM)� New, unique Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture for ROADM and Tunable mux/demux filters (all colorless ports)

� Multi-degree ROADM (1-2-3-4 directions)� Programmable WSS grid (50/100GHz)� Up to 72 x add/drop colorless ports (10G or 40G) per/from direction

�40G Wavelength Transport� Modulation formats optimized for different applications� Phased-Shaped Binary transmission (PSBT, 50GHz grid) for regional networks

� Differential Phase-Shift Keying DPSK (100GHz grid) or Partial P-DPSK (50GHz grid) for long-haul networks

� Support of multiple grids (50/100GHz) in the same fiber for concurrent transport of 10G and 40G channels

� Plug&play into deployed systems (non WSS-based architecture)

�Ethernet L2 Performance Monitoring� SPLM : Smart Photonic Layer Manager WSS Functional Description

� 1626 LM R5.0A is able to multiplex up to 96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568.6nm) or 80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561,82nm). � 40G Wavelength Transport:� PSBT modulation format is available from R5.0.� DPSK and P-DPSK modulation formats are available from R5.0A.� WSS is an optoelectronic device which is used to implement TR-OADM and ROADM functions.� From an optoelectronic point of view, WSS implementation varies from one provider to another.� From a service point of view, WSS can be considered as an array of Nx1 optical switches placed between several demultiplexers and a single multiplexer, variable attenuators.

� Performance Monitoring for Ethernet layer 2 is available on ETHC1000 board.Smart Photonic Layer Management� The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork.� The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager (SPLM) � SW-application oriented to the photonic layer, intended to enable:

� Fast, reliable and fully-automatic provisioning, commissioning and upgrade � Automatic optical parameters tuning� Simplified diagnostics� SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R5.0A)

� SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0





2 Main features2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? [cont.]�40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4312 (PSBT)� Fully tunable over the C band� Up to 80x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band� Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection

�High performance 40G G709 solution (100 GHz grid): TRBD4412 (DPSK) and TRBC4412 (DPSK)� Fully tunable over the C band� Up to 40x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band� Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4412)� Dedicated CMDX1052 card� Embedded TDCM, supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers

� Improved performance 40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4612 (P-DPSK), TRBC4612 (P-DPSK)� Fully tunable over the C band� Up to 80x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band� Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4612)� Dedicated CMDX1012 card� Embedded TDCM, supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers

TRBD4x12 is a bidirectional 3R 43.018413 Gb/s G709 transponder. TRBC4x12 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM64/OC192 optical signals (TDM concentrator) in a 43.018413 Gb/s.

TDCM: Tunable Mode Dispersion Compensation ModulePMDC: Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation Module





2.1 Used channels2.3 Loading plan at 50GHz

� On G652 fiber in extended C-band

BAND1 BAND4 BAND12

OSC

… BAND6 …BAND5 BAND11

195.90

0 TH

z

1510

nm

ALC

191.15

0 TH

zCh

11.5

BAND10

1530

.33

nm

1568

.57

nm

191.95

0 TH

zCh

19.5

8 Ch

SubmarineTerrestrial

194.

000

THz

Ch59

.0

The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing plan (from 1530.33nm up to 1568.57nm). This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH application (96 channels). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7, 8, 6, 4, 9, 3, 2,10, 1,11, 12 and 5 (ALCT removed).

Warning: when ALCT is used, it takes 3 channel slots at 50GHz.

In an unrepeatered submarine system, we can use the first 10 bands (80 channels). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 (ALCT removed), 4, 3, 2 and 1.

The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band”channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm.





2.1 Used Channels2.4 Loading plan at 100GHz

� On G652 fiber in C transmission band19

6.00

0 TH

z

BAND9

1529

.53

nm

1561

.42

nm19

2.00

0 TH

z

BAND1 BAND3 BAND7

BAND8 BAND10BAND6BAND4BAND2

BAND5

OSC

1510

nm

The 100GHz channel spacing plan corresponds to the 1626 LM regional application.

This plan is based on the 50GHz WDM grid where some channels are “unused” in a way to group channels by 4, these groups being spaced from 200GHz.

It covers the bands #1 to #10 of the 50GHz WDM grid with one extra wavelength at 1529.53nm (left side of band 1).





Notes Page






3 Line structures





3 Line structures3.1 Line configuration without A/D

Line Terminal Line Terminal

Line Terminal Line TerminalLine Repeater





3 Line structures3.2 Line configuration with A/D

WDM Terminal WDM TerminalROADM / Band OADM / Small OADM

WDM Terminal WDM TerminalBack to Back Terminal

Point-to-point topologies can be implemented with or without OADM. These networks are characterized by ultra-high channel speeds (10 to 40Gbps), high signal integrity and reliability, and fast path restoration. In long-haul networks, the distance between transmitter and receiver can be several hundred kilometers, and the number of amplifiers required between endpoints is typically less than 10. In metro networks, amplifiers are often not needed.

There are two main differences between the Back-to-Back Terminal and B-OADM configurations regarding the channels management :

� All channels can be added and dropped in a BtB Terminal where as some channels are “forbidden” in case of a BOADM configuration (1 channel lost in each band for a 50GHz channel spacing).� Pass-through channels are fully optical in BOADM where as they are regenerated in BtB Terminal (two TRBD used).

Most powerful configurations such as ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer) and TR-OADM (Tunable ROADM) are described in the next pages of this module.





3 Line structures3.3 Ring configurationBack to Back

Terminal

Line RepeaterBand OADM

Back to Back Terminal





3 Line structures3.4 Meshed Topology

TR-OADM

TR-OADM Back to Back Terminal

ROADM

TR-OADMLine Terminal

ROADM

Meshed architectures are the future of optical networks. As networks evolve, rings and point-to-point architectures will still have a place, but mesh will be the most robust topology. This development will be enabled by the introduction of configurable optical cross-connects and switches that will in some cases replace and in other cases supplement fixed DWDM devices.

From a design standpoint, there is a graceful evolutionary path available from point-to-point to meshed topologies. By beginning with point-to-point links, equipped with OADM nodes at the outset for flexibility, and subsequently interconnecting them, the network can evolve into a mesh without a complete redesign. Additionally, meshed and ring topologies can be joined by point-to-point links.

DWDM meshed networks, consisting of interconnected all-optical nodes, will require the next generation of protection. Where previous protection schemes relied upon redundancy at the system, card, or fiber level, redundancy will now migrate to the wavelength level. This means, among other things, that a data channel might change wavelengths as it makes its way through the network, due either to routing or to a switch in wavelength because of a fault. The situation is analogous to that of a virtual circuit through an ATM cloud, which can experience changes in its virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) values at switching points. In optical networks, this concept is sometimes called a light path.

Meshed networks will therefore require a high degree of intelligence to perform the functions of protection and bandwidth management, including fiber and wavelength switching. The benefits in flexibility and efficiency, however, are potentially great. Fiber usage, which can be low in ring solutions because of the requirement for protection fibers on each ring, can be improved in a mesh design. Protection and restoration can be based on shared paths, thereby requiring fewer fiber pairs for the same amount of traffic and not wasting unused wavelengths.





Notes Page






4 1626 LM NE type configurations





4 1626 LM NE type configurations4.1 NE types

BtB� Regenerative Back to back terminal configuration� Traffic distribution & collection point� Regeneration for non added/dropped channels

LT

� Double stage amplifier, maximum output power of +20dBm� Programmable or Automatic Gain Equalization� No regeneration, just optical amplification

LR

� Double stage amplifier� Maximum output power of +20dBm� Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels

� Multi lambda support� Simple NE for point to point topologies

BOADM

� Double stage amplifier� Maximum output power of +17dBm� Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels

Small OADM

LT : Line TerminalLR : Line RepeaterBtB : Back to Back TerminalBOADM : Band OADM





4 1626 LM NE type configurations4.1 NE types [cont.]� Reconfigurable channels add/drop scheme� Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels� Wavelength Blocker (WB) or Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture

� Degree-2 (WB) or Degree-1 to Degree-4, Degree-6 upgradeability (WSS)

� Multi-degree configuration (Degree-1 to Degree-4, Degree-6 upgradeability)

� Up to 72 channels added/dropped� Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture � Connection point in a meshed network (Y Node)

ROADM

TR-OADM

� Multidirectional configuration (Local OTS)� Single port configuration (four line fibers supported: Degree-4)� Dual port configuration to enable diverse route (four line fibers supported: Degree-4)

DirectionlessTR-OADM

ROADM : Reconfigurable OADMTR-OADM : Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM





4 1626 LM NE type configurations4.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch.: pass-through)

93 for 10G (96-3), 77 for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3)



88 for 10G (11x8), 72 for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8)

50GHz signals (10G, PSBT, P-DPSK)

39 (40-1)

39 (40-1)

39 (40-1)

Not possible

100GHz signals (40G DPSK) (*)

Directionless TR-OADM

TR-OADM

ROADM (WSS)

ROADM (WB)

Configuration

� 40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today, but this is achievable in future.� (*) 100GHz signals can be used, if the specific WMAN3374 board that supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5.0B)





4 1626 LM NE type configurations4.3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of channels: add/drop)

64 for 10G and PSBT/P-DPSK

72 for 10G and PSBT/P-DPSK


88 for 10G (11x8), 72 for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8)

50GHz signals (10G, PSBT, P-DPSK)

39 (40-1)

39 (40-1)

39 (40-1)

Not possible

100GHz signals (40G DPSK) (*)

Directionless TR-OADM

TR-OADM

ROADM (WSS)

ROADM (WB)

Configuration

� 40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today, but this is achievable in future.� (*) 100GHz signals can be used, if the specific WMAN3374 board that supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5.0B)





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.4 Line Terminal (Long Haul application)

BM

DX

1000

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 2

CM

DX

12

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

LOFA11y0_Unidir Booster

LOFA11y0_Unidir Preamplifier

OSC

OSC

LT

AL

CT

To/from WDM line

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

The Line Terminal, in Long Haul application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 96 channels on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C Band (1530nm -> 1568.6nm).

The Multiplexing/Demultiplexing architecture is composed of two stages : � One BMDX1000 : Band Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 12 bands� Up to 12 CMDX : Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 8 channels for a 50GHz channel spacing

The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel, transmitted over a 1510nm extra-band wavelength with a 4.864 Mbps bit rate, is dedicated to the transport of a 2 Mbps supervision frame and a 2 Mbps UDC.

1626LM Loading plan in Long Haul application� ALCT1010 unit must be in Band 5 and removed from the 88th channel.� Channel loading order : B7, B8, B6, B4, B9, B3, B2, B10, B1, B11, B12, B5





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir)

OM

DX

8100_L1_X

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

OSC

OSC

LT



To/from OMDX8100_L2

To/from OMDX8100_S2 + OMDX8100_S1

EXTRA IN/OUT

EXP IN/OUT

To/from WDM line

Up to 8λUp to 16λ

λ1

λ2

λ8

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

The Line Terminal, in Regional application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a 100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529.55nm -> 1561.42nm).


1626LM Loading plan in Regional application� Channel loading order : L1, S2, L2, S1.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir)

OM

DX

8100_L1_X

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

OSC

OSC

LT

VOA

LOFA11y1_Bidir

To/from OMDX8100_L2


EXTRA IN/OUT

EXP IN/OUT

λ1

2

1

λ2

λ8

To/from WDM line

Up to 8λUp to 16λ

The Line Terminal, in Regional application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a 100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529.55nm -> 1561.42nm).


1626LM Loading plan in Regional application� Channel loading order : L1, S2, L2, S1.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.7 Line Repeater

LR

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

VOA

VOA

1

1

2

2

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

To/from WDM line

To/from WDM line

The line repeater consists of 2 optical double-stage in-line amplifiers.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

ALCT

WMAN1

OADC0104

WMAN11 VOA 2

PGE functionality is available in R-OADM and LR nodes.

Programmable Gain Equalizer (PGE)� The WMAN1100 board (including the wavelength blocker that is used as building block of the 1626LM ROADM) is used to compensate channel-by-channel for ripple and non-uniformities accumulation� It is called “programmable” because it must be SW-adjusted in field (by a skilled operator)

Typically, WMAN1100 is used for equalization (PGE functionality) when the link is composed of 17 amplifiers or more. Furthermore, a link requires a PGE (and/or ROADM used as PGE) every around 6 amplifiers.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN3

ALCT

WMAN3

OADC0104

AGE: Automatic Gain Equalizer





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.10 Band-OADM

BOADM

BM

DX

1100

To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 7)

BM

DX

1100

Band 1

Band 12

CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

AL

CT

AL

CT

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

2 1VOA 2 1VOA

The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through, without any regeneration.

A link with BOADM supports a maximum of 12 Bands of 7 channels (maximum of 84 channels).

With the BMDX1100, 1 channel out of 8 is lost to guarantee a better band separation (reduced crosstalk for pass-through traffic).





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.11 Small OADM

OM

DX

81000_L1_X

To/from TRBD/TRBC

OM

DX

8100_L1_X

Channel loop

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y1_Unidir

LOFA11y1_Unidir

LOFA11y1_Unidir

LOFA11y1_Unidir

OSC

OSC

Small OADM

Expansion loop

Extra loop

λ1λ1

λ8

Up to 8λ

Up to 16λ

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through, without any regeneration.

The LOFA11y1 in Bidirectional configuration can be used for the Small OADM as well.

A link with Small OADM supports a maximum of 32 channels.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.12 ROADM (WB based)

ROADM

BM

DX

1x00

OA

DC

1102

WMAN1100

OA

DC

1102


CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1WMAN1100

BM

DX

1x00

Band 1

CM

DX

12

CM

DX

12

Band 12

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

WMAN : Wavelength MANager boardOADC : Optical Add Drop Coupler

The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module. One part continues through WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths), the other part being dropped to BMDX1000. For each wavelength to be added in the ROADM - via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be blocked in WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct”wavelengths are coupled via OADC1102.

The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme. In a given band, some channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.

Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is present).





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)

R-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT

To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8)

Up to 96λ at 10Gb/sUp to 80λ at 40Gb/s

OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2


Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12


Express

ADD

LO

FA

1110

1V

OA

2

VO

A1

2

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12



LO

FA

1110

Multi-degree R-OADM : Degree-1 to Degree-4� The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on:

� WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node;� Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.� This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM, such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.� The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based)

TR-OADM

OADC1100 30%

1:2



TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

1:8

x81

VO

A2

1V

OA

2

Rx side



OSC

LOFA11y0_UnidirOCNC1220

2 1VOA

70%

TDMX1180

TDMX1180

TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop� The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability� The WSS, the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes, is an N port device with the following functionalities:� Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped� WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing � Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports� WDM channels spectrum equalization� The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and is reported in the following slide:� On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier, then several drop paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102, OADC1100 and OADC1300). The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers (TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels.

� Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.� On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750 and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3, which implements the power equalization.

� The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler (OADC0104).

� Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.]TR-OADM

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1


To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)

Up to 4λ Up to 4λ

Up to 4λUp to 4λ Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 32λ Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8

21

VO

A

21

VO

ATx side

4:1 4:1Up to 4λ


Up to 4λ

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

ALCT

2 1VOA

OADC0104

Express

ADD





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based)

TR-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT

D

D

M

M




OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2


Express

ADD

M : Multiplexing partD : Demultiplexing part

TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation� All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier, then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC splitter card. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices.� WMAN3 provides the following functions:

� Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped� WDM channels Multiplexing� Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports� WDM channels spectrum equalization� The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.� This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received by any transponder locally installed, removing the need for sites interventions unless new add/drop transponders are required





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.]

TR-OADM

D

OADC1100




TDMX1180

TDMX1180 TDMX1180L

OF

A1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

Up to 72λ

1:2

1:8

OCNC1230

x8

1V

OA

2

1V

OA

2De-multiplexing

part

M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing partOCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler- OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason:

- Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application, it provides the opportunity to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life.

- OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. Nevertheless, it can be used also forDegree 2 and 3 applications. In particular when at Degree 3 application installation, it is already know that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.

OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM, before TR-OADM Degree 2. it can be kept instead of OCNC1230.

Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice: OCNC1230, OCNC1240 or OADC1102.

TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths to/from the aggregate signal for both directions.

Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s.

Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states : � Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.� AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.� AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions.� Blocked : the channel is blocked.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.]

TR-OADM

ML

OF

A1110

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ




OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8

21

VO

A

21

VO

A

Multiplexingpart

ADD

M : Multiplexing part





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based))OCNC 1230

D

M

LOFA11y0

OSC

OCNC 1230

D

LOFA11y0

WMAN3174

OADC 0104

ALCT

LOFA11y0

OSC

OS

CO

CN

C

1230

D M

LO

FA

11y0

OA

DC

0104

AL

CT

LO

FA

11y0 OS

C

WM

AN

3174

TR-OADM

OTS 1 OTS 3

OTS 2

1 2VOA 1 2VOA

OSC

2 VOA 1

12

VO

A

2V

OA

1

M

OADC 0104

WMAN3174

ALCT

LOFA11y0OSC

2 VOA 1



To

/from

TR

BD

/TR

BC

(u

p to

72)




ADD

ADD

ADD

Express

Express

Express

The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. A Y Node configuration may be used as a connection point in a meshed network. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80 channels.

OCNC 1230 is the recommended board for Degree-3 application. Nevertheless, OCNC1240 can be used also (mainly when at the installation phase, it is already known that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be done in the future).

Each channel of the Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following states : � Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.� Express from OTS13 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1.� Express from OTS23 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.� AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.� AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2.� AddDrop_3 : the channel from OTS 3 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 3.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 2 directions.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 3 directions.� AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1, OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions.� AddDrop_1 and Express from OTS23 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 direction and transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.� AddDrop_2 and Express from OTS13 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1.� AddDrop_3 and Express from OTS12 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 3 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.� Blocked : the channel is blocked.





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop

DirectionlessTR-OADM

LOFA11y0

OSC

OTS 1

1 2VOA

OADC 0104

WMAN3174

ALCT

LOFA11y0OSC

2 VOA 1Express

LOFA11y0

OSC

OTS 2

1 2VOA

OADC 0104

WMAN3174

ALCT

LOFA11y0OSC

2 VOA 1Express

DEMUX part(DROP side)

MUX part(ADD side)


MUX part(ADD side)

OCNC 1280

OCNC 1280

Connectivity Block

Connectivity BlockUp to 64λ

Up to 64λ

TR-OADM with Multidirectional add/drop architecture (Local OTS)� The TR-OADM described in R.5.0 provides the capability to re-configure any nodes remotely in terms of wavelength assignment to each channel and pass-through. The only missing degree of flexibility is the capability to add/drop channels dynamically to/from any direction supported by the TR-OADM node.� This additional functionality is supported through the so-called Multidirectional add/drop configuration.� Each Multidirectional add/drop block is able to manage up to 64 chs in add/drop and these channels can be dynamically associated to any direction supported by the TR-OADM node





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop [cont.]

Up to 4λ

Up to 4λ

OADC1750

x8

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)4:1

4:1

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)4:1

4:1

Up to 32λ

OADC1300

Up to 4λ

Up to 4λ

8:1

8:1

x8

LOFA1110

2 VOA 1

Up to 32λ

OADC 0104

WMAN3174

ALCT

2 VOA 1

LOFA1110

OCNC 1280

8:1

WMAN3174

OADC 0104

LOFA11y0

1 2VOA

ALCTTDMX1180

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

x8

Up to 64λ

Up to 64λ

LOFA1110

2 VOA 1


MUX part(ADD side)


MUX part(ADD side)





4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.18 Back-to-Back Terminal

BM

DX

1000


BM

DX

1000

Band 1

Band 12

CM

DX

12

CM

DX

12

TRBD TRBD

BtBCM

DX

1

CM

DX

1

OSC

OSC

LOFA11yz_Unidir

LOFA11yz_Unidir

OSC

OSC

LOFA11yz_Unidir

LOFA11yz_Unidir

AL

CT

AL

CT

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

2 1VOA 2 1VOA

When all the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1626 LM is a back-to-back terminal or a hub node.

The non added/dropped channels are 3R (retiming, reshaping, reamplifying) regenerated.

WARNING : The optical pass-through is not permitted for BMDX1000.





5 Existing infrastructure upgrade





5.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected

New NE

OM

DX

16

1626 LM - TRBD

1626 LM - TRBD

16

1

EX

P

ATT.1

ATT.2

1626 LM -TRBD

OM

DX

16

16

1

1686 WM - 10Gb/s 1686 WMTerminal

: legacy 1686 WM boards

: new 1626 LM boards

The 1686 WM is based on two mux/demux stages: � the first one is made up of two OMDX boards, able to multiplex (or de–multiplex, because the boards are bi-directional) up to 16 chs each (one in red band, the other one in blue band) on a 100GHz grid.� the second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 16 channels at 100GHz each to have one DWDM signal of 32 channels at 100GHz in C band (by means of the expansion board).

For the receiver side, the diagram is similar with Demux and without attenuator (Att.1 and Att.2).

This configuration allows to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels to/from the DWDM line.

This upgrade is always possible, whatever the actual number “N” of installed channels. The remaining 32–“N” channels can be filled with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the OMDX16 boards of the 1686 WM mux/demux scheme.

1626 LM transponders connected to the 1686 WM mux/demux and OADM’s for both upgrades and greenfield (in this last case no 1686 WM transponders used).





5.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected [cont.]

New NE

1626

LM

-T

RB

D

1626

LM

-T

RB

D

1686 WM OADM4/8

1686 WM OFA

1686

WM

-10

Gb

/s

1st stage 2nd stage

1686

WM

-10

Gb

/s



1686 WMOADM

The OADM repeater is made up of:� line amplifiers, with the extraction/insertion of the OSC before/after the double–stage amplifier,� OADM board, able to add/drop up to 4/8 channels per direction (east/west) according to the board type,� transponders.

In upgrade installation, 1626 LM transponders, directly connected to the 1686 WM boards, can be added to the already installed 1686 WM OADM system.

In greenfield installation, the OADM structure is the same than the upgrade one but with only 1626 LM transponders.





5.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.1.2 Upgrade up to 52 channels

New NE

OM

DX

16

1626 LM -TRBD CM

DX

CM

DX

1626 LM -TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

16

1

1

1

8

8

BM

DX

EX

P

ATT.1

100 Ghz

50 Ghz

ATT.2

Att.1: from 1686 WM installation

Att.2: chosen to have the same power/band at the EXP inputs



1686 WM -10 Gb/s

1686 WM -10 Gb/s

This configuration is possible when only one 1686 WM Mux/Demux is installed (up to 16 channels), allowing the connection of the 1626 LM mux/demux to the unused port of the 1686 WM EXP board. Hence it is possible to increase the channels number to more than 32, filling the available band with 50GHz spaced channels.

The free band (Blue or Red) is filled with 1626 LM transponders at 50 GHz .� Up to 36 (33) 1626 LM channels in the Red band for 52 (49) channels final system capacity with the +20 dBm amplifier (+17/+14 dBm amplifier).� Up to 32 1626 LM channels in the Blue band for 48 channels final system capacity.� The total link capacity is decreased when there are add/drop channels in the band populated with 1626 LM transponders and mux/demux: the channels 50 GHz spaced from the add/drop channels must be skipped for filtering issues (up to 8 channels skipped).

The advantage of this configuration is that one band is filled @ 50 GHz channel spacing and the total capacity is up to 52 channels (when Red band is upgraded with the 1626 LM transponders).

For the receiver side, the diagram is similar without attenuator (Att.1 and Att.2).

It is applicable to both upgrades and greenfields (no 1686 WM transponders in this last case).





5.2 1640 WM upgrade 5.2.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards

New NE

8:1

8

1

2:1

5:1

TCS401

ATT.1

Att.1: value to be chosen to equalize the channel powers



1640 WM -10 Gb/s

1640 WM -10 Gb/s

1626 LM -TRBD CM

DX

CM

DX

1626 LM -TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

1

1

8

8B

MD

X

The TCS scheme is based on 3 mux/demux stages (only the B&W to WDM direction is described):� The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 8 channels on a 200GHz grid (function supported by the TCS1xx, TCS302 and TCS401 boards).� The second one can mix up to 5 aggregate signals of 8 channels to reach 40 wavelengths on a 100GHz grid (supported by the TCS302, Off–grid channels, and TCS401, On grid channels);� The third one combines the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have one DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (function provided by the TCS401 board).

The upgrade is allowed only when up to 40 channels of the 1640 WM system are installed.

Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels (40), all the remaining 80–“N” channels can be added with 1626 LM transponders + Mux/Demux (CMDX, BMDX).

The 1626 LM aggregate signal is connected to the unused input/output port of the 2:1 combiner/1:2 splitter of the TCS401 board.

The receiver side is similar without attenuator.

The upgrade configuration connecting directly the 1626 LM tributaries with the TCS boards is not allowed.





5.2 1640 WM upgrade 5.2.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards

New NE

MD

X 342

1640 WM - 10 Gb/s

1626 LM- TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

40

1

MD

X 441

100 Ghz

On Grid

100 Ghz

Off Grid

50 Ghz

1626 LM - TRBD

MD

X 343

40

1



The MDX multiplexing architecture is based on two mux / demux stages:� The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 40 channels on a 100GHz grid; this function is supported by the MDX342 (On grid channels).� The second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have one DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (by means of the MDX441 board).

Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels the remaining 80–“N” channels can be filled with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the MDX342 boards of the 1640 WM mux/demux scheme.

It is not allowed to upgrade an already installed 1640 WM system (with MDX441 and MDX342 boards) with the 1626 LM mux/demux scheme (instead of MDX343) connected to the MDX441 board.





5.3 1696 MS addition 5.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected

WDM in

WDM out

OMDX8100_M_S1

81

81

MUX

DEMUX

1

MUX

DEMUX

OMDX8100_M_S2

81

8

81

81

MUX

DEMUX

OMDX8100_M_L2

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS

SBLB

LBSB

DEMUX

MUXλ SPV

λ SPV

81

81

MCC / OCC10

MCC / OCC10

MCC / OCC10

MCC / OCC10

New NE

1626 LM- TRBD

1626 LM -TRBD

: legacy 1696 MS boards






Notes Page






6 Ethernet applications





6 Ethernet applications6.1 Traffic concentration and mapping

VirtualConcatenation

VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v

GFP-T#1 #2

Mapping

#1 GE or FC #2 GE or FC

Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48(Bridge & Switch)

User side *

2xGBE_FC board

SFPLine #1

SFPLine #2

Not used in 1626 LM R5.0A Front side

Front side

ETHC1000 board

Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration

VLAN tagging#xx #yy

#1 GE #12 GE

Matrix

User side *

10GE WAN Line P#13

Line #1

10GE WAN XFP P#13

Line #2

10GE WAN Line P#14

10GE WAN XFP P#14

Front side Front side

Back planeaccess

� 2xGBE_FC board- From User side, the Generic Framing Procedure – Transparent mode is used first to transport the data traffic (two Gigabit Ethernet or two Fibre Channel signals) into a SDH/SONET (STM-16/OC-48) frame. Each resulting GFP-T frame is then encapsulated into a Virtual Container (VC-4-nv) via a Virtual Concatenation according to the signal type (VC-4-6v for Fibre Channel, VC-4-7v for Gigabit Ethernet). These VC-4-nv are then multiplexed into the final 2.5G SDH/SONET signal.

- * Warning: Four interfaces/ports are present on client side, but only two of them can be used (U1 and U2 on the front plate). Two interfaces/ports (and related bridge & switch) are present on line/aggregate side, but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front plate).

� ETHC1000 board- From user side, each received GbE signal is first tagged with a VLAN ID and then is concentrated into a 10GbE LAN frame. In order to be compatible with the STM-64 transponders of the 1626LM , this latter frame is finally converted in 10GbE WAN PHY thanks to the WIS mapping.

- There are two 10GbE ports on the line side:- Line 1 – P#13 - Line 2 – P#14





6 Ethernet applications 6.2 Boards interconnections: examples

BMDX

CMDX

TRBD

TRBC

User#1User#9

STM-6410GbE WAN

User#1User#2

1626LM R5.0A Master shelf

B&W

B&WSTM-16

User#1User#2

λ1

λ2

λ3WDM

1626LM R5.0A Master shelf or Secondary shelf

ETHC 1000

2xGBE_FC

2xGBE_FC

ETHC1000 : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module. The optical line interface is B&W XFP module and must be connected to a STM-64 (OC-192) TRBD.

2xGBE_FC : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module. The optical line interface is either a B&W SFP module to be connected to a TRBC (4 User inputs), or a WDM SFP module to be connected directly to the relevant CMDX or OMDX.

.





6 Ethernet applications6.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service

2xGBE_FC ETHC1000

WDM Terminal with several GbE ports

WDM Terminal with several GbE ports

Dedicated wavelength approach

The main purpose of the Ethernet applications is to improve data traffic transport capabilities of the 1626 LM. Two boards (2xGE_FC and ETHC1000) are supported in order to perform the traffic concentration and mapping.

System capacityThe Alcatel 1626 LM R 5.0A provides a modular transmission capacity by multiplexing, per each shelf :� up to 32 x GbE/FC streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568.6nm), by means of up to sixteen 2xGE_FC boards (managing up to 2 x 1GbE/1FC streams each).� up to 144 x GbE streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568.6nm), by means of up to twelve ETHC1000 boards (managing up to 12 x 1GbE streams each; up to twelve boards can be plugged in current release).� mixed configurations are supported.

These data traffic boards are used in point to point applications (transparent LAN to LAN services).





7 1626 LM system layout





7 1626 LM system layout7.1 Optinex Rack layout

> Up to 16x10Gb/s or 4x40Gb/s optical channels in one single shelf

> Up to 48x10Gb/s or 12x40Gb/s optical channels in one single rack

> Up to 3 shelves can be hosted in one rack

> Up to 6 racks are managed

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Air deflector

FANS

FANS

FANS

Fiber storage

Top Rack Unit

OPTINEX

Air deflector

There is no requirement for access to the rear for maintenance, so racks can be installed back-to-back. Each rack is equipped with a maximum of three sub-racks with a fan unit and an air filter located at the bottom of each sub-rack. All subracks are identical, fitted with different units depending on the subrack functionality. Power supply, fans, shelf controller and rack alarm interface units must be fitted to all shelves.

For Optinex Rack with TRU, if DCU is needed, it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA) located at the bottom of the rack. Up to 5 trays can be installed, either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or Optical trays (3AL 94942 AA).

For Optinex Rack with MA NG-TRU, if DCU is needed, it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA) located at the bottom of the rack. Up to 3 trays can be installed, either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or Optical trays (3AL 94942 AA).

One shelf is declared as the “Master shelf” and the other shelves are declared as “secondary shelves”.





7 1626 LM system layout7.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf

11

The shelf is divided into 41 slots.

Six different mechanics are available for the 1626 LM boards:� 20 mm width, small height; this mechanic fits into slots 21, 22, 39 and 40.� 20 mm width, medium height; this mechanic fits into slots 1, 2, 19 and 20.� 25 mm width, small height; this mechanic fits into slots 23 to 38� 25 mm width, medium height; this mechanic fits into slots 3 to 18� 25 mm width, tall height; this mechanic takes two slots: one 25mm wide, medium height slot plus one 25mm wide, small height one which is under it. Thus, it fits in slots 3 plus 23, 4 plus 24 to 18 plus 38. The relevant units use the connector from the medium height slot to communicate with the SC.� Double width, tall height (these boards are foreseen for future releases); this mechanic takes four slots : two adjacent 25mm wide, medium height slots plus the two 25mm wide, small height ones which are under them. I.e; it can fit in slots 5, 6, 25, 26. The units which have this mechanics use the connector from the left medium height slot (slot 5 in the above example) to communicate with the SC.





7 1626 LM system layout7.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

BM

DX

1000

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

HS

KU

OS

CU

1010

5

AL

CT

1010

6

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

25

US

IB

BM

DX

1000

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 2

CM

DX

12

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)

To/from TRBD/TRBC

(up to 8)



OSC

OSC

VOA

AL

CT

1

1

2

2

To/from WDM line

VOA





7 1626 LM system layout7.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

19 20

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

CM

DX

1010

1 2 23





7 1626 LM system layout7.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUO

MD

X81

00_L

1_X

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

HS

KU

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y1

7

LO

FA

11y1

9

25

US

IB

OM

DX

8100_L1_X

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

To/from TRBD/TRBC

OSC

OSC

VOA

VOA



To/from OMDX8100_L2


EXTRA IN/OUT

EXP IN/OUT

2

2

1

1

To/from WDM line

Up to 8λUp to 16λ

λ1

λ2

λ8





7 1626 LM system layout7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUO

MD

X81

00_S

2

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

19 20

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OM

DX

8100

_L2

1 2 23





7 1626 LM system layout7.7 Line Repeater Master shelf - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

25

LO

FA

11y0

10

LOFA11y0_Unidir

VOA 12

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

To/from WDM line

To/from WDM line

LOFA11y0_Unidir

VOA1 2





7 1626 LM system layout7.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

1100

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 64

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107 9

WM

AN

1100

11

31

US

IB

8

25 28

5

AL

CT

1010

5

OA

DC

0104

25

AL

CT

1010

9

29

OA

DC

0104

PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN1

ALCT

WMAN1OADC0104





7 1626 LM system layout7.9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

3174

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 64

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107

WM

AN

3174

11

31

8

28

AL

CT

1010

9

AL

CT

1010

5

OA

DC

0104

25 29

OA

DC

0104


LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN3

ALCT

WMAN3OADC0104





7 1626 LM system layout7.10 BOADM Master shelf - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

BM

DX

1100

1 2

3 4 5 6 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

HS

KU

LO

FA

11y0

5

LO

FA

11y0

8

AL

CT

1010

6

LO

FA

11y0

LO

FA

11y0

BM

DX

1100 O

SC

U10

10

4 9 10 11

30

AL

CT

1010

7

BM

DX

1100

To/from TRBD/TRBC (up

to 7)

BM

DX

1100

Band 1

Band 12

CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

AL

CT

AL

CT

OSC

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

OSC

2 1VOA 2 1VOA





7 1626 LM system layout7.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf - Example

FANS100041

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

34 38

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CM

DX

1010

19

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

20

CM

DX

1010





7 1626 LM system layout7.12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf - Example

FANS100041

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

34 38

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CM

DX

1052

19

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

BO

FA

(o

pti

on

al)

TR

BD

4412

TR

BD

4412

TR

BD

4412

TR

BD

4412

20





7 1626 LM system layout7.13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example

FANS100041

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

34 38

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CM

DX

1010

19

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1 TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

20

The 1626 LM subracks and software give flexibility in the unit declaration.





7 1626 LM system layout7.14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack - Example

N°48 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°28 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°38 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°18 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°28 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°38 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°48 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°28 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°38 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°48 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°18 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

N°18 TRBD

With TDMX& OADC1750

& LOFA

8 TRBDWith TDMX

& OADC1750

8 TRBDWith TDMX

& OADC1750

8 TRBDWith TDMX

& OADC1750

Line & WMAN

Shelf OTS 3

Line & WMAN

Shelf OTS 2

Line & WMAN

Shelf OTS 1

TRU TRUTRU TRU TRUTRU

Air deflector Air deflectorAir deflectorAir deflectorAir deflectorAir deflector

Air deflector

Air input

Air deflector

Air input Air input

Air deflector Air deflectorAir deflector Air deflector

Air input Air inputAir input

The complete rack view example illustrates a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration, 10Gb/s rate, unprotected, which can support up to 72 added/dropped channels.

In the illustration, one color is used per OTS.

CAUTION : It is strongly recommended not to mix OTS in racks and subracks. This organization brings a clear position of each function/direction and makes easier the implementation and the operation.

The following table summarizes the capacity of a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration, 10Gb/s rate, unprotected, in comparison with shelves/racks number.- Warning: 1626 LM R 5.0A is able to manage 6 racks at the maximum





7 1626 LM system layout7.15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

OS

CU

1010

OS

CU

1010

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523

US

IB

242525

25 25

US

IB

24 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 1

OCNC1230

OADC0104


WMAN3174

ALCT

D

M


OSC

1 VOA 2

LOFA11y0

OSC

2 1VOA

LOFA11y0






FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 2

DOADC1100

VO

A2

1

VO

A2

1To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)



TDMX1180

TDMX1180 TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

Up to 72λ

1:2

1:8

OCNC1230

x8






FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 3

M

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ




OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8





7 1626 LM system layout7.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (8 first channels)

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 371 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20

26 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 24

2525

25 2524 24

2525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 2524

2525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 2524

2525

25

OC

NC

1230

29 11 12 13 14

TD

MX

1180

OA

DC

1750

2

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

4 5 6 7 8 9 103

M

WMAN3174

4:1 4:1


Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λOADC1750

D

OADC1100


TDMX1180

Up to 72λ

1:2

OCNC1230





7 1626 LM system layout7.19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (From 9th to 72nd channel)

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 371 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20

26 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 24

2525

25 2524 24

2525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 2524

2525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 2524

2525

25

OC

NC

1230

29 11 12 13 14

TD

MX

1180

OA

DC

1750

2

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

4 5 6 7 8 9 103

LO

FA

1110

19

M

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1

4:1 4:1


Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

OADC1750

OADC1300

x8

DOADC1100

VO

A2

1


TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

1:8

x8





7 1626 LM system layout7.20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

1100

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

HS

KU

OS

CU

1010

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 6

BM

DX

1000

4

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107

AL

CT

1010

9

WM

AN

1100

11

31

US

IB

8

OA

DC

29

OA

DC

25

BM

DX

1000

28

In the above example, the WMAN1100 boards are located in the “Master shelf” and related transponders are inserted in a “Secondary shelf”.

It is also possible to insert the WMAN1100 in a “Secondary shelf” with the related transponders to reduce the inter-shelf cabling between. It that case, WMAN1100 boards can be inserted in:� [3,4 and 5] + [23,24 and 25]� [16,17 and 18] + [36,37 and 38]





7 1626 LM system layout7.21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

2527 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 1

BM

DX

1000

22 53 4

24

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

WMAN3174

OCNC1230

OADC0104

ALCT


OTS 1

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2


Express

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12


Express

ADD

LO

FA

1110

1V

OA

2





7 1626 LM system layout7.22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

2527 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 2

BM

DX

1000

22 53 4

24

WMAN3174

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

OCNC1230

ALCT


OTS 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

ADD

BM

DX

1000

Express

VO

A1

2

CM

DX

1

CM

DX

12 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8)


LO

FA

1110Express





7 1626 LM system layout7.23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf

LOFA11YZ 234

ESCT2000 1

OSCU1010 6

PSUP 11

PSUP 12HSKU1100 10RAIU1100 9

7

FANS

13

8

495 mm

73 mm

200

mm

LOFA11YZ 5

In R 5.0A, the 1626LM compact shelf is only used for Line Repeater configuration. As a consequence, it only supports the following boards : � ESCT2000 (slot 1)� LOFA11yz (from slot 2 to 5) – Slots 2 and 5 are recommended� OSCU (from slot 2 to 6)� EMPM1000 (slots 3 and 4)� FANS2000 (slot 13)� PUSP (slots 11 and 12)� RAIU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 9 is recommended� HSKU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 10 is recommended





7 1626 LM system layout7.24 Power Feeding sub-system

-48V A FilterDC/DC

DC/DC

Filtered -48V A

DC/DC

Filter

Sharing diodes

Filtered -48V B

3.7V B 5.4V B

3.7V A 5.4V A

PSUP

PSUP

Main boards

Auxiliaryboards-40.5 to -57 V

DC inputSupplied from Top Rack Unit

-48V B

Duplicated supply for each card

Back Panel Power supply distribution

Subrack

3V, 5V

3V, 5V

The power supply for each subrack is provided from the top of the rack through the Top Rack Unit,which can provide up to 3 kW at a nominal -48 V DC. The power supply is divided between two power rails to increase reliability. An auxiliary supply (3.7V and 5.4V) is also provided to each board to maintain alarm operation in the case of local DC/DC converter failure.

Each power distribution supply to a subrack is protected by an individual thermo-magnetic circuit breaker.

Each subrack has two power supply units (PSUP) working from the –48v supply in a load-sharing configuration for protection against failure of one unit. These have an acceptance range of –40.5 V to –57.0 V and provide filtering and surge suppression. Lower voltages are also generated by DC-DC converters and distributed through the backplane to functional units on the subrack. A return path to each of the two -48V supplies (A & B) from the units to the power supplies is provided.





Answer the Questions

1 – What is the operating window of DWDM systems ?2 – Which optical band is used by the 1626 LM ?3 – What is the minimum spacing between 2 channels ?4 – What is the function of the OSC ?5 – How many CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit ?6 – Which NE type configurations are available ?7 – Which protections are available ?8 – Which BMDX unit is needed for BOADM repeater configuration ?

Time allowed: 15 minutes

1 – The 3rd optical window is used for DWDM systems.

2 – The extended C-Band is used by the 1626 LM R 5.0A, between 1530nm and 1568,6nm.

3 – The minimum spacing between 2 channels is 50GHz for 1626 LM R5.0A.

4 – The OSC is mainly dedicated to the transport of a 2Mb/s supervision frame and if needed an other 2Mb/s signal as user data channel.

5 – Up to 12 CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit.

6 – LT, LR, BOADM, Small OADM, ROADM, TR-OADM and back-to-back terminal configurations are available for 1626 LM R 5.0A.

7 – O-SNCP and OMSP.

8 – BMDX1100 unit is needed for B-OADM repeater configuration.

Your answers :

1 –

2 –

3 –

4 –

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 -





Notes Page






Module Summary

� 1626 LM R 5.0A is a very flexible solution� Terrestrial applications : Regional, LH, ULH� 50GHz or 100GHz channel spacing� Linear, ring and meshed network topologies� Terminal, B-t-B, Repeater, B-OADM, Small OADM, ROADM and TR-OADM configurations

� G.709 10Gb/s and 40Gb/s Transponders� Ethernet aggregation and transport� J0 and OTUk traces management

� Upgrade of existing infrastructures� 1640 WM, 1686 WM

� Highly integrated� Up to 48 transponders in one rack





Self-assessment on the Objectives

� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation





End of ModuleSystem General Description

Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 1

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 20093JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0



Module 2System Operation Overview








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceProduct Overview � System Operation Overview1 � 2 � 2

Blank Page


First editionSteunou L.2009-03-2501RemarksAuthorDateEdition

Document History





Module Objectives


� Describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Management tools 71.1 1626 LM management 81.2 Management internal architecture 91.3 1626 LM Equipment view 101.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf 111.5 Navigation diagram 12

2 Operation and maintenance facilities 132.1 Main operation facilities 142.2 Main maintenance facilities 15

3 G.709 standard in 1626 LM 173.1 OTN network layers 183.2 Optical Transport Network benefits 193.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy 203.4 G709 framing structure 213.5 UNI and NNI interfaces 223.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work? 233.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work? 243.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? 253.9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work? 27

4 Optical 1+1 Protection 294.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle 304.2 OSNCP architecture 314.3 OMSP Protection: Principle 324.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation 334.5 OMSP Protection: Failure detection 34





1 Management tools





1 Management tools1.1 1626 LM management

WDMMetro ring network

F

Q3

DCC/OSC DCC/OSC

DCC/OSC DCC/OSCSPLM

1320 CT

LR

BtB

BtB

DC NDC N

GNE

1350 OMS & SPLM� Three software applications can be used to operate and maintain the WDM network :� 1320 CT� 1350 OMS� SPLM Tool

BOADM

Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1350 OMS. In latter case, the directly connected NE to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE.

When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface, it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the same optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels, carried by the OSC :

� OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes)� OTS- DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes)

In addition to DCC, the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice channel) and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel.

A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G.703) between each NE is available for any purpose, carried also by the OSC.

� SPLM tool descriptionThe Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork.

SPLM is integrated in the 1350 OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R 5.0A), SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R 5.0





1 Management tools1.2 Management internal architecture

MASTER SHELF SECONDARY SHELF

The controller sub–system is based on a two–level model:� Equipment Controller (EC)� Shelf Controller (SC).

There is one active Equipment Controller in each node (first level controller) and one active Shelf Controller in each shelf (second level controller). The ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the EC function and the SC function. When the board is located in the master shelf, both functionalities are operational and active. When the board is located in secondary shelves, only the SC functionality is provided. The IS-LINK realizes the communication between the EC and all the SCs located in separated shelves. Communication between the EC and the local SC is done through the ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus).

Equipment Controller function

EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP, Alarms correlations, history storage of 15 Minutes and 24hour PM data, software version management, software activation, software download, filtering, logging and forwarding of events and alarms received by SCs, OSI/IP routing capability configuration, access control. The Database which contains the NE configuration is saved in the pluggable Flash card.

Shelf Controller function

In a shelf, all the boards are connected to the SC via the SPI or ISPB (for PM collection on ETHC1000 board) bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms collection, Performance data, Analogue Measurement, Card Detection, Firmware version, remote inventory and data EEPROM reading).

Failure or removal of either type of management unit (EC/SC) will not directly affect traffic.In case of complete power outage, removal of ESCT card in Master shelf when power comes back will clear configuration registers of secondary cards (all units).





1 Management tools 1.3 1626 LM Equipment view

Board alarm synthesis indicator

Subrack identification and location in the equipment

Empty board slot

“In service and locked”administrative state indicator

From 1320 CT or from the OS (135O OMS), the “Equipment view” application (also called EML-USM) displays in graphical mode the NE hardware configuration such as defined in NE software database (Management Information Base): number of racks, number of shelves per rack, slot configuration, board view, port view. Alarm and administrative status are provided through the different “view”levels.

For instance, “Board alarm synthesis indicator” colour from Equipment view (as shown above) reflects the highest current alarm severity, regarding the “Equipment domain” alarms only.

When a board is “in service and locked”, no modification is enabled regarding the corresponding slot configuration. The board must be set “out of service” before any change (removal or modification of slot configuration).

The above shelf belong to a 1626 LM R5.0A installed in Degree 3 TR-OADM application. This first shelf includes among other boards, the following: 2 x PSUP1000, ESCT2000, OSCU1010, 2 x LOFA1110, WMAN3, TMDX1180, ETHC1000, TRBD1191, OADC1750, ALCT1010 and FAN1000





1 Management tools 1.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf

Configuration corresponding to a Line Repeater

The above Line Repeater includes the following boards:- 2 x PSUP1000, ESCT2000, OSCU1010, 2 x LOFA1120 and FAN2000





1 Management tools 1.5 Navigation diagram





2 Operation and maintenance facilities





2 Operation and maintenance facilities 2.1 Main operation facilities� Equipment configuration� Subrack, boards and drawers declaration� Remote inventory� Optical cabling declaration

� Optical channel management� ROADM and TR-OADM configuration� O-SNCP and OMPS: cross-connections display� TRBD1191 cross-connections management� Ethernet transport: cross-connections management� OTS, ODU, OTU and J0 traces management on OSCU, transponders andEthernet boards

� Optical power management� Power tuning� Thresholds tuning

Optical channel management- To facilitate the TR-OADM management, 1626 LM R5.0A provides the operate a way to force the “Line state” (ON / OFF) for a given channel

- The TR-OADM configuration (Multi-degree application) includes 3 main steps- WMAN board configuration- TDMX1180 configuration- Related cross-connections management





2 Operation and maintenance facilities 2.2 Main maintenance facilities� Performance Monitoring : activation and data collection� Power level measurements� Spectrum acquisition on WMAN accesses� SPLM tool� Alarms handling� OSNCP and OMSP status management� Loopback management� Backup and restore� Remote inventory� Board replacement

M S

OCPU 2104

� Analog Performance MonitoringThe 1626LM provides the possibility, through 1350 OMS, of performing a regular and configurable polling of the optical powers measured on each monitoring point of the equipment. The obtained data can be stored for history tracking and dedicated threshold crossing alarms can be set

� SPLM tool description� The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork. SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with 1350 OMS on a server.

� In the current release the SPLM:� provides a network topology management function,� calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel,� tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based) configurations.





Notes Page






3 G.709 standard in 1626 LM





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.1 OTN network layers

IN LINE REPEATER

IN LINE REPEATER

OCH Trail

OMS Trail OMS Trail

OTS Phys. Conn. OTS Phys. Conn.

LINE TERMINAL

LINE TERMINAL

BACK TO BACK TERMINAL

Ops Ops

Digital Signal Path

CLIENT TERMINAL

CLIENT TERMINAL

The 1626 LM implements the Optical Transport Network standard (specified in ITU-T G.709) to provide Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning functionalities to this DWDM platform. This recommendation – sometimes referred to as Digital Wrapper (DW) – takes single wavelength SONET/SDH technology a step further enabling transparent, wavelength manageable multi-wavelength networks.





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.2 Optical Transport Network benefits

� The implementation of the OTN Architecture in the WDM Equipment extends the transport control capabilities of the WDM optical channels.

� OTN makes leverage on the transport layers defined in the OTH in order to provide:� Mapping of a client signal of any rate (up to payload capacity) into containers at pre-defined bit-rates. This allows:� To map a synchronous signal (SDH) into an asynchronous one (WDM)� Client-independent networking

� Embedded associated overhead information for management and networking purposes (monitoring, support for complex connectivity, protections, alarms, etc.)

� Capability to support hierarchical multiplexing and concatenation

OTN (Optical Transport Network) architecture is defined in the ITU-T G.872 Recommendation, while the ITU-T G.709 Recommendation defines its interface in terms of Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH).

The principles of these Architectures are implemented in Alcatel-Lucent WDM Equipment starting from 1626 LM R 2.0.





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy

� Optical (channel) Payload Unit� Optical (channel) Data Unit� Optical Transport (channel) Unit� Optical Channel� Optical Channel Carrier� Optical Multiplex Section� Optical Transmission section� OTM Overhead Signal� Optical Supervisory Channel� Optical Physical Section

In OTH the Optical Channel layer is further structured in layers:� OPUk: Optical (channel) Payload Unit� ODUk: Optical (channel) Data Unit� OTUk: Optical (channel) Transport Unit

The index k specifies the signal rate supported, according to the following convention:� K=1 represents an approximate rate of 2.5 Gbit/s� K=2 represents an approximate rate of 10 Gbit/s� K=3 represents an approximate rate of 40 Gbit/s

The OPUk, ODUk and OTUk layers are introduced in OTH in order to support the network management and supervision functionality through the contents of the additional signal overhead (OH) of the Units.

The Optical Channels, mapped to the OCC structure, are transported into an information structure named Optical Transport Module (OTM-n).

The OTM-n with full functionalities transports an additional overhead: the OTM Overhead Signal (OOS), containing overhead information related to the OCh, OMS and OTS sections.

The OSS information is mapped into a separate channel named Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).

The index n in OTM-n specifies the number of OCC transported by the structure (not including the OSC). OTM-n plays a role similar to STM-n in SDH architecture, the OCCs acting as tributary slots within the OTM-n architecture.





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.4 G709 framing structure

� G-709 framing performed by transponders provides Operation and Maintenance tools for the WDM line management

FA OH

ODU-2 OH

OPU-2FEC ODU-2

OHOPU-2 STM-64O

H STM-64

ODTUG-12

STM-16STM-16OH

OPU-1GCC1/GCC2, TTI, PM, APS, TCM x4

OTU-2 ODU-2OH ODTUG-12

9.957 Gb/s : Other10.3 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN

11.09 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN10.709 Gb/s : Other

OTU-2 OH

ODU-1 OH

ODU-1

OPU-1

OPU-2GCC0, TTI

The framing structure depicted above does not take into account the level 3 (k=3) corresponding to 40Gbit/s bit-rate.

First, client signal is mapped into an OPU-k by adding an Over Head. The OPU OH consists of the Payload Structure Identifier (PSI) which includes the Payload Type (PT) and overhead bits associated with the mapping of client signals into the payload, like for example, the justification bits required for asynchronous mappings. The OPU OH is therefore terminated at the point where the OPU is assembled and disassembled.

ODU-k is then obtained by adding another OH to the OPU-k. The ODU-k OH consists of portions dedicated to the end-to-end ODU-k path and to six levels of tandem connection monitoring. The ODU-k path OH is terminated where the ODU-k is assembled and disassembled. The Tandem Connection OH is added and terminated at the source and sink of the corresponding tandem connections, respectively. Additional bytes provides two General Communication Channels (GCC1/GCC2) and Protection Communication Channels to manage Automatic Protection Switching at different levels (ODU-k path, ODU-k TCM, OTU-k section).

The OTU-2 frame structure is based on the ODU-2 frame structure by adding an OH and a FEC code. The overhead of OTU-2 is composed of a Frame Alignment Overhead (FA OH in the figure above) and an OTU-2 OH to support operational functions for transport via one or several Optical Channel Carriers (OCC). FA OH consists of a Frame Alignment Signal to detect the beginning of the OTU-2 signal and a Multi Frame Alignment Signal as OTU and ODU frames can span multiple OTU frames. The OTU-2 OH provides bytes for the Section Monitoring (Trail Trace Identifier, BIP-8…) and a General Communication Channel (GCC0).





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.5 UNI and NNI interfaces

WDM NetworkWDM Network

UNI

UNI

Block Diagram for UNI:

Block Diagram for NNI:

DS OPUk ODUk OTUkUNI

OTUkNNI OTUk

OCH

OCH OCH

NNI

ODUk frame pass-through

Client NE

ClientNE

User to Network Interface (UNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between the Data Signal (DS), that is the client input signal (for example a STM-64 frame) and the Optical Payload Unit (OPUk). In the UNI, the ODUk and the OPUk sections are terminated� The UNI is the typical interface between an external NE and a G.709 WDM NE.

Network to Network Interface (NNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between two OpticalTransport Unit (OTUk). In the UNI, only the OTUk section is terminated, while the ODUk and the OPUk sections are not.� The NNI is normally used when two transponders are connected together inside a WDM node through their B&W interface for regeneration of the client signal.

� The NNI is supported over 10G TRBD only in R 5.0A.





OGPI

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU2

3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work?

STM64OHSTM64 OPU-2

FECODU-2 OH

OPU-2ODU-2 OH

FA OH OTU-2 OH

OPU-2 ODU-2 G709 frame

Client Line

Port #1 Port #101

: Alarm monitoring

- Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. It manages also the smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-2.

- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-2 and OUT-2.

- On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.- OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to the SDH NE.

- Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side. It is also mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). To keep an homogeneous view, it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in any other one belonging to the NE. This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this course).





OGPI

OTU

OCH

OGP I

OTU

3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work?

FEC

OPU-2ODU-2 OH

FA OH OTU-2 OH

G709 frame

Client Line

Port #1 Port #101

OCH

FEC

OPU-2ODU-2 OH

FA OH OTU-2 OH

G709 frame

OPU-2ODU-2 OH

OTU-2 OH

OTU

: Alarm monitoring

- Port #1 and Port #101 are in charge of the WDM signal on the User and WDM sides in a bidirectional way. On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.





3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work?

STM16OHSTM16

OPU-1 ODU-1

OPU-1ODU-1 OH

ODTUG-12x4

Port #1 to 4 Port #101

Client LineOGPI

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU2

ODU 1

ODU 2

odu1

: Alarm monitoring

- Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. They manage also the smallest G709 blocks of the board: OPU-1and ODU-1.

- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also the multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management: OPU-2, ODU-2 and OUT-2.







OGPI

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU2

ODU 1

ODU 2

odu1

3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? [cont.]

OH ODTUG-12 OPU-2

ODU-2 OHODU-2OPU-2

FEC

OPU-2ODU-2 OH

FA OH OTU-2 OH

OTU-2

Port #1 to 4 Port #101

Client Line

: Alarm monitoring

- Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. They manage also the smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-1 and ODU-1.

- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also the multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management: OPU-2, ODU-2 and OUT-2.







OGPI

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU3

3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work?

STM256OHSTM256 OPU-3

FECODU-3 OH

OPU-3ODU-3 OH

FA OH OTU-3OH

OPU-3 ODU-3 G709 frame

Client Line

Port #1 Port #101

: Alarm monitoring

- Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. It manages also the smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-3.

- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-3 and OTU-3.







Notes Page






4 Optical 1+1 Protection





4 Optical 1+1 Protection4.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle� Optical Subnetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP) driven by signal degrade

� In R 5 the Signal Degradation (SD) switching criterion is added to the ones supported since R 3.� The OSNCP switching based on SD relies on the count of the FEC uncorrected blocks. The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in all 10Gbs TRB of the 1626LM) is 1020 bits. During one second there are 10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks.� A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5; this alarm is raised if the UE count overcomes a defined threshold in an observation window of 1s.� The FUE default threshold value is 10499451, which corresponds to no alarm in default state.� The OSNCP mechanism does not change in any other way compared to R.3 and R.4, the new switching criterion is simply added to all the others.� The switching is still based on the backplane communication between the working and the protection transponder and takes place only if the protection path is not alarmed.

� Revertive OSNCP over TRBD 40G and TRBD1191� This feature is implemented through the introduction of configurable parameters





4 Optical 1+1 Protection4.2 OSNCP architecture

TRBD

Main

Spare

B-t-B terminal

TRBD Main

Spare

B-OADM

LRLR

½ OCPU2104

½ OCPU2104

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM can support Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection.

This is realized activating the OSNCP functionality on two adjacent transponders (connected by backplane links) and connecting the 2 B&W inputs to the outputs of an optical 50/50 splitter and the 2 B&W outputs to the inputs of an optical coupler supported by OCPU2104 boards.

The “switch position” is not realized by means of changing the position of an optical switch. In fact both transponder B&W outputs are connected to a coupler, not a switch. Thus, in order to realize a “switch”, the two transponders synchronize themselves such that 1 transponder shuts down the B&W laser, and the other activates it; in this way at anytime only one B&W output is carrying power (and signal), and the coupler always receives maximum one signal.

The maximum time allowed for the “switch” is 50 ms.

The “LSP” function is also responsible for deciding whether to shutdown a B&W laser or to let it active and sending an AIS (ODU--AIS or Generic--AIS), depending on the alarms on the received signal. Thus it is important to clarify the relations between these two functions, which both act on the B&W laser. From the functional point of view, the LSP functions operates before the OSNCP function; the signal received from WDM is first submitted to LSP function (that can decide to let it as it is, or generate an AIS, or shutdown the laser), then to OSNCP function (that can decide to either force the B&W laser shutdown, or let the signal coming from the LSP function as it is).

The protection switching is triggered by the following switching criteria : LOS, OUT-LOF, OTU-LOM, OTU-TIM, ODU-AIS, Generic AIS and FEC uncorrected errors.

Switching type is “unilateral”, meaning that switching criteria is local only. Switch position is independent from far end site switch position. External commands are available such as “Lockout”or “Forced switch”.





4 Optical 1+1 Protection4.3 OMSP Protection: Principle

� Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT and fixed add/drop (BOADM and Small OADM)� The OMSP is a protection architecture that duplicates the transmission line with the exception of the transponders and the Mux/Demux. It is therefore particularly suitable in case the main cause of transmission down-time comes from transmission fiber cable damages.

� The OMSP switching is performed on the aggregated signal before the line amplification. The line (optical amplifiers, transmission fiber) is fully protected.

� The APSD procedure implemented on the 1626LM line is kept unchanged and compliant to the G.664 recommendation.

� The OMSP switching event is triggered by:� Transmission line failure communicated to the sites where the OMSP switching takes place by means of OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC if the failed span is far;

� LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place in case the affected span is adjacent to the node itself

OMSP consists in the following:• On the transmitting side, an OCPU board acts as a splitter• On the receiving side, OCPU board acts as a protection switch. The fact is that the ²Split² and the ²Switch² are both implemented on the same OCPU2100 board (it is actually a double split/switch, identical to the OCPU2102 used in 1:N protection except for the split ratio, which is 70/30 in OCPU2102, but 50/50 in OCPU2100).

• A PSCU board acts as a protection controller and manages the OCPU boards.

OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) maintenance signal shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about failures. The corresponding alarm shall be raised.

OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI signal.OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA board.

OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS detected by Supervision board.





4 Optical 1+1 Protection4.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation

1626LM

1:12

1:8

LOFA11y0

TRBD1xyz

OSCU

Protection Controller

OCPU2100ProtectionSwitch

Optical patch cordBackplane electrical link

Signal

OSC OTS Fail

Signal

Protection Commands

Signal Fail 1 / 2« SGWP 1 /2 »

PSCU3000

OMSP Implementation principleOn a signal failure, 2 electrical signals are sent by the OSCU to PSCU3 (SGWP1 and SGWP2). The PSCU3 board compare the actual position of OCPU2 switch and the receive signal. With these informations, it controls the OCPU2 switch position.

The switching decision is managed by PSCU3000 from the links SGWP1/SGWP2 coming from OSCU boards.

PSCU3000 does not support revertive switching (where the traffic is automatically switched back to the protected channel after the protection switch condition is cleared). Only non-revertive switching is supported.

PSCU3 can manage 2 switches located inside the same OCPU2100.





4 Optical 1+1 Protection4.5 OMSP Protection: Failure detectionFailure 1 on adjacent span can be detected directly by NE D and protection can be

activated by LOS detection

Failure 2 on non adjacent span is masked by amplification in NE F and E.Can be detected by means of a remote defect indication ⇒ FDI (Forward Defect Indication) is generated in OMS overhead and transmitted to the remote terminal (F→A and E�D)

NE A

OMS

NE B NE C

NE FNE E

NE D

Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT and fixed add/drop� The OMSP target switching time is < 50 ms.� The OMSP protection is physically implemented by means of three cards:� OCPU2100: integrates a 50/50 splitter in the transmit direction and an optical switch in the receive direction,

� PSCU3000: it is the protection controller and manages the OCPU2100 status on the basis of the protection switching criteria detected in the node,

� OSCU1010 for OMSP: it is the only OSCU board version that guarantee insuring the OMSP protection switch activation (amplifiers ShutDown).

In an amplified configuration, in case of optical failure (failure 1 in the figure), the network element can detect directly the Loss Of Signal (LOS). If the failure occurs on a non adjacent span (failure 2 in the figure), the amplifier masks the failure for the network elements A and D. In this last case, the network elements E and F generate a signal named FDI (Forward Defect Indicator) to the network elements D and A. This signal is supported by the supervision frame in the K2 byte. NE A and D assert an alarm FDI to the operator.

In normal operation, when protection is activated, both receiving laser amplifiers are working, but only the Main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving OCPU switch.

The OMS-P switching event is triggered by:• OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span.• LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place, if the affected span is adjacent to the node itself.





Notes Page







G709 is supported for STM16, STM64 and STM256 client signals

G709 implementation extends the transmission control capabilities

Internal optical cabling is not managed by the softwareJ0 trace is supportedLoopbacks are not supported

Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies to Equipment domain alarms only

EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP, PM Data History

CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same timeDCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band”

FalseTrue


�G709 is supported for STM16, STM64 and STM256 client signals

�G709 implementation extends the transmission control capabilities

�Internal optical cabling is not managed by the software�J0 trace is supported

�Loopbacks are not supported

�Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies to Equipment domain alarms only

�EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP and PM Data History

�CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same time�DCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band”

FalseTrueNotes :





Notes Page






Module Summary� 1626 LM R 5.0A management

� Locally by 1320CT and SPLM tool through F interface� Remotely by 1350 OMS (OS) and SPLM tool through Q3 interface� Optical supervisory channel in the WDM link between two NEs

� Management communication (LAPD), Voice channel (EOW) and UDC� Operation and maintenance facilities from equipment view

� Operation� Equipment configuration : subrack, boards, drawers and optical cabling declaration� R-OADM and TR-ODAM configuration� OSNCP, OMSP, TRBD1191 and Ethernet cross-connections display and management� JO, ODUk and OTUk traces configuration� Optical power tuning

� Maintenance� Performance Monitoring and power level measurements� Spectrum acquisition on WMAN accesses� Alarms handling� Protection status management� Loopback management� Backup and restore� Board replacement

� SPLM tool co-hosted with 132O CT or 1350 OMS� 1626 LM R 5.0A supports OTN framing (G.709)






� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module

� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation





End of ModuleSystem Operation Overview





Module 3Boards Description3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0







1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceProduct Overview � Boards Description1 � 3 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Boards overview 71.1 User access and related boards 81.2 R/TR-OADM and related boards 91.3 Line amplifier and related boards 101.4 NE management and related boards 11

2 User access and related boards description 132.1.1 TRBD11y1 faceplate 142.1.2 TRBD11y1 functional description 152.2.1 TRBD4xy2 faceplate 162.2.2 TRBD4312 functional description 172.2.3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description 182.3.1 TRBC1111 faceplate 202.3.2 TRBC1111 functional description 212.4.1 TRBC4x12 faceplate 222.4.2 TRBC4x12 functional description 232.5.1 OCPU2104 faceplate 242.5.2 OCPU2104 functional description 252.6.1 OCPU2100 faceplate 262.6.2 OCPU2100 functional description 272.7.1 PSCU3000 faceplate 282.7.2 PSCU3000 functional description 292.8.1 2xGBE_FC faceplate 302.8.2 2xGBE_FC functional description 312.9.1 ETHC1000 faceplate 322.9.2 ETHC1000 functional description 332.10.1 CMDX1010 faceplate 342.10.2 CMDX1012 faceplate 352.10.3 CMDX1052 faceplate 362.10.4 CMDX10yz functional description 372.11.1 HOST1001 faceplate 382.11.2 HOST1001 functional description 392.12.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate 402.12.2 BMDX1y00 functional description 412.13.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate 422.13.2 OMDX8100_x functional description 432.14.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate 44

3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description 453.1.1 OADC1102 faceplate 463.1.2 OADC1102 functional description 473.2.1 WMAN1100 faceplate 483.2.2 WMAN1100 functional description 493.3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate 503.3.2 OCNC1220 functional description 513.4.1 OCNC1230 faceplate 523.4.2 OCNC1230 functional description 533.5.1 OCNC1240 faceplate 543.5.2 OCNC1240 functional description 553.6.1 OCNC1280 faceplate 563.6.2 OCNC1280 functional description 573.7.1 OADC1100 faceplate 583.7.2 OADC1100 functional description 593.8.1 OADC1300 faceplate 603.8.2 OADC1300 functional description 613.9.1 TDMX1180 faceplate 623.9.2 TDMX1180 functional description 63






Switch to notes view! Page3.10.1 WMAN3174 faceplate 643.10.2 WMAN3174 functional description 653.11.1 OADC1750 faceplate 663.11.2 OADC1750 functional description 673.12.1 OADC0104 faceplate 683.12.2 OADC0104 functional description 69

4 Line amplifier and related boards description 714.1.1 ALCT1010 faceplate 724.1.2 ALCT1010 functional description 734.2.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate 744.2.2 LOFA11y0 functional description 754.2.3 LOFA11y1 functional description 764.3.1 BOFA1000 faceplate 784.3.2 BOFA1000 functional description 794.4.1 BOFA2000 faceplate 804.4.2 BOFA2000 functional description 814.5.1 EMPM1000 faceplate 824.5.2 EMPM1000 functional description 83

5 NE management and related boards description 855.1.1 ESCT2000 faceplate 865.1.2 ESCT2000 functional description 875.1.3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate 885.2.1 OSCU1010 faceplate 905.2.2 OSCU1010 functional description 915.2.3 2Mb/s supervision frame structure 925.3.1 USIB1000 faceplate 945.3.2 USIB1000 functional description 955.4.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates 965.4.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions 975.5.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates 985.5.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions 995.6.1 PSUP1000 faceplate 1005.6.2 PSUP1000 functional description 1015.7.1 FANS1000 faceplate 1025.7.2 FANS1000 functioning 1035.8.1 FANS2000 faceplate 1045.8.2 FANS2000 functioning 105





1 Boards overview





1 Boards overview1.1 User access and related boards

2 to 1921MediumHOST1001

3 to 1841MediumOMDX8100_x

3911SmallPSCU3000

3 to 1811MediumOMDX4100_chx-chy

3 to 1843TallTRBC4x12

BMDX1x00

CMDX10yzETHC10002xGBE_FC

OCPU210z

TRBC1111TRBD4x12TRBD11y1

Board Acronym

Tall

MediumTall

Medium

Medium

TallTallTall

Board height

3 to 1881

3 to 181613 to 18433 to 18161

3 to 1821

2 to 19213 to 181213 to 18161

Slot #Maximum quantity

Generic shelfBoard width (slot)

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 2

CM

DX

12



OSC

OSC

ALCT

To/from WDM

line

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

To/fromtransponders

With / without Eth. / FC boards

With / without O-SNCP

protection





1 Boards overview1.2 R/TR-OADM and related boards

SmallMediumTallTall

MediumMediumSmallTallSmall

Board height

114411131

Board width (slot)

2 to 19(*)OCNC128023 to 38(*)OCNC12y0 (**)3 to 18 2WMAN110023 to 38(*)OADC1102

23 to 38(*)OADC010421OADC1750

3 to 181WMAN31743 to 181TMDX11803 to 18(*)OADC1300

Slot #Maximum quantity

Generic shelfBoard Acronym

(*): Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation.

(**): OCNC12y0 refers to OCNC1220, OCNC1230 and OCNC1240.

WMAN 3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 OADC0104

ALCTMDTo TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72)

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

½OADC1100

TDMX1180 ½ OADC1300

1:2

1:8

OCNC1230

LOF

A

1110

WMAN 3174

8:1

4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ

Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λOADC1750

x8

21

VO

A

OADC1750

OADC1300






1 Boards overview1.3 Line amplifier and related boards

2 to 523 to 1841MediumEMPM10002 to 20(*)1MediumBOFA2000

MediumMediumMedium

Board height

111

Board width (slot)

2 to 20(*)BOFA10002 to 523 to 184LOFA11yz

3 to 182ALCT1010Slot #Maximum

quantitySlot #Maximum quantity

Compact shelfGeneric shelfBoard Acronym

(*) To be analyzed case by case according to the network planning design.

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 2

CM

DX

12



OSC

OSC

ALCT

To/from WDM

line

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

To/fromtransponders

With / without Eth. / FC boards

With / without O-SNCP protection





1 Boards overview1.4 NE management and related boards

111MediumESCT2000_SC2 to 613 to 1821MediumOSCU10yz

(**)(**)SmallSmallSmallSmallSmallSmall

Medium

Board height

(**)(**)111111

1

Board width (slot)

7 to 10123 to 381RAIU110022, 391RAIU1000

7 to 10123 to 381USIB1000

1111ESCT2000

131FANS2000411FANS1000

11, 12221, 402PSUP10007 to 101 (*)23 to 381 (*)HSKU1100

22, 391HSKU1000

Slot #Maximum quantitySlot #Maximum

quantity

Compact shelfGeneric shelfBoard Acronym

(*) More than one board can be inserted in the shelf. Refer to the dedicated board description pages in this documentation part for more details.

(**) Dedicated slots. Refer, for more details, to: - the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 1 6 17 1 8 19 2 0

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4 15 1 6 17 1 8 19 2 0

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0

Air deflector

FANS

FANS

FANS

TRU

Air deflector

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

F an

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 1 7 1 8 19 20

Air deflector

FANS

FANS

FANS

Fiber storageTop Rack Unit

Air deflector

1320 CT

Links between PSUP and TRU

Links between RAIU and TRU





Notes Page






2 User access and related boards description





2.1 TRBD11y12.1.1 TRBD11y1 faceplateGeneric shelf

TRBD1191 *TRBD1131TRBD1121 3 to 18

TRBD1111SL Slots OTSBoard

TRBD1191

TRBD1121TRBD1121TRBD1131

� * Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.

� To be able to do this, the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to a given rule. Refer to the “Optical channel configuration” for more details.

LED MeaningLED Color





2.1 TRBD11y12.1.2 TRBD11y1 functional description

B&W optical module

O/E+ clock & data recovery

E/O

4

4

4

4

WDM optical module

E/O

VOAO/E

VOA

Colored Laser with locker

Power supply function Local Management

& Alarms

Hardware board

information

Management board

Clock

FECPerformance monitoring

G709 framing

Management Bus

Power supply

Optical Colored signal

Electrical Data stream

TRBD11y1 (TRiButary Direct) can support 1+1 O-SNCP, loop-backs, OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier, transport of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G.703) through WDM signal G.709 overhead (RJ45 connector).

TRBD1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder supporting a VSR (I-64.1) B&W optical interface and a 10.709Gbps colored WDM optical interface (NRZ), tunable according to the board type over 8 frequencies or the full extended C-Band, with 50GHz spacing. It provides UNI at 9.9532Gbps and NNI with OTU2 10.709Gbps B&W interface. The WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser.

TRBD1121 is the same as TRBD1111. The only difference is the B&W interface, it’s a S64.2b one.TRBD1131 is the same as TRBD1111. The main difference is B&W interface is dedicated to 10GbEthernet LAN PHY,

with a 10GBASE-LR (10Km reach, 1310nm) B&W interface at 10.31Gbps (UNI only). Moreover WDM bit rate is 11.09Gbps.

TRBD1191 is a bidirectional G.709 transponder with high sensitivity receiver. LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder colored interface, NRZ modulation, Enhanced FEC. The BW client interface is provided by an XFP module. According to XFP plugged, the client interface can be VSR, S-64.2b, L-64.2, 10G BASE-S, 10G BASE-L or 10G BASE-E. It is the universal transponder, tunable over the whole extended C-band. It provides either User to Network Interface or Network Node Interface.

The TRBD1191 MLSE is a new 10 Gb/s transponder introduced to minimize the regeneration points on WDM links where the PMD introduced by the optical transmission fiber cable is high. In fact all other 10 Gb/s TRBD versions of the 1626LM are able to tolerate up to 10 ps of PMD accumulated along the link, the TRBD1191 MLSE can tolerate up to 24 ps of PMD thanks to electronic post-processing of the received signal based on Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) technology.

The TRBDwxyz/TRBCwxyz naming rule is as follows :� w stands for bit rate : 1 (10Gb/s), 4 (40Gb/s)� x stands for signal type: 1 (NRZ), 2 (RZ), 3 (PSBT), 4 (NRZ-DPSK), 5 (RZ-DPSK),

6 (NRZ P-DPSK), 7 (CSRZ DPSK)� y stands for client interface type: 1 (intra-office (I64.1 or VSR-2000)), 2 (short haul (S64.2b)), 3( 10GBase-LR),

9 (pluggable user interface)� z stands for 1 (no VOA access), 2 (VOA access for dispersion pre-compensation), 3 (tunable filter), 4 (), 5

(MLSE for high PMD tolerance)





2.2 TRBD4xy22.2.1 TRBD4xy2 faceplateGeneric shelf

3, 7, 11 or 15TRBD4312SL Slots OTSBoard

RJ45 -G.703

WDM RX Mon1Unused

RX WDMTX WDM

IN VOAOUT VOA

Power

RXA

TXA

OOS

BWTX RX

Upper part

The TRBD4xy2 board is 3 slots wide and tall height. It can be inserted on the following slots : [3,4, 5], [7,8, 9], [11,12, 13], and [15,16, 17]. Slots 6, 10, 14 & 18 are reserved for optional BOFA when required by configuration or for 10Gb/s transponders or PMDC upgrade .

xy





2.2 TRBD4xy22.2.2 TRBD4312 functional description

The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface. The architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications.

The first optical interface bi-directional is the Line interface. This interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by a colored single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the network (Tunable on the band C).

This network is a proprietary network based on the G.709 interface, refer to [x] ITU-T RecommendationG.709. The rate is 43.018413 Gb/s with the standardized Reed Salomon RS(255,239) or proprietary Ultra FEC.

The second optical interface bi-directional is the Client interface. This interface is the connection of a single wavelength on the client network with the B&W module.

The Client line carries SDH/SONET standards at 39.81320 Gb/s, called STM-256/OC-768 and can support bit rate 43.018413 Gb/s.

The G.709 FEC requirement is accomplished by a FUJITSU ASIC (UFEC40G).

The board TRBD can receive different daughter boards allowing to support different modulation format, PSBT, DPSK, P-DPSK, …. They are pluggable.

For TRBC application, the B&W DB is replaced by a Concentrator card.For the DPSK application, the WDM Daughter Board is replaced by an optical interface.For TRBD4312, Daughter board MiniROFA is connected at the input pigtail of the PSBT module in order to improve the sensitivity and to guarantee a constant optical power.





2.2 TRBD4xy22.2.3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description

The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface. The architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications. There is a VOA in external access (input and output optical connector on front panel.

The UFEC40G is a multi-rate multiple forward error correction device supporting SONET/SDH, OTN and Clear Channel applications.

Different optical units are implied : one bidirectional B&W interface, and one bidirectional WDM interface into transponder TRBD with:

� B&W side, the signal is compliant STM-256/OC-768 at 39.81320 Gb/s.� WDM side, the signal is OTU-3 at 43.018413 Gb/s.

TRBD4312 [C band – PSBT; Grid = 50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]Client side : External client (OPNEXT)Line side : PSBT / Mini ROFA Daughter Board

TRBD4412 [C band – DPSK; Grid = 100GHz; Up to 40x40 Gb/s]Client side : External client (OPNEXT)Line side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100; Grid=200GHz) or even channel (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min = 192000; Grid=200GHz)

TRBD4612 [C band – P-DPSK; Grid = 50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]Client side : External client (OPNEXT)Line side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 - Ch Min=192050 or Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 - Ch Min=191950; Grid=200GHz)





Notes Page






2.3 TRBC11112.3.1 TRBC1111 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18TRBC1111SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part






2.3 TRBC1111 2.3.2 TRBC1111 functional description

FEC

Performance Monitoring

G709 Framing

16

16

WDM optical module

E/O

VOAWDM RX

Colored Laser with locker

Power supply function

Local Management

& Alarms

Hardware board

information

Management board

Clock

Management Bus

Power supply

Optical Colored signal

Electrical Data stream

VOA

ASIC

TRBC : TRiButary Concentrator.

TRBC1111 can support 1+1 O-SNCP, loop-backs, OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier, RS-Trace Identifier (J0), transport of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G.703) through WDM signal G.709 overhead (RJ45 connector).

TRBC1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM16/OC48 optical signals (TDM concentrator) in a 10.709Gbps coloured WDM optical interface (NRZ), tunable over the whole extended C-Band. It provides UNI at 2.488Gbps or NNI with OTU1 2.666Gbps B&W interface. The WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser.

The four incoming signals can be asynchronous.

TRBC111 can use SFP modules, type I-16.1, S-16.1, L-16.1 or L-16.2, for B&W interfaces (see Section 3 –Appendix).





2.4 TRBC4x122.4.1 TRBC4x12 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18TRBC4x12SlotsBoard

RJ45 -G.703

PowerRXATXAOOS

WDM RX Mon1Unused

RX WDMTX WDM

IN VOAOUT VOA

U1_TxU1_Rx

U2_TxU2_Rx

U3_TxU3_Rx

U4_TxU4_Rx

x





2.4 TRBC4x12 2.4.2 TRBC4x12 functional description

The TRBC4x12 is the concentrator version 4 x 10Gb/s board

This unit contains a FEC encoding and decoding operator standard RS(255,239) compliant with G.709 and

Ultra FEC proprietary from FUJITSU (only on line side). The G.709 frame Overhead Och are managed, extracted and inserted by the FPGA of the board, called VIKINGS.

Different optical units are implied : four bidirectional B&W interfaces and one WDM interface into the Concentrator TRBC:

� 1 to 4 B&W sides, the signal is compliant STM-64/OC-192, OTU2,10GELAN.� WDM side, the signal is OTU-3 at 43.018413 Gb/s.

TRBC4412 [C band – DPSK; Grid=100Grid; Up to 40x40 Gb/s]Client side : Concentrator Daughter BoardLine side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100; Grid=200GHz) or even channel (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000; Grid=200GHz)

TRBC4612 [C band – P-DPSK; Grid=50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]Client side : Concentrator Daughter BoardLine side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 - Ch Min=192050 or Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 - Ch Min=191950; Grid=200GHz)





2.5 OCPU21042.5.1 OCPU2104 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18OCPU2104SlotsBoard

Upper part

Mid part





2.5 OCPU21042.5.2 OCPU2104 functional description

OCPU2104

Spare

Main

Transponders

WDM Sides

Sub-board 1

Sub-board 2

Splitter

Coupler

B&W user sides

The OCPU2104 contains optical components for inclusion into two separate ’B/W’ Client input and output paths, to and from 2 X two ’protected’ Transponders (called 1main, 1spare, 2main, 2spare). The OCPU2104 houses a pair of optical splitters that fit into the two ’TX’ paths, and two optical couplers that are fitted into two ’RX’ output paths from ’Protected’ Transponders.

Note : The above figure details only the sub-board 1 optical connections.

The 1x2 optical couplers/splitters fitted to the OCPU2104 have a nominal optical power splitting ratio of 50/50%, (where in the case of the splitters 50% of the applied optical power is fed to the ’Protected’ Transponder main, and 50% is fed to the ’protected’ Transponder spare), for use in a protection system with a 1+1 O-SNCP configuration.

In the “RX” direction, the OCPU2104 shall never receive both signals at the same time; the transponders which are connected to it arbitrate among themselves in order to have one transponder B&W output active, and the other one in shutdown; by this mechanism it is not necessary to use a SWITCH on OCPU2104, but it is enough to use the coupler, always receiving at most one active input.

The coupler/splitter devices used in this unit are specified to operate at both client wavebands identified as1530-1565nm and 1290-1330nm. The 1x2optical coupler/splitters are specified to offer the lowest maximum insertion loss (2.7 to 3.9dB). The same device is used for both the coupler and splitter.

No alarm is raised by this module.





2.6 OCPU21002.6.1 OCPU2100 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18OCPU2100SlotsBoard

MonP2 (P2 Tx W2)MonP1 (P1 Tx W1)Mon W1 (P1 Tx P1)Mon W2 (P2 Tx P2)

Main Out#1 (P1 Rx)Out Prot#1 (P1 Tx P1)Out Trib#1 (P1 Tx W1)

Main In#1 (P1 Tx)

In Prot#1 (P1 Rx P1)In Trib#1 (P1 Rx W1)

Main Out#2 (P2 Rx)Out Prot#2 (P2 Tx P2)Out Trib#2 (P2 Tx W2)

Main In#2 (P2 Tx)

In Prot#2 (P2 Rx P2)In Trib#2 (P2 Rx W2)





2.6 OCPU21002.6.2 OCPU2100 functional description

Transponder #1

Transponder #2

The OCPU2100 is a bi-directional unit acting as a connection point for an Equipment Protection system. In the OCPU2100, the unit contains two separate tap coupler/splitter devices to be inserted into Client “Black & White” traffic feeds, allowing a portion of each incoming signal to be ‘tapped off’ for passage to the Equipment Protection system.

Optical Switches select which of two inputs are fed back to the Client from the Equipment. One switch input feeds in from the ‘normal’ path, this is referred to as ‘Path 1’. The other input feeds from the “Protecting” path, this is referred to as ‘Path 2’.

The Unit is designed so the Optical switches are controlled by the Protection Switch Controller- via back-plane connections.

All optical components used in the OCPU 210X are specified for ‘Dual-Band’ operation, offering comparable performance in the 1290-1330 and 1530-1565nm bands. This allows the unit to operate at:

1) VSR2000 2R1 (1290-1330nm) and,2) S64.2b. (1530-1565nm)3) If OCPU2100 Insertion loss performance wavelength ranges comply, other transmission formats may be

supported.

The OCPU2100 incorporates two optical switches, and two optical splitters with a coupling ratio of 50/50%. It also incorporates 4 optical ports for monitoring function.





2.7 PSCU30002.7.1 PSCU3000 faceplate

Generic shelf

39PSCU3000SlotBoard

� PSCU3000 can manage only one OCPU2100 (2 switches) and 2 OSCU (each switch can be associated with 1 OSCU).� PSCU3000 is required for OMSP Protection, in a shelf containing LOFA, OSCU and OCPU2 boards involved in the protection scheme.






2.7 PSCU30002.7.2 PSCU3000 functional description

Control Logic

SPIDER CombiningdiodesCombining

diodes

LEDsECID

Remoteinventory

The PSCU3000 currently works as a slave to the OSCU. It acts as an interface between the OSCU and OCPU2100 within a shelf involved in protection.

It performs the following functions:� collects alarm information (signal fail) from the OSCU,� monitors the channel selectors (OCPU2100), the bridge switch� required position information of OCPU2100 and OSCU, and sends the necessary commands to the

switches (OCPU2100)





2.8 2xGBE_FC2.8.1 2xGBE_FC faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 182xGBE_FC

SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

MeaningName





2.8 2xGBE_FC2.8.2 2xGBE_FC functional description

CDR

MUX/DEMUX

2xGBE_FC : concentrator which aggregates two Gigabit Ethernet client signals at 1.25Gb/s or two Fibre Channel at 1.0625Gb/s into a STM–16/OC–48 frame, via GFP mapping and Virtual Concatenation. It is optically connected, according to the provisioned interface, either to a TRBC or an MCC30 (if B&W line interface) or a CMDX (if WDM line interface).

- Four interfaces/ports are present on client side, but only two can be used (U1 and U2 on the front plate). - Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate, but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front plate). - All the interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that they can be alternated

according to the different applications. Refer to the last Section of this training manual for SFPs list.Clients mixing on the same board is not possible: only 2xGbE or 2xFC is possible in the same board.The mapping of clients is Transparent GFP (GFP–T). The Virtual Concatenation uses a fixed number of VC–4 :VC–4–7v is used for Gigabit EthernetVC–4–6v is used for Fibre Channel. The Line interface supports:

� multi-rate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.� B&W STM–16/OC–48 pluggable modules (SFP): I–16.1, S–16.1 and L–16.2. In this case the board

needs to be connected to a B&W port of a transponder (TRBC, MCC30) to obtain a WDM signal.

Each Client interface (U1 and U2 connectors on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients of the network. GbE–SX, GbE–LX, FC–L B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces.





2.9 ETHC10002.9.1 ETHC1000 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18 *ETHC1000SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

� * Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.

� To be able to do this, the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to a given rule. Refer to the “Optical channel configuration” for more details.

User10 Tx (out)**User10 Rx (in)**



MeaningName





2.9 ETHC10002.9.2 ETHC1000 functional description

ETHC1000 : The ETHC1000 unit is an Ethernet concentrator which can aggregate up to nine Gigabit Ethernet client signals at 1 .25Gbps into a 10 GbE WAN frame at 9.95 Gb/s, in point–to–point applications, via Layer 2 switch. It can be optically connected to the client interface of a TRBD or connected to the TRBD1191 through the equipment back plane. � Twelve interfaces/ports are present on client side.� Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate side.� When all client ports are used, the related traffic must be spread over the two aggregate sides with no more than 9 client signals per side.

� Jumbo frames are supported on client side : up to 9600 bytes per frame. All the client interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules. The Line interfaces/transceivers are external XFP pluggable modules.

The Line (L1 and L2 connectors on the front plate, Port #13 and Port#14 in CT view) ) bidirectional optical interfaces host B&W optical modules, so they need to be linked to a B&W port of a transponder (TRBD) to obtain a WDM signal to be multiplexed into a single fibre and sent to the network.

The following 10 GbE WAN B&W pluggable modules (XFP) are supported:� I–64.1/10GbE base L� S–64.2b/10GbE base E

Each Client interface (P1 to P12 on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients.GbE–SX and GbE–LX B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces.The Layer 2 switch tags the up to nine Ethernet streams with a VLAN ID, then aggregates the different streams and send them, over a XGMII interface, to one (or both) 10 GbE transceiver. The 10 GbE transceiver provides the entire IEEE 802.3ae, including PMD, PMA and PCS with 64B/65B encoding–decoding. Its serial output is 10 GbEthernet WAN (9.953 Gb/s).





2.10 CMDX10yz2.10.1 CMDX1010 faceplate

Generic shelf

2 to 19CMDX1010SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part







Generic shelf

2 to 19 *CMDX1012SlotsBoard

MUX_OUTDEMUX_IN

1st CH_IN1st CH_OUT2nd CH_IN2nd CH_OUT3rd CH_IN

3rd CH_OUT4th CH_IN

4th CH_OUT

Mon_OUTMon_IN

5th CH_IN5th CH_OUT6th CH_IN

6th CH_OUT

7th CH_IN7th CH_OUT

8th CH_IN8th CH_OUT

� * CMDX1012 card provides fixed Mux/Demux functionality for TRBD4612 with 50GHz channel spacing






Generic shelf

2 to 19 *CMDX1052SlotsBoard

MUX_OUTDEMUX_IN

1st CH_IN1st CH_OUT2nd CH_IN

2nd CH_OUT3rd CH_IN

3rd CH_OUT4th CH_IN

4th CH_OUT

Mon_OUTMon_IN

� * HOST1001 and CMDX4100 are associated to get CMDX1052.� CMDX1052 card provides fixed Mux/Demux functionality for TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel spacing

Indicates CMX and/or CDX are in the Initialisation state and are not yet at operating temperature. Available only with AWG technology module

the optical moduleYellowINIindicate abnormal conditions at demultiplexer input.the Shelf ControllerYellowDAB

indicate abnormal conditions at one or more multiplexer inputs

the Shelf ControllerYellowMABMeaningManaged byLED ColorName

CMDX1052 LED





2.10 CMDX101yz2.10.4 CMDX10yz functional description

Input 11 λ

Input 81 λ

Output 11 λ

Output 81 λ

Photodetector

Photodetector

Photodetector 1

PhotoDetector 8

Management

8

DC Power Supply

APSD signal

Combined output

8 λ

Combinedinput 8 λ

CMX

CDX

Management

Output monitor

CMDX1010 is a 8 channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz for Long Haul terrestrial and submarine links. It multiplexes/demultiplexes 8 colored optical signals to/from a single port connected to the BMDX.

CMDX1012 (8 Channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz whose Mux has same filter shape as its Demux (for P-DPSK)) is a bidirectional unit used for multiplexing and demultiplexing in each of the 12 block paths. In the multiplexing direction the unit multiplexes 8 (resp.12) optical channels from transmitters to one single optical output which is routed to either a 12:1 band mux/demux unit. In the demultiplexing direction the unit receives a WDM signal from BMDX before demultiplexing the signal into 8 (resp. 12) channel outputs and then routing the channels to the relevant receiver.On each of the input ports and the output port of the Multiplexer, there is a tap coupler and a photo detector and there is also an optical monitor port at the output side. On the input port of the Demultiplexer, there is a tap coupler and a photo detector. These photo detectors measure the respective optical power via the tap coupler and feed the power level signals to the on board FPGA.xThe CMDX1012 component uses AWG (Arrayed Waveguide Grating) technology and is a dedicated card for TRBD4612 and TRBC4612.

CMDX1052 is a 4 channel Mux/Demux @ 100GHz. It’s a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412.

Naming rules for CMDXwxyz :� w: big functional or structural differences

Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1� x: today for all CMDX this is 0� y: grid

1: stands for 50GHz grid2: stands for 40GHz grid3: stands for 33GHz grid4: stands for 25GHz grid

� z: minor modifications0: AWG technology1: long haul applications





2.11 HOST10012.11.1 HOST1001 faceplate

Generic shelf

2 to 19 *HOST1001SlotsBoard

� * HOST1001 and CMDX4100 are associated to get CMDX1052.� CMDX1052 card provides fixed mux/demux functionality for TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel spacing

Extractor Handle

Extractor Handle

HOST1001 LED Meaning





2.11 HOST1001 2.11.2 HOST1001 functional description

InternalPower supplies+3.3V

+5V

Card presence

Microcontroller

SPIDER:SPI INTERFACE

EEPROM

EEPROM

Remote Inventory

ECID SPI Bus

Control board

Pluggable module function

Temperaturesensor

SPI Bus

+48V

Alarm interface

Optical connectors on Front Panel

Backplane connector

Micro cut off detection

Power supply

Power detection

Module EEPROM

Electrical connector

The above diagram shows the main function blocks of the board on which the optical module is plugged and interfaced.

The HOST1001 is a mezzanine board designed for 1626 system Release 5.0a. It is a main board that can manage one optical pluggable module as CMDX1012 module (4 channels Mux/Demux 100 GHz) for example.

The pluggable optical modules that can be used with the HOST1001 are Mux/Demux modules.

This unit is equipped with SPIDER, ECID, Remote Inventory, Temperature Sensor, DC-DC converter, Power Supply micro failure detection.

All the main signals from the modules (alarms, module presence) are interfaced and accessible from HOST1001 through SPI link or registered into SPIDER.





2.12 BMDX1x002.12.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate

Generic shelf

BMDX1100 3 to 18 *BMDX1000SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

� * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the BMDX board. In such a case, the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below. Refer to ALCT1010 description for more details.

The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and BMDX boards are inserted and declared according to the following table:

1516171811121314789103456BMDX slot #

1817161514131211109876543ALCT slot #






2.12 BMDX1y002.12.2 BMDX1y00 functional description

Photodetector

Photodetector

Photodetector 1

Photodetector

12

12

APSD signal

Combined output

Combinedinput

BMX

BDX

ManagementDC Power Supply

Output monitorInput 1

Input 12

Output 1

Output 12

BMDX1000 is a Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux used in Line Terminal, Back-to-Back terminal and R-OADM configurations, supporting up to 8 wavelengths per Band. It multiplexes up to 12 Bands coming from the CMDXs into the aggregate signal (up to 96 channels) to be sent to the WDM line and demultiplexes the aggregate signal into 12 Bands forwarded to the CMDXs. In Back-to-Back configuration, all the 12 Bands are managed.

BMDX1100 is a modified Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux for B-OADM application with up to 100% add/drop capacity in full symmetric configuration. It supports up to 7 wavelengths per Band.

Naming rules for BMDXwxyz :� w: big functional or structural differences

Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1� x: application

0: stands for the Line Terminal, B-t-B and R-OADM application1: stands for TPXC and Band-OADM functionality

� y: today for all BMDX this is 0� z: today for all BMDX this is 0





2.13 OMDX8100_x2.13.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate Generic shelf

OMDX8100_S2OMDX8100_S1OMDX8100_L2OMDX8100_L1

3 to 18

OMDX8100_L1_XSlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

� The EXPANSION interface (SB IN/OUT) is only present on the OMDX8100_L1_X faceplate.

LED MeaningLED ColorOMDX8100_x Front panel LED Meanings





2.13 OMDX8100_x2.13.2 OMDX8100_x functional description

Input 11 λ

Input 8 (4)1 λ

Output 11 λ

Output 8 (4)1 λ

Photodetector

Photodetector

Photodetector 1

PhotoDetector8(4)

Management DC Power Supply

APSD signal

Combined output

Combined input

OMX

Management

ODX

9:1(5:1)LB/SB

9:1(5:1)

Input monitor

Output monitor

Photodetector

9(5)Photo

detector 10

Extraoutput

LB/SB

Extrainput

Expinput SB

SB

OMDX8100_x is 100GHz grid channel multiplexer/demultiplexer for regional applications (Up to 32 channels). In the picture above, dashed lines correspond to components specific to OMDX8100_L1_X.OMDX8100 (respectively OMDX4100) is composed of :• a 100 GHz 9:1 ( 5:1) multiplexer/demultiplexer:multiplexes/demultiplexes eight (four) optical channels + extra long or short band signal (extra channels) into/from a combined output/input. This latter is either connected to Long Band/Short Band multiplexer/demultiplexer or to an other OMDX extra input/output or to a LOFA input/output.• a Long Band/Short Band multiplexer/demultiplexer (OMDX8100_L1_X only): multiplexes/demultiplexes the aggregated Long band signal from/to OMX/ODX and the aggregated

Short band signal from/to Expansion input/output connected to a ODMX8100_S1 or S2 combined output/input.For OMDXw100_y_z naming, special rules must be considered :w: Number of channels to be multiplexed / demultiplexedx: Grid (in GHz)_y: Band

� L1: stands for channels 193.000 to 193.800 THz� L2: stands for channels 192.000 to 192.800 THz� S1: stands for channels 195.200 to 196.000 THz� S2: would stand for channels 194.200 to 195.000 THz� chx-chy: would stand for channels x to y THz

_z: Filtering process :� X: Expansion filtering

• The available “OMDX” boards are: OMDX8100_L1_X, OMDX8100_L1, OMDX8100_L2, OMDX8100_S1, OMDX8100_S2, OMDX4100_Ch20-23, OMDX4100_Ch25-28, OMDX4100_Ch30-33, OMDX4100_Ch35-38, OMDX4100_Ch42-45, OMDX4100_Ch47-50, OMDX4100_Ch52-55, OMDX4100_Ch57-60.





2.14 OMDX4100_chx-chy2.14.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate Generic shelf

OMDX4100_ch42-45OMDX4100_ch35-38OMDX4100_ch30-33OMDX4100_ch25-28

3 to 18

OMDX4100_ch20-23SlotsBoard

OMDX4100_ch57-60OMDX4100_ch52-55OMDX4100_ch47-50

EXTRA INEXTRA OUT

4th CH_IN4th CH_OUT3rd CH_IN

3rd CH_OUT2nd CH_IN

2nd CH_OUT1st CH_IN

1st CH_OUT

MUX OUT MONDEMUX IN MON

MUX_OUTDEMUX_IN

Name MeaningAccess points description (from top to bottom)





3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description





3.1 OADC11023.1.1 OADC1102 faceplate Generic shelf

23 to 38OADC1102SlotsBoard

TX INPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC COUPLER INPUT (30%) FROM WMANTX INPUT : ADDED CHANNELS OADC COUPLER INPUT (70%) FROM MUXRX OUTPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC SPLITTER OUTPUT (30%) TO WMANRX OUTPUT : DROPED CHANNELS OADC SPLITTER OUTPUT (70%) TO DEMUXTX OUTPUT : OADC COUPLER OUTPUT TO BOOSTERRX INPUT : OADC SPLITTER INPUT FROM BOOSTER

LED





3.1 OADC11023.1.2 OADC1102 functional description

Photodetector

Photodetector

Rx OUTExpress

ManagementDC

Power Supply

Rx IN(PreAmp)

Photodetector

Rx OUTDrop

TX INAdd

Tx OUT(Booster)

TX INExpress

Splitter

Coupler

(WMAN IN)

(Demux)

30%

70%

30%

70%

(WMAN Out)

(Mux) Photodetector

Feedback fordynamic ALCcontrol

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1102 board covers Long Haul R-OADM specific needs. The OADC1102 may be used also for TR-OADM Multi degree 2 application but it is mainly dedicated to R-OADM application.

This small height unit consists of one asymmetric coupler and one asymmetric splitter achieving passive add&drop for opposite directions as illustrated above. The coupler/splitter is broadband (whole extended C-band).

Regarding the signal coming from one pre-amplifier :� 30% are sent to express path (input of Wavelength Manager)� 70% are sent to drop path (input of first demultiplexing stage)

Regarding the signal outgoing to one booster :� 30% come from express path (output of Wavelength Manager)� 70% come from drop path (output of last multiplexing stage)

For Automatic Level Control purposes, on the add path the coupler shall achieve output power level measurement (express path + add path) and provide electrical feedback for ALCT Laser board if this one works in “dynamic” mode.





3.2 WMAN11003.2.1 WMAN1100 faceplate Generic shelf

3 to 18WMAN1100SlotsBoard

POWER ON LEDABNORMAL OPERATION LED

HW FAILURE LEDABNORMAL MON LED

ABNORMAL INPUT LED

EXT IN 1EXT IN 2

WDM IN MONITORWDM OUT MONITOR

WDM INPUTWDM OUTPUT

Upper part

(3 slots wide and tall height)

� The WMAN1100 can be inserted in both «Master»and «Secondary» shelves (preferred to reduce inter-shelf cabling).

� Example for «Master shelf»� [(12,13,14) + (32,33,34)]� [(16,17,18) + (36,37,38)]

� Example for «Secondary shelf»

� [(3,4,5) + (23,24,25)] � [(16,17,18) + (36,37,38)]

Managed by the Shelf ControllerOFF when board is plugged but not declaredGREEN when board is plugged, configured and no failureRED when hardware failure, power supply failure or communication (on the board) failureYELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, the board shall not be unplugged.

Green/Red∆

Managed by the Shelf ControllerAbnormal monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation of the embedded OCM, communication failure with the OCM or monitoring switch failure)

YellowABM

Managed by the Shelf ControllerAbnormal operation of the Wavelength Blocker (some wavelength improperly configured blocked/pass-through or some attenuations not applied properly)

YellowABB

Managed by the Shelf ControllerAbnormal signal input alarmSignal level below the input signal LOS threshold or some wavelengths abnormally absent from the input spectrum

YellowABI

Managed by HW.GREEN when power supply operationalRED when the internal power supply is switched off (e.g. at unit start-up) or when power supply fails

Green/RedPWR

MeaningLED colorNameLED MeaningLED Color





3.2 WMAN11003.2.2 WMAN1100 functional description

Photodetector

Photodetector

From OADC#1 M

ux

Demux

ManagementDC Power Supply

Output monitor

To OADC#2

Photodetector

Photodetecto

r

Optical Channel Monitoring

Input monitor

VOA On/OffSwitch

EXT_IN1 EXT_IN2

DarkVOA

Wavelength Blocker

The Wavelength Blocker can be considered as an array of optical gates (such as Variable Optical Attenuators or Liquid Crystal shutters) and optical (on/off) switches placed between a Demultiplexer and a Multiplexer as schematically presented in figure above. It is thus able to selectively attenuate the single channels of an incoming multiplex and even completely switch off selected channels. Note that device implementation of this optoelectronic function varies depending on providers.

The present release can manage 96 channels with 50GHz spacing in C+ band.Each channel processed by the Wavelength Manager shall be in one of two possible states :� Express channels shall go through the Wavelength Blocker with a slight attenuation that shall be individually (i.e. on a per channel basis) set up (in a certain range) either by an operator or an algorithm/software process.

� Blocked channels shall be blocked by the Wavelength Blocker i.e. completely switched off.ALC frequencies shall be Blocked in the WMAN board(s).Whenever channel states are modified, the Optical Channel Monitor shall scan the output and input spectra in order to check that proper attenuations have been set up and proper wavelengths have been blocked.

This verification shall also been carried out on a regular basis in order to keep up with any Wavelength Blocker drift. The OCM can be also used to monitor signals from other boards through EXT_IN&1 and EXT_IN2 ports (not available in current release).

The dark VOA has two purposes :� First it shall be used to insert an additional loss (offset) experienced by all channels in order to decrease the WB attenuation range employed, thus reducing the PDL and ripple of the latter.

� In addition, this normally turned off VOA shall shut down all traffic in case of a power failure (whereas most WBs are normally turned on / transparent without power supply) or board unplugging.





3.3 OCNC12203.3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate Generic shelf

23 to 38OCNC1220SlotsBoard

LED

Rx InputRx Mon.

Rx Output-70Rx Output-30





3.3 OCNC12203.3.2 OCNC1220 functional description

RX_OUT_30

RX_OUT_70

Optical INPUT power detection5/95

RX-in

ExternalPower

Supplies

+3.3V

+5V

Card presence

Alarm Interface

SPI InterfaceEEPROM

EEPROM

Remote Inventory

ECIDData

SPI Bus

ILOS RX

LOS Detection function

Control board

70%

30%

RX-Mon

1/99

99%1%

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1220 (1 Photodiode ; 1x 70/30 splitter in C+-band) unit includes the following parts :� OADC control board� 1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 70/30� 1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 1/99� 1 tap detector� MU adaptors for input/output optical ports.

Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%). 5% of the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler. Optical power is sent towards a photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement.

An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 2 parts for OCNC1220: the drop one and the transmit one. The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.

There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.





3.4 OCNC12303.4.1 OCNC1230 faceplateGeneric shelf


LED

Rx InputRx Mon.

Rx Output-15

Rx Output-70Rx Output-15






RX_OUT_15

RX_OUT_15

RX_OUT_70Optical INPUT power detection5/95

50/50

RX-in

ExternalPower

Supplies+3.3V

+5V

Card presenc

e

Alarm Interface

SPI InterfaceEEPROM

EEPROM

Remote Inventory

ECIDData

SPI Bus

ILOS RX


Control board

70%

30%

RX-Mon

1/9999%

1%

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1230 (1 Photodiode ; 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x 50/50 splitter in C+-band) is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .

- It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express channels).

- 70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 2 x 15% are dedicated to the express channels (towards 2 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 3 application at the maximum).

- One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access. Relevant alarm can be raised.

- There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.- OADC1102 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 2 application but OCNC1230 is recommended for such application. Being partially used at the installation phase, it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TR-OADM Multi-degree 3 application in the future.

- The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1230 board in a “Multi-degree 2” application (extract):

WMAN 3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC OSC



1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2








LED

Rx_InputRx_Mon.

Rx_Output-10Rx_Output-10

Rx_Output-70Rx_Output-10






RX_OUT_10

RX_OUT_10

RX_OUT_70Optical INPUT power detection5/95

1x3 splitter

ExternalPower

Supplies+3.3V

+5V

Card presenc

e

Alarm Interface

SPI InterfaceEEPROMEEPROM

Remote Inventory

ECIDData

SPI Bus

ILOS RX


Control board

70/30

70%

30%

RX-in

RX-Mon

1/9999%

1%

RX_OUT_10

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1240 (1 Photodiode, 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x3 splitter in C+-band)is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .- It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express channels). - 70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 3 x 10% are dedicated to the express channels (towards 3 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 4 application at the maximum).- One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access. Relevant alarm can be raised.- There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.OCNC1230 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 3 application but OCNC1240 is recommended for such application. Being partially used at the installation phase, it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TR-OADM Multi-degree 4 application in the future. The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1240 board in a “Multi-degree 3” application (extract):

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN 3174

M

1 VOA 2

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OCNC1240

1 VOA 2

D

M

WM

AN

3174

MD D

OCNC1240

OC

NC

1240


Up to 96λ

Up to 96λUp to 96λ at 10Gb/sUp to 80λ at 40Gb/s

WMAN 3174







Rx_InputRx_Mon.

Rx_Output3Rx_Output1Rx_Output2Rx_Output4

Rx_Output8Rx_Output6Rx_Output5Rx_Output7






ExternalPower Supplies

+3.3V

+5V

Card presence

AlarmInterface

SPI Interface

EEPROM

EEPROM

Remote Inventory

ECIDData

SPI BusControl board

Port 8Port 7Port 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1

Splitter1:805/95

Power detection

LOS from Power detection

RX-in

RX-Mon

1/9999%

1%

LOS on RX sent on BKP

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1280 is a board designed for 1626 LM. It is a connectivity unit used for the TR-OADM function.

The OCNC1280 unit is placed before the WMAN3 board. It generated a Loss Of Signal (LOS) detection on low optical powers on the input. An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 8 parts.

The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.

Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%). 5% of the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler. Optical power is sent towards a photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement.

There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.







LED






The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1100 is a bidirectional coupler / splitter unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .

- The coupler and the splitter are “50/50” type.- Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming access. Relevant alarms can be raised.

- The above figure shows the traffic part only.

The OADC1100 board can be partially used in a “demultiplexing branch” of a “TR-OADM multi-degree application”. - The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction:

½ OADC1100

TDMX1180

½ OADC1300

Up to 96λ



1:2

1:8

OCNC1240







TI1TI2TI3TI4TI5TI6TI7TI8RO1RO2RO3RO4RO5RO6RO7RO8

Tx OutputRx Input

The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters , located on the front panel:

[1] : TI1 (Tx Input 1) ; TI2 (Tx Input 2)[2] : TI3 (Tx Input 3) ; TI4 (Tx Input 4)[3] : TI5 (Tx Input 5) ; TI6 (Tx Input 6)[4] : TI7(Tx Input 7) ; TI8 (Tx Input 8)

[5] : RO1 (Rx Output 1) ; RO2 (Rx Output 2)[6] : RO3 (Rx Output 3) ; RO4 (Rx Output 4)[7] : RO5 (Rx Output 5) ; RO6 (Rx Output 6)[8] : RO7 (Rx Output 7) ; RO8 (Rx Output 8)

[9] : TO (Tx Output ) ; RI (Rx Input)

• Indicates one abnormal condition at the splitter inputYellowDAB• Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputsYellowMAB

• LED off: the board is plugged, but not configured.• LED is green : the board is plugged, configured and without any failure.• LED is red: HW failure, power supply failure or communication failure.• LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. Do not extract the board during this period.

Green / Red

MeaningLed colorName






1:8

8:1

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1300 is an Optical Add Drop Coupler. It is used for the TR-OADM function.- The OADC1300 is a master unit performing both the Coupling and Splitting of/in eight inputs/outputs with wavelengths belonging to the C+-band. The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.

The OADC1300 board can be used in a “demultiplexing and multiplexing branches” of a “TR-OADM multi-degree application” when more than sixteen wavelengths are locally managed for a given branch. - The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction:

½ OADC1100



TDMX1180

LOF

A1110

LOF

A1110

½ OADC1300

Up to 96λ


Up to 96λ

1:2

1:8

OCNC1240

x8

1V

OA

2

1V

OA

2

TDMX1180 TDMX1180



The optical interface is based on 3 double MU/MU connectors and 3 quadruple MU/MU connectors, located

on the front panel :[1] : MON_IN (board input monitoring),[2] : IN (board input),[3] :[4] : OUT1 / OUT2 / OUT3 / OUT4 (board outputs 1 to 4),[5] : OUT5 / OUT6 / OUT7 /OUT8 (board outputs 5 to 8),[6] :



3.9 TMDX11803.9.1 TDMX1180 faceplate Generic shelf

3 to 18TDMX1180SlotsBoard

(4 slots wide)

� It is recommended to insert TDMX1180 in a dedicated “Secondary shelf” for each OTS line on a given “Multi degree” application. This shelf will include the related transponders and OADC1750 boards

� Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation.

Output - 1Output - 2Output - 3Output - 4Output - 5Output - 6Output - 7Output - 8

Mon. In. - 1Input - 1

Managed by the Shelf ControllerOFF when board is plugged but not declaredGREEN when board is plugged, configured and no failureRED when hardware failure, power supply failure or communication (on the board) failureYELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, the board the board the board the board shall not be unplugged.shall not be unplugged.shall not be unplugged.shall not be unplugged.

Green/Red∆∆∆∆

Managed by HW.Indicates that the Wavelength Selective Switch is not ready for operationduring board start.The LED shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board start.

YellowINI

Managed by HW.GREEN when power supply operationalRED when the internal power supply is switched off (e.g. at unit start-up) or when power supply fails

Green/RedPWR

MeaningLED colorNameLED MeaningLED Color





3.9 TDMX11803.9.2 TDMX1180 functional description

� The Tunable Demultiplexer (TDMX) is a board able to separate an input optical multiplex into 8 different channels. It can also attenuate the selected channels. The TDMX function is a part of both Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (T/ROADM) and Multi-degree nodes.- The Tunable Demultiplexer board is based on only one major component : a Wavelength Selective Switch.

� Following pre-amplification, the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler. On the drop path, a demultiplexing architecture (based on TDMX) separates them into single channels which are then selectively connected to their respective Receiver. On the pass-through (or express) path, a Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i.e. completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i.e. connected to receivers) in the previous step, whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation. The figure below describes the environment of the board:

½ OADC1100



TDMX1180

LOF

A1110

LOF

A1110

½ OADC1300

Up to 96λ


Up to 96λ

1:2

1:8

OCNC1240

x8

1V

OA

2

1V

OA

2

TDMX1180 TDMX1180





3.10 WMAN31743.10.1 WMAN3174 faceplate Generic shelf

3 to 18WMAN3174SlotsBoard

•The optical interface is based on 3 double MU/MU connectors and 3 quadruple MU/MU connectors.

(4 slots wide)

� It is recommended to insert WMAN3174 in the “Master or Generic shelf” for each OTS line on a given “Multi degree”application. This shelf will include the related OADC1300 and LOFA110 among other boards

� Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation.

ADD3ADD4

EXT1EXT2EXT3EXT4

IN2IN3

ADD1ADD2

MON_IN2MON_IN3

IN1OUT

MON_IN1MON_OUT

• Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).• YELLOW when ABnormal operation of the wavelength Switch (some wavelengths improperly configured : blocked/pass-through or attenuations not applied properly).• The LED ‘INI’ shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board start.

YellowABS/INI

• Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).• ABnormal Input signal alarm.• YELLOW when signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold, or when some wavelengths are abnormally absent from the input Spectrum.

YellowABI

• Managed by HW.GREEN when power supply operationalRED when the internal power supply is switched off (e.g. at unit start-up) or when power supply fails

Green/RedPWR

• Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).• YELLOW when ABnormal Monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation of the OCM [either embedded or not], communication failure with the OCM or monitoring switch failure).

YellowABM


Green / Red∆∆∆∆

MeaningLed colorName

In case of WMAN3x74 units (3 express ports + 4 add ports) Add5 & Add6 inputs are NOT USED. [1] : MON_IN1 / MON_OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output monitoring),[2] : IN1 / OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output),[3] : MON_IN2 / MON_IN3 (WMAN3x74 input2 and input3 monitoring),[4] : IN2 / IN3 / ADD1 / ADD2 (WMAN3x74 input2 & input3, and Add1 & Add2 ports),[5] : ADD3 / ADD4 / not used / not used (WMAN3x74 Add3 & Add4 ports),[6] : EXT1_IN / EXT2_IN / EXT3_IN / EXT4_IN (monitoring inputs of External port 1 & External port 2 &External port 3 & External port 4).




OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN 3174

M

1 VOA 2

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OCNC1240

1 VOA 2

DWMAN 3174

M MD D

OCNC1240

OC

NC

1240



3.10 WMAN31743.10.2 WMAN3174 functional description

6 «Add ports»- Only 4 of them

are used by WMAN3174

3 « Express ports» and

their monitoring accesses

WMAN output and its monitoring

access

4 external monitoring

inputs accesses

The Wavelength Manager 3 (WMAN3) is a board able to build an output optical multiplex by selectively combining, attenuating or even blocking the single channels forming several input multiplexes. The Wavelength Manager function is the core of both Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (T/R-OADM) and Multi-degree nodes.- The Wavelength Manager board consists of three major components : one Wavelength Selective Switch, one dark VOA (i.e. normally turned off) and one Optical Channel Monitor.

Following pre-amplification, the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler. On the drop path, a demultiplexing architecture separates them into single channels which are then selectively connected to their respective Receiver. On the pass-through (or express) path, a Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i.e. completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i.e. connected to receivers) in the previous step, whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation. The figure below describes the environment of the board in a “Multi-degree 3” application (extract):



WM

AN

3174



The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters , located on the front panel:

[1] : TIA1 (Tx Input A1) ; TIA2 (Tx Input A2)[2] : TIA3 (Tx Input A3) ; TIA4 (Tx Input A4)[3] : TIB1 (Tx Input B1) ; TIB2 (Tx Input B2)[4] : TIB3 (Tx Input B3) ; TIB4 (Tx Input B4)

[9] : TOA (Tx Output A) ; TOB (Tx Output B)




2OADC1750SlotsBoard

Tx_A1Tx_A2Tx_A3Tx_A4

Tx OUTPUT ATx OUTPUT B

Tx_B1Tx_B2Tx_B3Tx_B4

• Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputsYellowMAB• LED off: the board is plugged, but not configured.• LED is green : the board is plugged, configured and without any failure.• LED is red: HW failure, power supply failure or communication failure.• LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. Do not extract the board during this period.

Green / Red

MeaningLed colorNameLED MeaningLED Color






4:1

4:1

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1750 is a Coupler used in Optical Add Drop part for the TR-OADM function.- The OADC1750 is a master unit performing twice the Coupling of four inputs . The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.

One OADC1750 board is able to add eight local wavelengths in a given “multiplexing branch” of a “TR-OADM multi-degree application”.- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “add” direction:

LOF

A1110

LOF

A

1110

WMAN 3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ




OADC1750

OADC1300

x8 x8

21

VO

A

21

VO

A

OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1300






23 to 38 *OADC0104SlotsBoard

Tx_10Tx_90

Tx_OUTUnused

LED

� * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the OADC0104 board (i.e. the input power of the related amplifier) . In such a case, the ALCT and OADC0104 boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.

� Refer to the next page for more details.


Green / RedMeaningLed colorName

The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and OADC0104 boards are inserted and declared according to the following table:

3735333129272523OADC0104 slot #

1817161514131211109876543ALCT slot #







Alarm Interface

SPI interface

ExternalPower Supplies

EEPROM

EEPROM

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC0104 is a unidirectional coupler Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .

- The output power (TX-out) includes 10 % of incoming TX-in Channel 1 and 90% of incoming TX-in Channel 2

- Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming / outgoing access. Relevant alarms can be raised.

The OADC0104 board is used to insert the ALCT power in the outgoing spectrum sent to the LOFA11y0 board in case of “TR-OADM Degree 2, 3 and 4” applications.

- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given outgoing direction:

WMAN3174

OADC0104

ALCT

LOFA11y0

VOA 21

OSC

Local wavelengths to be inserted in a

given Y line Outgoing spectrumof a given Y lineIncoming spectrums

of the other Y lines





Notes Page






4 Line amplifier and related boards description





4.1 ALCT10104.1.1 ALCT1010 faceplate

Generic shelf

3 to 18 *ALCT1010SlotsBoard

Upper part

� * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the BMDX board (i.e. the input power of the related amplifier) . In such a case, the ALCTand BMDX boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.

� * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the OADC0104 board (i.e. the input power of the related amplifier) . In such a case, the ALCT and OADC0104 boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.

� Refer to the next page for more details.

The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the [ALCT and BMDX] or [ALCT and OADC0104] boards are inserted and declared according to the following table:

3735333129272523OADC0104 sl. #

1516171811121314789103456BMDX slot #

1817161514131211109876543ALCT slot #





4.1 ALCT1010 4.1.2 ALCT1010 functional description

Output power from BMDX or OADC0104 for ALC dynamic mode

Switch for ALC mode

+/- 48V

Hardware information

ALC Loading Mode

Colored Laser VOA

ManagementPOWER Supply

Photodiode

VOA Loop

control

ALCT1010 (Automatic Laser ConTrol) is used to maintain a constant optical power over the whole extended C-Band, to facilitate the loading of the system with a few number of modulated channels or to compensate for the loss of some modulated channels. Typically one board per Line Terminal, 2 boards per OADM/Back-to-Back and one per OTS Line in Multi degree n, are used.

The ALCT1010 board & ALC can be used in 2 different configurations : Disable (�manual) or Dynamic mode.

In Disable (�manual) mode, the ALCT output power is set manually by the operator at the commissioning phase.

In Dynamic mode, with BMDX board, the ALCT output power is controlled with a hardware loop from the BMDX output. In that case, the tuning is done with OP_WDM_D that is the BMDX output (i.e. amplifier input) power target and that does not correspond to the ALCT output power. This loop control uses backplane links. Therefore in such a case, the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted and declared according to the table shown on the previous page.

In Dynamic mode, with OADC0104 board, the ALCT output power is controlled in order to regulate the OADC0104 output (i.e. amplifier input) power target.

1626 LM loading plan in Long Haul application� ALCT1010 unit must be in band 5 and removed from the 88th channel,� Channel loading order: 7, 8, 6,4, 9, 3, 2, 10, 1, 11, 12, 5.

There are 11 versions of the ALCT1010 unit available for each of the bands 2 to 12.





4.2 LOFA11yz4.2.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate

Generic shelf

LOFA1121LOFA1120LOFA1111 3 to 18

LOFA1110SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

Compact shelf

LOFA1121LOFA1120LOFA1111 2 to 5

(2 and 5 are recommended)

LOFA1110SlotsBoard





4.2 LOFA11yz 4.2.2 LOFA11y0 functional description

1510nmDemux

1510nmDemux21

LOFA11y0 is an extend C-Band, dual stage, erbium doped fibre amplifier, used for Long Haul terrestrial and submarine applications. It provides up to +20dBm output power without External Multi-Pump Module (up to +23dBm in C-band with EMPM in further release).LOFA11y0 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.LOFA11y0 unit is able to tune automatically its VOA and its 1st stage output power.LOFA11y0 supports 2 functional variants :

� LOFA1110 is a 22/9 amplifier. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 22dB.

� LOFA1120 is a 28/9 amplifier. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 28dB

Naming rules for LOFAwxyz :� w: big functional or structural differences

1: corresponds to a unit that houses both the gain block and the pumps2: corresponds to a highly reliable amplifier, which only includes a gain block but no pumps

� x: amplification band1: corresponds to extended C-Band2: corresponds to L-Band

� y: gain of the amplifier0: corresponds to a nominal gain of 11dB on the LOFA21: corresponds to 22/9 in the case of LOFA1 and to 14dB gain on the LOFA22: corresponds to 28/9 in the case of LOFA2 and to 18dB gain on the LOFA2

� z: minor modifications0: tunable output power1: tunable output power with metro Gain block and floating VOA2: fixed output power





4.2 LOFA11yz 4.2.3 LOFA11y1 functional description

OSC out1st stage

input monitor 1st stageoutput

VOAConnection

1st stageoutput monitor

Opticalinput

2nd stageinput 2nd stage

Input monitor

Opticaloutput

2nd stageoutput monitor OSC in

Photo. Photo.

Photo.Photo.

Photo. Photo.

VOA

1 21510nmDemux

1510nmDemux

LOFA11y1 is a C-Band, dual stage, erbium doped fibre amplifier. It provides up to +17dBm output power and is used for regional application (32 channels max).

LOFA11y1 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF. This VOA is floating meaning that it can be used or not via a front panel access, depending on the system configuration.

LOFA11y1 unit is capable to tune automatically its 1st stage and 2nd stage output powers by keeping the gain of each stage constant; this tuning mode is supported when the amplifier operates in unidirectional configuration as well as in Bidirectional configuration. The floating VOA is tuned by SW, not by the unit itself.

LOFA11y1 supports 2 functional variants :� LOFA1111 is a 22/9 amplifier. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 22dB.

� LOFA1121 is a 28/9 amplifier. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 28dB.





Notes Page






4.3 BOFA1000 4.3.1 BOFA1000 faceplate

Generic shelf

2 to 20BOFA1000SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

BOFA

1000

Led managed by Shelf Controller. It is:– OFF when the board is plugged but not declared– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and withoutfailure– RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure, powersupply failure or failure in communication on the board– YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmwaredownload is being performed; the board must not be extracted**

Green / RedON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down*YellowSD

When switched ON it means abnormal input signal alarm on gain block 1. The signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold

YellowAB1

This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied.This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off (e.g. at unit start–up, unit not configured)

Green / RedPWRMeaningLed colorName

* The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction (logical OR). The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED.

** When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart

and may have to be returned for factory repair .






4.3 BOFA1000 4.3.2 BOFA1000 functional description

BOFA1 input

1st amplification stage Management

BOFA1 OutputBOFA

Photo

Detector

Photo

Detector

Pump Laser Control

Input & Output Monitoring Points

BOFA1000 is a board containing 1 band amplifier that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the extended C-band. The gain block is a single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifier, it provides up to +15dBm output power in a sub-band.

BOFA1000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.

Characteristics :� minimum output power +6dBm� Tuning Step 0.5dB� Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm� Wavelength range 1530.33 to 1568.57nm

Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time.





4.4 BOFA2000 4.4.1 BOFA2000 faceplate

Generic shelf

2 to 20BOFA2000SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

Led managed by Shelf Controller. It is:– OFF when the board is plugged but not declared– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and withoutfailure– RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure, powersupply failure or failure in communication on the board– YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmwaredownload is being performed; the board must not be extracted**

Green / RedON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down*YellowSD


YellowAB2


YellowAB1

This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied.This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off (e.g. at unit start–up, unit not configured)

Green / RedPWRMeaningLed colorName

* The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction (logical OR). The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED.

** When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart

and may have to be returned for factory repair .






4.4 BOFA2000 4.4.2 BOFA2000 functional description

1st amplification stage

2nd amplification stage

Management

BOFA1 input

BOFA2 output

Input/output Measurements

BOFA1 OutputBOFA

Photo

Detector

Photo

Detector

Pump Laser Control

Input & Output Monitoring

Points

BOFA

Photo

Detector

Photo

Detector

Pump Laser Control

Input & output Monitoring

Points

BOFA2 input

BOFA2000 is a board containing 2 band amplifiers that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the extended C-band. The 2 gain blocks are single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifiers, they provide up to +15dBm output power in a sub-band and can be used to amplify optical signal transmitted indifferently in the same direction or the two opposite directions (one direction per BOFA gain block).

BOFA2000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.

Characteristics :� minimum output power +6dBm� Tuning Step 0.5dB� Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm� Wavelength range 1530.33 to 1568.57nm

Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time





4.5 EMPM1000 4.5.1 EMPM1000 faceplate Extractor Handle

Cover

OUT

Monitor OUT Monitor IN

Extractor Handle

Generic shelf

3 to 18EMPM1000SlotsBoard

Compact shelf

2 to 5(3 and 4 are

recommended)EMPM1000

SlotsBoard

EMPM1000 LED





4.5 EMPM1000 4.5.2 EMPM1000 functional description

Pump Laser Module

SPIDER

Shutdown Restart Logic

DC/DC converter

LEDs

ECID

EMPM1000 is an external pump module providing additional power at a wavelength of approximately 1480nm to the LOFA11y0 in order that it can increase its output power up to +23dBm. This board has the same size of the LOFA and has an optical input and an optical output.

The EMPM1000 shall house the pump laser and its associated temperature control circuitry. The pump output power is managed by the LOFA11y0 board via backplane links.

The EMPM1000 unit includes one pump laser plugged via a small daughter boards to the control board and includes a photodiode monitoring.

The control board includes logical control of laser shutdown command. It polls the signal on backplane (GEN_APSD, LOS_2MBPS, BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration (enabling signals) generates the shutdown commands. A Software shutdown command is also available.

The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the 1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions), the APSD functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected.

The optical output provides the additional pump power to the LOFA through an optical connection requiring a specific jumper with angled connector on EMPM1000 side (see installation handbook for details).

The EMPM1000 can be installed in 1626LM NE already in service without affecting the traffic through a temporary inhibition of the LOFA shutdown that is triggered by the removal of the LOFA cover. This temporary inhibition can be performed through the SW (CT) and lasts a few minutes in order to allow the removal of the cover from the LOFA, the connection of the EMPM1000 to the LOFA and the installation of the LOFA cover back in place without having the shut-down of the amplifier.





Notes Page






5 NE management and related boards description





5.1 ESCT20005.1.1 ESCT2000 faceplate

Generic and compact shelves

1ESCT2000SlotBoard

Upper part Lower part

It is ON if a Not Urgent Alarm is raised (minor)NURRed led

Indicates the state of the SC processor. Led states:- green led: board present, active, configured and no failurered led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)- orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or the board is present but not SW configured.

SCGreen / Red /

Orange led

Indicates the state of the EC processor. Led states:- green led: board present, active, configured and no failurered led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)- orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or starting or the board is present but not SW configured.N.B. Even if ESCT supports SC functionality, EC led is green except if this ESCT which is in a slave shelf has not been connected yet to the master shelf (SW has not been downloaded), EC LED is yellow

ECGreen / Red /

Orange led

Attended Alarm indication. It is- ON when the operator has acknowledged then alarms by pushing the ACO button (URG/NUR leds are lit OFF)- OFF when the corresponding URG/NUR alarm disappear

ATDYellow led

It is ON if an Urgent Alarm is raised (major or critical)URGRed led

MeaningNameName Meaning





5.1 ESCT20005.1.2 ESCT2000 functional description

EC

SC

CT

NMS

Mass Memory

Card Presence

ISSBRemote

Inventory

SPI_A

IS-Link-ECIS_Link

IS-Link-SC

Power Supply

LED's

ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) function and the Shelf Controller (SC) function.

The EC supports the Q3/TL1 Network Management agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine). It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and Management system (OS, Craft Terminal, …).

The SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning. In a shelf all the boards are connected to the SC via the SPI bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e.g : alarms collection, remote inventory and data EEPROM reading).

When the board is located in the Master shelf, both functionalities are active. When the board is located in Slave shelves, only the SC functionality is provided.

In master shelf, the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to EC processor (EC to local SC are carried over ISSB bus). In each slave shelf, the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to SC processor.

ESCT2000 located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications and NE data base. The Flash memory can be extracted from ESCT in order to plug it in another unit and to provide the new unit with the data base. As a consequence, only one ESCT2000 in the NE supports a mass Memory. URG/NURG/ATTD LEDs are active on the master ESCT2000 only (managed by the EC).





5.1 ESCT20005.1.3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate

Generic secondary shelf

1ESCT2000_SCSlotBoard

Upper part Lower part

Indicates the state of the SC processor. Led states:- green led: board present, active, configured and no failurered led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)- orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or the board is present but not SW configured.

SCGreen / Red /

Orange led

MeaningNameName Meaning

ESCT2000_SC (ESCT2000 light version with only SC Controller) is supported only in secondary shelves.





Notes Page






5.2 OSCU10yz 5.2.1 OSCU1010 faceplate

Generic shelf

OSCU1011 3 to 18OSCU1010SlotsBoard

Upper part

Lower part

Compact shelf

OSCU1011 2 to 6OSCU1010SlotsBoard

Board reset push buttonRST

Speech channel handset connectorJ1

Optical Supervisory Channel 1 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX1

Optical Supervisory Channel 1 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX1

The led is:- OFF when the board is plugged but not configured- GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure- RED to indicate failure due to hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in communication on the board- YELLOW when a firmware download is performed. The board must not be extracted *

∆∆∆∆Green / Yellow /

Red led

Optical Supervisory Channel 2 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX2

Optical Supervisory Channel 2 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX2

Line pick up push button: push the button to get the lineJ

Speech channel number coding wheels to set the NE phone numberCODING WHEELS

Vacant Line led: it is ON when the line is vacantVLGreen led

Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference call is occurring.This LED is blinking when the phone is ringing

CCYellow led

Line Busy led: it is ON when the phone line (speech channel) is busyLBYellow led

This led is GREEN when the board is power supplied.This led is RED when one of the internal +/- 48V power supplies is failed or switched-off (e.g. at unit start-up, unit not configured)

PWRGreen/Red led

MeaningNameLED Meaning





5.2 OSCU10yz 5.2.2 OSCU1010 functional description

X

O_NOSSA_2

DC/DC converter

SPI interface

Supervision frames and service channels management

64 kb/s2048 kb/s

64 kb/sRXA RXB

METRO

Spider

RXA RXB

RXA1 RXA2RXB1 RXB2

TXA1TXB1

TXA2RXB2

MTX1 MTX2

RXD1 RXD2

TXD1 TXD2MRX1 MRX2

METRO1 METRO2

B1

BE

B1

BE Wavelengthsstabilization

RX2

TX2

I/E

S_Nossa

I/E

E/I

AUXA1

AUXB1 AUXA2 AUXB2

E/I

Board alarms

EEPROM RI

EEPROM DATA

2048 kb/s4864 kb/s

2048 kb/s4864 kb/s

The Optical Supervisory Channel Unit carries supervision information from/to NEs by means of an additional 1510nm (OSCU101z) wavelength.

The OSCU board is used for the management of the supervisory channel composed of :� a 2Mbit/s SuperVision Frame (SPV)� a 2Mb/s User Data Channel (UDC)The SPV is similar to the SDH section overhead (FAW, B1, E1, E2, F1, NU, D-bytes). It contains the LAPD communication protocol with the ESCT in the 12 Data Communication Channel bytes (D1-D3 for OTS / D4-D12 for OMS); furthermore the E2 byte carries a 64kbps voice channel dropped in a telephone handset through a jack connector (front panel) where as E1 byte carries a 64kbit/s auxiliary channel (coming from USIB1000 board).

OSCU must be used in conjunction with USIB1000 to provide external access of UDC.

OSCU10y0 provides 2 optical transmitters and 2 optical receivers enabling to supervise 2 directions (suitable to Line Repeater, OADM, B-t-B Terminal). - In case of Mullti Degree 3 or 4 applications, 2 OSCU10y0 boards are required

OSCU10y1 provides 1 optical transmitter and 1 optical receiver enabling to supervise 1 direction (suitable to Line Terminal).

OSCU is able to manage a Shutdown bus (SD bus) to communicate with the Amplifier boards (LOFA/BOFA). This function is used to remote the Shutdown of the Amplifiers.





5.2 OSCU10yz 5.2.3 2Mb/s supervision frame structure

Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) frame is made of 32 bytes. The 2MB/s supervision frame is divided in 32 slots, numbered from 0 to 31; in the first part of the frame (slots 0 to 15) are inserted the service channels related to the optical transport section, while in the second part of the frame are inserted the service channels related to the optical multiplex section. Slot 0 is used for frame alignment word; the first bit of slot 1 is used as parity bit for the whole frame, while the first bit of slot 17 is used as parity bit for the multiplexing section subframe. All unused bits are set to “1” value.

K1/K2 bytes are used for alarm detection such as LOSC, LOSCF alarms or OMS_FDI, OMS_BDI alarms (to manage OMSP protection).

An 64 kb/s User Data Channel (UDC) shall be possibly dropped or passed-through. Default state is “add/drop”. Cross-connection for E1 is automatically set in “Add/drop” if CLOCK is configured in “LOCAL” or “Pass-trough” if CLOCK is configured in “REMOTE”.

A voice channel shall be transported by E2 byte of the supervision frame so that an operator located in front of an NE could call another operator situated in front of any other NE on the same network (specific call or conference call). E2 byte of the OSC frame shall be put in "pass-through" between both ports on the board if clock is set to "REMOTE". If clock is set to "LOCAL", E2 byte of the OSC frame from port SPV1 shall be dropped in front panel phone jack.

OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) and OMS_BDI (Background Defect Indication) maintenance signals shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about failures. The corresponding alarm shall be raised. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI or OMS-BDI signals.

OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA board. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS detected by OSCU board.

OTS-TTI signals shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about channel mismatches.OT1 byte shall transport OTS-TTI signal.





Notes Page






5.3 USIB1000 5.3.1 USIB1000 faceplate

Generic shelf

23 to 38USIB1000SlotsBoard

8-pin RJ45 (2x2048 or 1544 kbps channels G703 compliant)

8-pin RJ45 (2x64kbps codirectional channels G703 compliant)

4-pin RJ11 (audio interface for connecting an external telephone desk set or for phone extension towards other equipment)





5.3 USIB1000 5.3.2 USIB1000 functional description

2Mbit

/s / 1

.5Mbit

/sAd

aptat

ion

Power Supply

2Mbit/saccess

User 1

User 2

4

4

2 x 2M

bit/s

or 2 x

1.5M

bit/s

interf

ace RJ45

8 pins

LED

RJ458 pins

RJ114 pins

64kbit/s interface

64kbit/s interface

Management

Audio interface 4

4

4

Backpanel Front

panel

Audio inAudio out

33

USIB1000 provides external access to :� Two 2Mbit/s (E1) or 1.5Mbit/s (T1) User Data Channels (RJ45 connector)� Two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels (RJ45 connector)� An analogue audio interface (RJ11) to connect an external telephone desk set or phone extension towards other equipment.

These signals are adapted through embedded interfaces between OSCU board and external access.

T1 signals can be accepted on front panel but require in that case to be adapted in USIB in order to provide 2Mbit/s signals on the back panel, OSCU being only able to manage 2Mbit/s bit-rate for the UDC. The bit-rate selection is configured via a switch on USIB board (to position before installing the board).

An UDC pass-through in one NE must be done via external loop on USIB1000.

USIB is installed just under the OSCU board.

On back panel “dashed arrows” correspond to spare OSCU connections (not available in this release).

There are three 3 Audio in and out lines on back panel :� First one for the main OSCU� Second one for the spare OSCU (not available in this release)� Third one for potential second USIB (not available in this release)





5.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU11005.4.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates

22 or 39 (22 recommended)HSKU1000

Generic shelf

23 to 38HSKU1100

SlotsBoard

25 pins SUB-D female connector for housekeeping alarms (8 functional inputs + 8 functional outputs plus additional signals for reference voltages

Compact shelf

7 to 10(10 recommended)HSKU1100

SlotsBoard

HSKU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”. Nevertheless, it can be used also in the “Generic shelf” . This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000 spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set.

� For both shelves (“Generic” and “Compact”) more than one HSKU board can be used if the capacity of one board is not large enough.





5.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU11005.4.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions

SPIDER

Output block

Input block

8 OUT Relays

8 IN Opto_couplers

Back Panel connectors Front panel connector DB25

Relay x

Relay y

Open relay x

Close relay y

OUT x State : Low

OUT y state : HighCommon out

Example : OUT relays state in function of the SW command

HSKU1000 & HSKU11OO provide 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100 can be installed in Master shelf. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100 unit per NE can be provided.

The user is informed about the current status of the opto-couplers inputs. Moreover the user can remotely change the state of the output relays.





5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU11005.5.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates

22 to 39(39 recommended)RAIU1000

Generic shelf

23 to 38RAIU1100

SlotsBoard

9 pins SUB-D female and RJ11 connectors to be used for rack alarms management

Compact shelf

7 to 10(9 recommended)RAIU1100

SlotsBoard

RAIU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”. Nevertheless, it can be used also in the “Generic shelf” . This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000 spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set.





5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU11005.5.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions

Logic FunctionsURG/NURG/FAN/PSUP...

Or

Logic

DB9

To the TRU or to the above shelf RAIU board

Management

4

Front Panel

Relays

RJ11

From the below shelf RAIU board

Management

URGNURGATTD

RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 monitor the rack alarms to light ON or OFF the lamps of the TRU(URG/NURG/ATTD). It is equipped in each shelf to collect information on the alarms raised in the same shelf.

The slave shelf RAIU only takes into account :� the alarms raised by the fan modules or by the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM,� the information sent by the RAIU board of the below shelf when present.

The master shelf RAIU board collects signals :� from the ESCT via the SPI bus,� from the EC via the URG, NURG and UP signals,� directly from the fan modules and from the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM,� from the RAIU board of the below shelf.

2 front panel connectors are available on the RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 boards. These 2 interfaces are :� A 9 pins SUB-D female connector.

� In Master shelf it provides the interface with the TRU.� In Slave shelf it can be connected either with the TRU or with the RJ11 connector of another RAIU1000 board, located in the above shelf.

� A RJ11 connector which allows intra-shelf connection. It has to be connected with the 9-pin SUB-D connector of the RAIU1000 / RAIU1100 located in the shelf below.





5.6 PSUP10005.6.1 PSUP1000 faceplate

Generic shelf

21 and 40PSUP1000SlotsBoard

Compact shelf

11 and 12PSUP1000SlotsBoard






5.6 PSUP10005.6.2 PSUP1000 functional description

SPIder

OR

48/60 V Filter & surge

suppression

OR

48/60V to 3.7V & 5.5V

DC/DC

3.7V input

3.7 Output

5.4v output

48/60V input filtered

48/60V output filtered

48/60V battery input

PSUP1000 boards work in 1+1 protection and they are both active at the same time, supplying the units in the subrack with nominal 48V or 60V, 3V and 5V.

Each card is able to provide from the main powering, by means an internal DC/DC converter, the required power supply.

The main purposes of PSUP1000 are :� Supply and distribute –48V/-60V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in each shelf.

� Supply and distribute +3.7V and 5.4V protected voltages to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards.� Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.





5.7 FANS10005.7.1 FANS1000 faceplate

Generic shelf

41FANS1000SlotBoard





5.7 FANS1000 5.7.2 FANS1000 functioning

HSKU

RAIU

Back panel wires

Back

pane

l wire

sFA

NS al

arms FANS alarms

FANS1000 is equipped with 3 fans, the unit is located at the bottom of each 1626 LM shelf, allowing to dissipate the heat and to regulate the board temperature. A Fan Unit Protection (anti-dust filter) has to be put just below the fans.

The FANS are monitored via the SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the HSKU and the RAIU boards to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.

The maximum power consumption of the FAN 1000 block is 55 watts when all the three FAN modules are at high rotation speed.

The maximum power dissipation per shelf is 640W.





5.8 FANS20005.8.1 FANS2000 faceplate

Compact shelf

13FANS2000SlotBoard

LED

Top view

Front view

Backplane connectors

Anti-dust filter

OFF when board is plugged but not declaredGREEN when board is plugged and no failureRED : when board indicates failure due to hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in communication on the board

The Shelf ControllerGreen / Red∆

MeaningManage byLED ColorName

M7 connector is used for:- Power supply interface- Card presence interface

M9 connector is used for:- SPI bus- Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board





5.8 FANS2000 5.8.2 FANS2000 functioning

Slot ID

This FANS2000 unit used in the system 162xLM compact shelf is equipped with 6 fans.

M7 connector is used for:1) Power supply interface - Power supplies available on the board are +13.2V and +3V3. Two +13.2V power supplies are generated by DC/DC converters from 2 external batteries (+36V to 72V).

2) Card presence interface

M9 connector is used for:1) SPI bus2) Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board

DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) is used for:1) to adjust the right speed of 6 Fans 2) detect alarm signal to put all fans to the maximum speed (100%)

FAN Specifications :FAN Specifications :FAN Specifications :FAN Specifications :- Dimension : 40x40x28 mm

- Rated Voltage : 12 VDC

- Rated Current : 0,8 A

- Voltage Control Speed : 0V --> 16000 (RPM), 1,65 --> 8100 and 3,3V --> 0

- Speed max : 16 000 RPM

- The maximum power consumption of the FAN 2000 block is 24 watts.







The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frameOCPU2100 is dedicated to OSNCP and is completely passive.OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial applicationsBMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM

LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications

ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic and based on a BMDX output power target.

Line access (network side) of 2xGE_FC board is always B&W CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412

TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI.

FalseTrue

The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frameOCPU2100 is dedicated to O-SNCP and is completely passive.

�OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial applications

�BMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM

�LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications�ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic and

based on a BMDX output power target.

�Line access (network side) of 2xGBE_FC board is always B&W�CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412

�TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI.

FalseTrue

�

�

Notes :





Answer the Questions [cont.]

OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm supervisory channelSupervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/sUDC external access is located on OSCUUSIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels

PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of the shelf

RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from PSUP and FANS

Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT

URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in Master shelf only

LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gainFalseTrue


OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm supervisory channelSupervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/sUDC external access is located on OSCUUSIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels

PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of the shelf

RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from PSUP and FANS

Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT�URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in

Master shelf only

�LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gainFalseTrue

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Notes :





Discover� According to trainer instructions, discover the boards in one or more shelves belonging to the training model: ____ minutesSr. #R. #NE:

41

40

1 20192

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

21 3922

41

40

1 2019

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

21 3922

2

Sr. #R. #NE:





Discover [cont.]

Sr. #R. #NE:

41

40

1 20192

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

21 3922

41

40

1 2019

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

21 3922

2

Sr. #R. #NE:





Module SummaryThe available boards for the 1626 LM R 5.0A are�Transponders : TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12� Protection : OCPU2104, OCPU2100 and PSCU3000� Ethernet tributaries : 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000�Multiplexers/Demultiplexers : CMDX10yz, OMDX8100_x, OMDX4100_chx-chy and BMDX1x00�R/TR-OADM and related : OADC1102, WMAN1100, OCNC12y0, OADC1100, OADC1300, TMDX1180, WMAN3174, OADC1750, OADC0104�Amplifiers and related : LOFA11yz, BOFAw000, EMPM1000 and ALCT1010�Management and Alarms : ESCT2000, RAIU1000, RAIU1100, OSCU10yz, HSKU1000 and HSKU11001100� Environment and User services : PSUP1000, FANS1000, FANS2000 and USIB1000





End of ModuleBoards Description





Module 4Cabling Description3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0







1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceProduct Overview � Cabling Description1 � 4 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Perform optical and electrical cabling related to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Optical cabling description 71.1 Unit optical connections 81.2 MU-type optical connector 91.3 LC-type optical connector 101.4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example 111.5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example 121.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example 131.7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 141.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 151.9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example 161.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example 171.11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example 181.12 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 Example 191.13 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 Example 201.14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.) 211.15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.) 221.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example 231.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 241.18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example 251.19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir. Add/Drop shelf config. - Example 261.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections 271.21 ETHC1000 optical connections 281.22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 29

2 Electrical cabling description 312.1 TRU layout 322.2 Links between PSUP and TRU 332.3 Links between RAIU and TRU 342.4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectors 35





1 Optical cabling description





1 Optical cabling description1.1 Unit optical connections

B&W Rx

TRBD unit

Not used

Not used

Output Input

CMDX unit BMDX unit WDM

Band #1

Band #2

Band #3

Band #4

Band #5

Band #6

Band #7

Band #8

Band #9

Band #10

Ch #1Ch #2Ch #3Ch #4Ch #5Ch #6Ch #7Ch #8

Mux output

monitoringMux

output monitoring

WDM Rx monitoring

Band #11

Band #12Mux OUT

Demux IN

B&W TxWDM RxWDM Tx





1 Optical cabling description 1.2 MU-type optical connector

The optical connections are made with double MU/SPC connectors :• TRBD1111, TRBD1121, TRBD1131 either on Client or WDM interface, TRBD1191 on WDM interface,• TRBC boards, on WDM interface,• CMDX boards, Warning: MU Short Boot is mandatory for CMDX1052,• ALCT boards, • OMDX boards, • LOFA boards.

The optical connections are made with simple MU/SPC connectors on:• OSCU boards, • OCPU boards.





1 Optical cabling description1.3 LC-type optical connector

The optical connections are made with LC/PC connectors on:� All the SFP modules plugged on :

� TBRC1111 on client side,� 2xGBE_FC both on client and WDM sides,� ETHC1000 on client side,

� All the XFP modules plugged on :� ETHC1000 on WDM side,� TRBD1191 on client side.





1 Optical cabling description 1.4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example

Fan

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

BM

DX

1000

1 2

3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

HS

KU

To CMDX

To CMDX

OS

CU

1010

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

LO

FA

11y0

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LINE

All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.





1 Optical cabling description 1.5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example

Fan

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039E

SC

T20

00P

SU

P

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

19 20

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

CM

DX

1010

1 2 23

To BMDX

To BMDX


8ch – 50GHzCMDX1010 or CMDX1012TRBD1191 & 1191 MLSE

8ch – 50GHzCMDX1012TRBD4612, TRBC4612

4ch – 100GHzCMDX1052*TRBD4412, TRBC4412

8ch – 50GHzCMDX1010 or CMDX1012TRBD4312

Associated CMDXTransponder





1 Optical cabling description 1.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example

Fan

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039E

SC

T20

00P

SU

P

PS

UP

RA

IUC

MD

X10

10

OC

PU

2104

OC

PU

2104

OC

PU

2104

OC

PU

2104

OC

PU

2104

19 20

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

TR

BC

1111

TR

BC

1111

TR

BC

1111

TR

BC

1111

TR

BD

1110

TR

BD

1110

TR

BD

1110

TR

BD

1110

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

CM

DX

1010

1 2 23

BMDX side

BMDX side

User side

User side

All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.Protected and Protecting transponders must be located in adjacent slots.










1 Optical cabling description 1.7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example

FANS100041

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

34 38

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CM

DX

1010

19

BO

FA

BO

FA

BO

FA

BO

FA

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

20











1 Optical cabling description 1.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example

FANS100041

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

OS

CU

1010

5

LO

FA

11y0

7

LO

FA

11y0

9

34 38

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CM

DX

1010

19

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

TR

BD

4312

20






1 Optical cabling description1.9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

1100

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 64

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107 9

WM

AN

1100

11

31

US

IB

8

25 28

5

AL

CT

1010

5

OA

DC

0104

25

AL

CT

1010

9

29

OA

DC

0104

LINE 2

LINE 1

PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN1

ALCT

WMAN1OADC0104





1 Optical cabling description1.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

3174

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 64

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107

WM

AN

3174

11

31

8

28

AL

CT

1010

9

AL

CT

1010

5

OA

DC

0104

25 29

OA

DC

0104

LINE 2

LINE 1


LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

OADC0104

ALCT

WMAN3

ALCT

WMAN3OADC0104





1 Optical cabling description 1.11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

OS

CU

1010

OS

CU

1010

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

li.)

7 9 10

41

232523

US

IB

242525

25 25

US

IB

24 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 1

LINE

WMAN OTS 2WMAN OTS 3

OCNC1230

OADC0104


WMAN3174

ALCT

D

M

LOFA11y0

LOFA11y0

VOA 21

OSC

OSC

VOA2 1






FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

li.)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 2

LINE


DOADC1100

VO

A2

1

VO

A2




TDMX1180

TDMX1180 TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

1:2

1:8

OCNC1230

x8






FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

LO

FA

1110

OA

DC

1300

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

li.

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 3

LINE


M

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ




OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8





1 Optical cabling description 1.14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.)

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 371 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20

26 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 24

2525

25 2524 24

2525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 2524

2525

25

OA

DC

1100

27 2524

2525

25

OC

NC

1230

29 11 12 13 14

TD

MX

1180

OA

DC

1750

2

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

4 5 6 7 8 9 103

OADC1100

WMAN OTS 1

M

WMAN3174

4:1 4:1



D

OADC1100


TDMX1180

1:2

OCNC1230





1 Optical cabling description 1.15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.)

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 371 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

22 53 4

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

41

2525 2525 OA

DC

0104

2525 OA

DC

1100

2525 OC

NC

1230

11 12 13 14

TD

MX

1180

OA

DC

1750

2

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

TR

BD

11y1

LO

FA

1110

19

22 53 4 11 126 7 8 9 10

OADC1300

M

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1

4:1 4:1


Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 4λUp to 4λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

OADC1750

OADC1300

x8

DOADC1100

VO

A2

1


TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

1:8

x8





1 Optical cabling description 1.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example

Fan

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

41

2221 4039

ES

CT

1000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

WM

AN

1 2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2023 26 27 30

HS

KU

OS

CU

1010

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

LO

FA

11y0

(p

re-a

mp

)

5 6

LINEEast side

BM

DX

1000

4

24

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)3

LO

FA

11y0

(b

oo

ster

)

107

AL

CT

1010

9

WM

AN

11

31

US

IB

8

OA

DC

29

OA

DC

25

BM

DX

1000

28

LINEWest side






1 Optical cabling description 1.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

OS

CU

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

2527 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 1

BM

DX

1000

22 53 4

24

LINE 1

WMAN OTS 2

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

WMAN3174

OCNC1230

OADC0104

ALCT


OTS 1

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2


Express

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12


Express

ADD

LO

FA

1110

1V

OA

2





1 Optical cabling description 1.18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example

FANS1000

31 32 33 34

21 4039

ES

CT

2000

PS

UP

PS

UP

RA

IU

35 36 37 38

LO

FA

1110

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 2026 27 28 29 30

AL

CT

1010

LO

FA

11y0

(B

oo

ster

)

LO

FA

11y0

(P

re-a

mp

lifie

r)

7 9 10

41

232523 242525

25 2524 242525

25

OA

DC

0104

25 25242525

2527 25242525

25

OC

NC

1230

29

11 12 13 14

WM

AN

3174

OT

S 2

BM

DX

1000

22 53 4

24

LINE 2

WMAN OTS 1

WMAN3174

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

OCNC1230

ALCT


OTS 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

ADD

BM

DX

1000

Express

VO

A1

2

CM

DX

1C

MD

X12



LO

FA

1110Express





1 Optical cabling description1.19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir. Add/Drop shelf config. - Example

CAUTION: LOFA slot 15 and OADC1300 slot 16 are needed only for channels 33 to 64.





1 Optical cabling description1.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections

TRBC unitCMDX unit


Mux OUTDemux IN

W

Not used

W-P

U1

U2

U1

MU connectorsNot used

LC connectorsClient





1 Optical cabling description1.21 ETHC1000 optical connections

TRBD unit

CMDX unit


Mux OUTDemux IN

U

W

Not used

L1

U9

U8

Not used

U7

U6

MU connectors

LC connectors

Client





1 Optical cabling description 1.22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000

No need of additional cable ductand to change subrack cover

4 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FC

Additional cable duct required (on the top)and change of subrack cover

10 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FCMaximum allowed: 64 fibers

Depending on the number and the type of traffic boards, an additional optical cable duct on the top of the shelf may be necessary to route all the fibers. In that case, the subrack cover must be changed. The table below gives some shelf configurations and the relevant restrictions.

For each ETHC unit :� user ports P1 to P6 should be routed towards Top optical duct (12 fibers)� user ports P7 to P9 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (6 fibers)� concentrated bit rate fibers on L1 port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers)

For 2xGBE_FC unit:� user ports U1 and U2 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (4 fibers)� colored signal fibers on W port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers)





Discover

� Looking at the training equipment, identify the optical cabling between one transponder and the line (both directions).

Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate the optical cabling he discovered.

This schema must contain :• The boards acronyms involved in the optical path and• their hardware position (Rack / Subrack / Slot /Sub-board / Connector)• The direction of each fibre.

Time allowed : _ _minutes





2 Electrical cabling description





2 Electrical cabling description 2.1 TRU layout

TRU fuse breakers

Shelf 1 fuse breakerSide A

Shelf 1 fuse breakerSide B

=

=

=

=

II II II

Rack Alarms Indicators- Urgent Alarm (red)- Non Urgent Alarm (yellow)- Attended Alarm (red)

Rack power feedpresence indicator

TRU : Top Rack Unit.

CAUTION: Racks with MA-NGTRU are recommended since R5.0A for all new installations. They are mandatory to host transponders shelves with 16 TRBD1191 (R5.0 restriction released). Racks TRU installed in previous release are still compatible with R5.0A.





2 Electrical cabling description 2.2 Links between PSUP and TRU

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Air deflector

FANS

FANS

FANS

TRU

Air deflector

TRU (Top Rack Unit) provides power feed voltage to shelves.

Power distribution is secured by circuit breakers, also used to power up or down shelves.

TRU provides Alarm and status indications on its front panel.





2 Electrical cabling description 2.3 Links between RAIU and TRU

9 pins SUB-D female

connector

RJ11 connector

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fan

PWR

PWR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Air deflector

FANS

FANS

FANS

Fiber storage

Top Rack Unit

Air deflector

The RAIU boards can be chained as previously described, or can be directly connected to the TRU (Top Rack Unit) which has four DB25 connectors.

To interconnect with a TRU, use the cable 8 (P/N. 3AL 94742 AA).



T o ex terna lLA N

P 1

P 2

P 3

P 4

M A S T E RS H E LF

P 1

P 2

P 3

P 4

S LA V E 1S H E LF

In terna lLA N

P 1

P 2

P 3

P 4

S LA V E 2S H E LF

In terna lLA N



2 Electrical cabling description 2.4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectorsRJ 45 connector for

inter shelf linksTwisted pair

RJ 45 connector for 1353NM

ESCT2000Lower part

Inter-shelf link (IS-LINK) allows the communication between the EC and all the SCs of the NE. It’s a 10Mbps Ethernet bus.

The connections are performed by means of RJ45 connectors, located on the ESCT2000 front panel.





Discover

� Identify the type of electrical cabling corresponding to networkelement(s) used for the training

Time allowed : 5 minutes





Module Summary

� Connectors used in 1626 LM R 5.0A for intra or inter shelves� Cabling is :

� Optical� MU/SPC (most used)� LC/SPC (SFP units)

� Electrical� RJ45� BNC� DB9� RJ11

� Cabling of RAIU and ESCT can be a :� “Bus” configuration� “Star” configuration (point to multipoint)





Notes Page






End of ModuleCabling Description





Module 1Subrack and Board Declaration


Section 2NE Operation






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Operation � Subrack and Board Declaration2 � 1 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the software associations





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Applications and procedure overview 71.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal” 81.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal” 91.3 Steps overview 10

2 Boards and drawers declaration 112.1 Manual declaration for boards 122.2 Transponder boards declaration 132.3 Manual declaration for drawers 152.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawers 16

3 Connectors and cabling configuration 173.1 Connectors state management 183.2 Optical cabling declaration 193.3 Update management 21

4 Specific configuration 234.1 Modifying the LOFA board configuration 244.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration 254.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration 274.4 Modifying the OSCU board configuration 284.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters 294.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration 314.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port Profile 33

5 Protection provisioning 355.1 OSNCP Protection management process 365.2 OSNCP Protection provisioning rules 375.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples 385.4 OMSP Protection management process 415.5 OMSP Protection provisioning example 42





1 Applications and procedure overview





1 Applications and procedure overview1.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal”

Dedicated boards and related cabling Common boards

LOFA11yz_R LOFA11yz_T

BMDX1x00

ALCT1010 (X boards)

<channel #>

CMDX1010 (X boards)

<Band #>

TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111(X boards) <channel #>

ETHC1000 (TRBD)

OSCU1010

Contradirectional with LOFA11yz_R

ESCT2000

RAIU1000

PSUP1000

HSKU1000

USIB1000

2xGBE_FC (CMDX or TRBC)

OCPU210x(optional)

PSCU3000(optional)

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)





1 Applications and procedure overview1.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal”

Common boardsDedicated boards and related cabling

LOFA11yz_R LOFA11yz_T

OMDXw100_y_z

OMDXw100_y_z (X optional boards)

<Band #>

OSCU1010

Contradirectional with LOFA11yz_R

ESCT2000

RAIU1000

PSUP1000

HSKU1000

USIB1000

2xGBE_FC (CMDX or TRBC)

ETHC1000 (TRBD)

TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111(X boards) <channel #>

OCPU210x(optional)

PSCU3000(optional)

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)





1 Applications and procedure overview1.3 Steps overview

� 1) Boards and drawers declaration� Automatic declaration� Manual declaration

� 2) Connectors and cabling configuration� Connectors state management� Optical cabling declaration� Transmission update

� 3) Specific configuration

When a board or a drawer is plugged in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration can be done automatically.





2 Boards and drawers declaration





2 Boards and drawers declaration2.1 Manual declaration for boardsTo declare a board :1. Display the subrack view, where you want to set the board2. Select the empty slot3. Choose Equipment � Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog box

is displayed4. Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning5. In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the type of the board.

Define the parameters if required. Click OK6. In the confirmation dialog box click OK : the board representation

appears on the shelf view. A padlock symbol appears over the board

Reminder : “To remove a board….”1. Make sure first that there is no related loopback, cross-connection, declared

drawer and / or cabling2. Select the board and the following menu options:

� Equipment � Set out of Service and then Equipment � Remove

Example:





2 Boards and drawers declaration2.2 Transponder boards declaration� Declaring a transponder board, the operator is able to set the « Line State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF »

� This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board� Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only):

Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board:

OGP I

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU2

Client Line

Port #1 Port #101





2 Boards and drawers declaration2.2 Transponder boards declaration [cont.]� “Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below).� The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are described step by step in the “Optical channel management” module of this documentation

� As an overview, the two states can be described as follow:

� When “Line State” = ON, the channel is “in service”:� Line laser (WDM side) is ON.� User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not require a shutdown� « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated »

� When “Line State” = OFF, the channel is “out of service”:� Line laser (WDM side) is OFF� User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP configuration and states � « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated »

� It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TR-OADM is not used. Operating this way, the channel will be directly operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs.

� It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TR-OADM is used. Operating this way, the transponder line will be activated or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM configuration type and step.





2 Board and drawer configuration2.3 Manual declaration for drawersTo declare a drawer : 1. Display the view of the board in which you want to set the drawer2. Select the empty slot, where you want to set it3. Choose Equipment � Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog

box is displayed4. Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning5. In the Allowed Equipment Types area select the type of the

drawer6. Click OK7. In the confirmation dialog box click OK





2 Boards and drawers declaration2.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawersNew board(s) to be declared ?

New shelf or existing shelfwith available slots

New board(s) inserted ?

Slot(s) automatic configurationSlot(s) pre-configuration

New drawer(s) inserted ?Drawer(s) pre-configuration

Slot(s) automatic configurationConnectors configuration

Update transmission New board(s) and/or drawer(s) correctly declared

no yesyes

no

no

yes

When one of the following boards is inserted in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration is done automatically:

- ESCT2000- LOFA11yz- BMDX1x00- ALCT1010





3 Connectors and cabling configuration





A given port is able to raise an alarm only if its connector is set « in service »

3 Connectors cabling configuration3.1 Connectors state management

To set “in service” or “out of service”a connector :

1. Choose Configuration �Connectors/Cabling… menu option

2. Select the connectors related to the board and/or drawer in the dialog box

3. Click Set In Service or Set Out Of service. The padlock symbol appears or disappears in a specific column

The connectors are the physical ports on every traffic board.

It is possible to set in service or out of service all the connectors by a multiple selection.





3 Connectors cabling configuration3.2 Optical cabling declaration1. To display the current declaration state : choose the Configuration �Connectors/Cabling… menu option

The above example shows the cabling declaration between a LOFA1120 in slot #6 and a BMDX1100 in slot #3.





3 Connectors cabling configuration3.2 Optical cabling declaration [cont.]To delete a cable declaration between connectors, operate as follow:

� Click on Delete Cable

� Select one “cable”cell in the table

After clicking on button “Delete Cable”, the arrows disappear in the "cable“ cells of the connectors which were connected.





3 Connectors cabling configuration3.3 Update management

� As soon as a declaration or a deletion is made, the TM icon (at the bottom right of the equipment view) becomes blue.

-> Latest modifications are not yet taken into account:

� To take into account any declaration modification, operate as follow:� choose Configuration � Transmission Update menu optionor� from Connectors Configuration window, select Trans Update

-> Latest modifications are taken into account when TM icon is green:

This operation must be performed at the end of declaration of all boards and drawers, and at the end of all cross-connection operations.





Notes Page






4 Specific configuration





4 Specific configurations4.1 Modifying the LOFA board configurationAs an example, for LOFA1120_T :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify equipment configuration ... menu option.3. Enter the location of the LOFA1120_R4. Click OK5. Launch Configuration � Transmission Update menu option

to take into account this modification

By default, the LOFA board is declared as a bidirectional amplifier :• Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port• Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port

An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA for which the first stage output has been cabled with the second stage input.

To use 2 LOFA boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, the contradirectionality between the 2 boards must be set. Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a link between 2 unidirectional ampifiers to build a bidirectional set.

CAUTION : Before configuring bidirectionality from 2 unidirectional LOFA, the connectors have been set in service and the cabling has been activated.

For the LOFA 11yz_T, the contradirectional board is the LOFA11yz_R.





4 Specific configurations4.2 Modifying the transponder board configurationAs an example, for TRBD1191 :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. Select the required values and then click OK

TRBDx specific configuration parameters

Un-activated

Activated-A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send a LOSS indication to the remote Network Element.-When Force_LOSS is Activated, the receiver interface is disabled

Force_LOSS

DisabledEnabledSuppression of Stimulated Brillouin

Scattering.- A mechanism to compensate for vibrations inside the fiber.

SBS_SUPPR

Factory- The optimization is based on a manufacturer mechanism

Automatic- The optimization is based on the FEC

Receiver Parameter Optimization Mode- It enables to clearly determines if the optical signal corresponds to digital value 0 or 1.

RPO_MODE

Add/drop to front panel- The configuration plans that a link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection

Not used- The configuration plans that no link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection

- Configuration of User Data Channel.- A 2.048 kbit/s link may be plugged into the User data Channel faceplate connection.

UDC_CONFIGPossible valuesDescriptionParameters





4 Specific configurations4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration [cont.] As an example, for TRBD4612 :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. Select the required values and then click OK


Manual- Chromatic dispersion tuning must be done manually via Board -> Optical Power level Configuration menu

Automatic- Chromatic dispersion tuning is performed automatically

Tunable Dispersion Compensator Module Mode

TDCM_mode

Un-activated


Force_LOSSPossible valuesDescriptionParameters





4 Specific configurations4.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration

For a 2xGBE_FC board :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.Select the type of client (1GBE LAN or FIBRE CHANNEL)

3. Click OK





4 Specific configurations4.4 Modifying the OSCU board configurationFor an OSCU board :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. Select the required value and then click OK

OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter

• Local ClockThis value defines the reference OSCU board for synchronization.• Receive Signal ClockThis value defines the OSCU board which synchronizes with the reference board.

OSCU board supports channel supervision. When several nodes have OSCU boards, you need to decide which OSCU board will be the reference and which OSCU board will have to synchronize with the reference one.

OSC Clock Synchronization

Possible valuesDescriptionParameter

Clock_Synchro shall be automatically set in LOCAL as a default configuration if LINE_TYPE=OTHERS.Clock_Synchro parameter of a supervision board shall be automatically set in RECIEVE if LINE_TYPE is REPEATER.

If Line_type is REPEATER, clock_synchro is forced in "receive", D4-D12 and K2 bytes received on one port are forwarded to the other;

If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "local", no byte received on one port can be forwarded to the other port;

If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "receive", if D4-D12 are not dropped to ESCT, these bytes received on one port are forwarded to the other, but K2 is not forwarded.

In a supervision board holding two ports, LINE_TYPE parameter shall be automatically set to "REPEATER" when the board is installed in a REPEATER, by operator at board provisioning. Else it is set to "OTHERS".

LINE_TYPE parameter is set to "OTHERS" in a supervision board with only one port.





4 Specific configurations4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning ParametersFor a WMAN1100 board :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration... menu

option.3. Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the list4. Click OK.

WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters

+30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB stepDefault : +40 dBm

The value which determines when a channel is blockedBlocking Threshold

-26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB stepDefault : -22 dBm

The minimum power value to consider that there is a channel at the input port

Input Channel Threshold

+30 to +600 sec., 10 sec. Step, Default : 60 sec.

Periodicity of background control process executionControl Period

+0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB stepDefault : 0.5 dB

Determines the acceptable power variations of the optical line

WDM Line Stability

• No optical output• Optical output

According to the selected value, determines if the board provides optical output or not

Board Output

• Enabled• Disabled

Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts the attenuation when discrepancies exist between requested and measured attenuation values.

Correction Process


Background control process of the output power. When enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines if the output power is kept.

Background Control Process

Possible valuesDescriptionParameters





4 Specific configurations4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters [cont.]WMAN1100 boards in a given shelf are configured in “Contradir” mode :

W MA N1 1 0

0

bo ard #

0 3W MA N

1 1 00

bo ard #

1 6





4 Specific configurations4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configurationFor a WMAN3x74 board :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the

list4. Click OK.





4 Specific configurations4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration [cont.]

WMAN3x74 Provisioning Parameters

+1 to +10 dB, 1 dB stepDefault : +3 dB

Define the maximum channel output power variation to be compensated by the background control process

Power Maintain Threshold

• Power• AttenuationDefault : Attenuation

The flag which determines :• if the channel power is kept at the output of the Wavelength Selective Switch• if the channel attenuation is kept in the WSS

Control / Correction Type

-30 to –50 dBm, 1 dB stepDefault : -30 dBm

The maximum power value which determines a channel blocking

Blocking Level

-22 to 0 dBm, 1 dB stepDefault : -22 dBm

The minimum power value to consider that there is a channel at the input port

Input Channel Threshold

+30 to +600 sec., 10 sec. Step, Default : 60 sec.

Periodicity of background control process executionControl Period

+0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB stepDefault : 0.5 dB

Determines the acceptable power variations of the optical line

WDM Line Stability

No optical outputAccording to the selected value, determines if the board provides optical output or not

Board Output


Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts the attenuation when discrepancies exist between requested and measured attenuation values.

Correction Process


Background control process of the output power. When enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines if the output power is kept.

Background Control Process






4 Specific configurations4.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port ProfileFor a TDMX1180 board :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. For WDM line stability and Blocking level parameters, select the

relevant value4. Click OK.

TDMX1180 Port Profile Parameters

-50 to -30 dBmThe maximum power value which determines a channel blocking

Blocking Level

0.1 to 1 dBDetermines the acceptable power variations of the optical line.

WDM Line Stability






Notes Page






5 Protection provisioning





5 Protection provisioning5.1 OSNCP Protection management process

� To activate the protection, operate as follow : 1. Install transponders and OCPU board according to the recommendedlocations

2. Declare the OCPU2104 and TRBx boards3. Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare transponders

4. Set in service the connectors5. Declare the cabling configuration6. Update the Transmission view

- The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure.- More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training documentation.





5 Protection provisioning5.2 OSNCP Protection provisioning rules� Main and Spare 10G transponders must be inserted in adjacent slots

� Main in odd slot, Spare in even slot� See following slides for examples� In a shelf, three possible configurations allowed :

� 6 1+1 protection schemes for TRBD using 3 OCPU2104� 4 1+1 protection schemes for TRBC using 8 OCPU2104� 2 1+1 protection for TRBC and TRBD using 5 OCPU2104 (mixing)

� Main and Spare 40G transponders must be inserted in fixed slots� Max 2 protected 40G TRBD or TRBC per shelf.� See following slides for example





5 Protection provisioning5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples

Single transponder type in the master shelf

2 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD

Single transponder type in a secondary shelf

4 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD

For OSNCP configuration, the relative positions of TRBD/TRBC and OCPU2104 are fixed:





5 Protection provisioning5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]

Single transponder type in the secondary shelf

4 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBC

Mixed transponder type in a secondary shelf

2 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD & TRBC






5 Protection provisioning5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]

Single transponder type in the secondary shelf

4 1+1 protection schemes for 40G TRBD/TRBC






5 Protection provisioning5.4 OMSP Protection management process

� To activate the protection, operate as follow : 1. Install LOFA11yz and OCPU2100 boards anywhere (from slot 3 to 18) in

the shelf where the OSCU1010 board is present. PSCU3000 board must be placed in slot 39.

2. Declare the OCPU2100 boards3. Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare

amplifiers4. Set in service the connectors5. Declare the cabling configuration6. Update the Transmission view

- The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure.- More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training documentation.





5 Protection provisioning5.5 OMSP Protection provisioning example

Long Haul Line Terminal MASTER shelf

2221 39 40

OMSP Protection for LH Line Terminal (functional architecture):





Exercise

� 1 – Make a backup of your NE database� 2 – Clear the ESCT2000 database� 3 – Align the MIB according to the hardware configuration� 4 – Set in service the connectors� 5 – Declare the internal optical cabling� 6 – Update the Transmission view� 7 – Configure the specific board parameters� 8 – Restore and activate your backup

Time allowed : _____ minutes





Notes Page






End of ModuleSubrack and Board Declaration





Module 2Optical Channel Configuration








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Operation � Optical Channel Configuration2 � 2 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 OSNCP protection management 71.1 Displaying the protected channels 81.2 Modifying the protected channels 91.3 Sending a protection command 10

2 OMSP protection management 132.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections 142.2 Sending a protection command 15

3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 173.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface 183.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface 193.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface 203.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface 21

4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 234.1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder 244.2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder 254.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration mode 264.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) 274.5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 294.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 304.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection 314.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection 32

5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 355.1 Introduction 365.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation 37

6 Line State management 396.1 Line State overview_ Reminder 406.2 Line State Graphical User Interface 426.3 Line State management diagram 44

7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 477.1 Introduction 487.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 497.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 517.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder 547.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder 55

8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 578.1 Introduction 588.2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder 598.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration 608.4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration 628.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side 638.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ Reminder 648.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 658.8 Output power level management on transponder 668.9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition” 67

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 699.1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview 709.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel 719.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel 749.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel 759.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel 769.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel 779.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel 78

10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 8310.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder 8410.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview 85






Switch to notes view! Page10.3 Graphical User Interface description 8610.4 Single channel configuration 9010.5 Selected settings management 9110.6 Global settings management 9310.7 Case study 94

11 Trail Trace Identifier management 9711.1 OTS TTI trace management concept 9811.2 OTS TTI trace configuration 9911.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept 10011.4 ODU TTI trace configuration 10111.5 OTU TTI trace configuration 10211.6 RS TTI management concept 10311.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC 10411.8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC 107

12 OCH configuration 10912.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration 110

13 Loopbacks management 11313.1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD 11413.2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD 11513.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards 11613.4 Creating a local loopback 11713.5 Creating a remote loopback 11813.6 Displaying the existing loopbacks 11913.7 Deleting a loopback 120





1 OSNCP protection management





1. Choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option

1 OSNCP protection management1.1 Displaying the protected channels

� Click on Search � Existing protected channels appear

OSNCP: Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection

The meaning of each column is:Prot. State column gives the protection state. The possible values are:

� Normal I: Main path active, no alarm, � Normal P: Protecting path active, no alarm, � Auto I : Main path active, alarm on Protecting path, � Auto P: Protecting path active, alarm on Main path that caused the switch, � Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path, the protection is disabled,� Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path, no alarm,

State column gives the cross connection state: � A: activated, � empty: not activated.

Dir. column gives the Direction-related connection type: � uni: unidirectional, � bi: bidirectional

Input column gives the signal source (Main Transponder). Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare Transponder). Output column gives the port destination (OCPU2104).





1. Choose the Configuration �Cross Connection Management menu

2. Select a protected cross-connection

3. Click on Modify

1 OSNCP protection management1.2 Modifying the protected channels

� Tick or untick before “Revertive” to get a revetive or non revertveprotection

Protection characteristic:� A revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the normal traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport entity if the switch requests are terminated; i.e., when the working transport entity has recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared.

� A non revertive protection refers to a mechanism, where the transport and selection of the normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests are terminated.

Wait to Restore Time (WTR, 0 to 60000s): A period of time that must elapse before a transport entity that has recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or Signal Degrade (SD) condition can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from.

Hold Off Time (HOT, 0 to 10000ms): A delay that prevents an autonomous switch of a protected channel to the protecting path for the configured time following identification that an autonomous protection switch is required.





1. Choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option

2. Select the connection to send the command to and click on Protect...

� Choose a Protection command by clicking on the appropriate toggle buttonRemark: toggle button greyed when command impossible

� Click OK to send command to NE

1 OSNCP protection management1.3 Sending a protection command

The following commands are available:� Force Switch � Release Force Switch � Lock Out � Release Lock Out

When one of two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I" state: the automatic switching mechanism is inhibited.

When two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) are declared in "protection configuration", if pluggable module of working transponder is withdrawn, protection works but the protection status indicated is Normal P instead of Auto P.

Before sending another command on a given channel, the current command must be “released”.

Check the protect path alarms before doing a “Force switch” command.





Exercise

� Create an OSNCP configuration� Search for the related cross-connection� Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure� Set a revertive protection (WTR=60s)� Observe again the current status with and without OTS line failure� Practice the “Protection Actions”

Time allowed: _____ minutes





Notes Page






2 OMSP protection management





1. Choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management…menu option

2 OMSP protection management2.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections

� Click on Search � Existing protected multiplex sections appear

OMSP: Optical Multiplex Section Protection

The meaning of each column is:Prot. State column gives the protection state. The possible values are:

� Normal I: Main path active, no alarm, � Normal P: Protecting path active, no alarm, � Auto I : Main path active, alarm on Protecting path, � Auto P: Protecting path active, alarm on Main path that caused the switch, � Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path, the protection is disabled,� Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path, no alarm,

State column gives the cross connection state: � A: activated, � empty: not activated.

Dir. column gives the Direction-related connection type: � uni: unidirectional, � bi: bidirectional

Input column gives the signal source (Main LOFA11yz_R). Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare LOFA11yz_R). Output column gives the port destination (BMDX1x00).





1. Choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management… menu option

2. Select the connection to send the command and click on Protect...

2 OMSP protection management2.2 Sending a protection command

� Choose a Protection command by clicking on the appropriate toggle buttonRemark: toggle button greyed when command impossible

� Click OK to send command to NE

The following commands are available:� Force Switch � Release Force Switch � Lock Out � Release Lock Out

When one of two LOFA11yz boards in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I" state: the automatic switching mechanism is inhibited.

Before sending another command on a given multiplex section, the current command must be “released”.

Check the protecting multiplex section alarms before doing a “Force switch” command.

OMSP protection is non revertive in current release.





Exercise

� Create an OMSP configuration� Search for the related cross-connection� Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure� Practice the “Protection Actions”






3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management





3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management3.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface In case of “front side user access”:

� To create the cross-connection select Configuration � Cross Connection Management…

(Cross Connection Management window appears) � Click Create� Choose as:

� Input: relevant port#1-#1-OCHgdcand as� Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc

� Confirm with OK� The cross-connection will be

shown in the list and in the related transmission view

� To delete the cross-connection:� Select it in the list� Click Delete� Confirm with OK

XFP Line module

Back planeaccess

TRBD1191Internal structureUser side Line side

After the creation step, the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window:





3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management3.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface In case of “front side user access”:



� Input: relevant port#1-OTUodu2and as� Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2




XFP Line module

Back planeaccess


NNI interface : Network to Network Interface





3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management3.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface In case of “back plane access”:



� Input: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdcand as� Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc




Line module

Back planeaccess


Line module

Back planeaccess

No XFP module2 adjacent TRBD1191 [3;4], [5;6], [7;8], …, [17;18]

UNI interface : User to Network Interface





3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management3.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface In case of “back plane access”:



� Input: relevant port#101-OTUodu2and as� Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2




Line module

Back planeaccess


Line module

Back planeaccess

No XFP module2 adjacent TRBD1191 [3;4], [5;6], [7;8], …, [17;18]

After the creation step, the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window:





Exercise

� Create a cross-connection for a given TRBD1191 in order to make available the “front side user access”.

� Create a cross-connection for 2 adjacent TRBD1191 in order to make signal regeneration






4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder

� The board includes two matrix areas:

� L2 matrix� When the board is configured in

Concentrator_Auto mode, the related cross-connections are automatically created

� L1 matrix� The operator can configure the “L1 matrix” in order to:

- use the Front side access with optical cabling related to a relevant transponder.

- use the “Back plane” access to connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 without related optical cabling.

ETHC1000 board


VLAN tagging#51 #59

#1 GE #9 GE

Matrix

User side *

10GE WAN Line P#13

Line #1

10GE WAN XFP P#13

Line #2

10GE WAN Line P#14

10GE WAN XFP P#14

Front sideFront side

Back planeaccess

CAUTION : Only the 10GbE Line port#13 is available in Concentrator_Auto mode.CAUTION : VLAN_ID=51 to 59 are used in Concentrator_Auto mode.CAUTION : Up to 9xGbE ports can be used in Concentrator_Auto mode.





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder

� The board includes two matrix areas:

� L2 matrix� When the board is configured in

AddDrop_Manual mode, the related cross-connections are manually created

� L1 matrix� The operator can configure the “L1 matrix” in order to:

- use the Front side access with optical cabling related to a relevant transponder.

- use the “Back plane” access to connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 without related optical cabling.

ETHC1000 board


VLAN tagging#xx #yy

#1 GE #12 GE

Matrix

User side *

10GE WAN Line P#13

Line #1

10GE WAN XFP P#13

Line #2

10GE WAN Line P#14

10GE WAN XFP P#14


Back planeaccess

CAUTION : Both 10GbE Line port#13 and port#14 are available in AddDrop_Manual mode.CAUTION : VLAN_ID=100 to 999 can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode.CAUTION : Up to 12xGbE ports can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode.





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration modeTo display or modify the current configuration mode:1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration... menu

option.3. Modify the Value of CONF_MODE if needed and click OK� Two modes are available (Concentrator_Auto and AddDrop_Manual)

Concentrator_auto : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are automatically created (up to nine user ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service.

AddDrop_Manual : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are manually created (up to twelve user ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service.





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode)

� To display the existing cross-connections related to a given ETHC1000 board in Concentrator_Auto mode, operate as follow:1. Open the board view2. Choose Board � Manage ETHC Cross Connections menu option� The cross-connections are only created for the declared XFP modules on the user side� A Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) [cont.]

� The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connections are shown as follow in the Transmission view:

The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection Management”window:

In Concentrator_Auto mode, only L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13) are available.





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode)

� To display the existing cross-connections related to a given ETHC1000 board in AddDrop_Manual mode, operate as follow:

� 1) Open the board view� 2) Choose Board �Manage ETHC Cross Connections menu option

� A Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode)

� From the VLAN Cross Connections Managementwindow of a given ETHC1000 board in AddDrop_Manual mode, operate as follow:

� 1) Set the same VLAN_ID for 2 ports (either User & L13 or User & L14 or L13 & L14)

� 2) Draw a line between both ports

� 3) Confirm the cross connection creation by clicking OK

� VLAN_ID=100 to 999 in AddDrop manual mode

In AddDrop_Manual mode, L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13 or User & L14 Ports) and L2 pass-through cross connections (between L13 & L14 Ports) are available.

The ETHC1000 L2 pass-through cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection Management” window:





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection

� To create the L1 cross-connection choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option, then click Create button

� 1. Choose as: � Input: relevant port#x-RsTTP(x=13 or 14)

and as� Output: relevant port#x-OCHrs(x=13 or 14)

� 2. Confirm with OK� The cross-connection will be shown

in the list and in the related port view

In case of “front side line access”:

Only port#13-RsTTP and port#13-OCHrsare available in Concentrator_Auto mode

� It is also possible to start the creation as follow:1. From the ETHC1000 board view, open the Mother board port2. Select the port#13-RsTTP block3. Choose Port (Transmission) -> Cross Connection -> Create Cross Connection menu option or click

right and choose Cross Connection -> create Cross Connection menu:The Main Cross Connection dialog box appears. The Input field is already filled with the name of the port#13-RsTTP selected at the previous step (e.g. r01sr1sl03/port#13-RsTTP)

4. Continue as described above� The ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection is shown as follow in the Transmission view:





4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management4.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection1. Choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu

option either in the port view or in the transmission view:The Cross Connection Management dialog box appears

2. Click SearchThe existing cross connections appear in the list

3. Select in the list the cross connections to remove. You can select one or more cross connections

4. Click Delete5. In the confirmation dialog box click OK6. Back to the Cross Connection Management dialog box, click Close to

terminate





Exercise

� Observe the relation between the existing modules and the related Layer 2 cross-connections for a given ETHC 1000 board.� Even if there is no board in the shelf, the declarations can be done.

� Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for a given ETHC 1000 board in order to make the “front side line access” available.






Notes Page






5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management





5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management5.1 Introduction� ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 can be interconnected via the back plane

ETHC1000 board


VLAN tagging#51 #59

#1 GE #9 GE

Matrix

User side *

10GE WAN Line P#13

Line #1

10GE WAN XFP P#13

Line #2

10GE WAN Line P#14

10GE WAN XFP P#14

Front sideFront side

XFP Line module

Back planeaccess


•The boards must be inserted in the shelf according to the rule

described below

Back planeaccess

� Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.

- To be able to do this, the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to the following rule:

> The 16 available slots for both boards are divided in 4 groups> Interconnected ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 boards must be adjacent> In this case, both cards can be inserted in one of the 8 following possibilities:

XXXXXXXXTRBD1191XXXXXXXXETHC1000

1817161514131211109876543Slot ##4#3#2#1Group #





5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management5.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation

� To create the L1 cross-connection choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option, then click Create button

� 1. Choose as: � Input: ETHC1000 port#x-RsTTP(x=13 or 14)

and as� Output: TRBD1191 port#101-#1-ODU2gdc

� 2. Confirm with OK� The cross-connection will be shown

in the list and in the related transmission view

In case of “interconnection via the back plane”:

Only ETHC1000 port#13-RsTTP is available in Concentrator_Auto mode

� Cross-connection:





Exercise

� Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for given ETHC 1000 and TRBD1191 boards in order to make the “interconnection via the back plane”.

Time allowed: ____ minutes





6 Line State management

At the transponder declaration:





6 Line State management6.1 Line State overview_ Reminder� “Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below).� The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are described in the next part of this module.

� As an overview, the “Line State” can be described as follow:

� When “Line State” = ON, the channel is “in service”:� Line laser (WDM side) is ON� User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not

require a shutdown� « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated »

� When “Line State” = OFF, the channel is “out of service”:� Line laser (WDM side) is OFF� User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP

configuration and states � « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated »

� It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TR-OADM is not used. Operating this way, the channel will be directly operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs.

� It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TR-OADM is used. Operating this way, the transponder line will be activated or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM configuration type and step.

At the transponder declaration:





5 Line State management6.1 Line State overview _ Reminder [cont.]� Declaring a transponder board, the operator is able to set the « Line State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF »

� This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board� Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only):

Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board:

OGP I

OCH

OCH

OGP I

OTU

ODU2

Client Line

Port #1 Port #101





6 Line State management6.2 Line State Graphical User Interface� Force_LOSS parameter management:As an example, for TRBD1191 :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option3. Set Force_LOSS parameter to the required value: Activated or

Un-activated4. Click OK to confirm


Un-activated


Force_LOSS

DisabledEnabled- Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin


SBS_SUPPR




RPO_MODE









6 Line State management6.2 Line State Graphical User Interface [cont.]� To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side :1. Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board2. Select the OGPI block on WDM line side3. Select Transmission� APSD configuration…4. Set the APSD control parameter at the required value: Disable or

Laser Forced Off5. Click OK to confirm

The APSD state below, is obtained when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF:





6 Line State management6.3 Line State management diagram

User

side

Line side

TX

RXForce LOSS un-activated

Laser forced OffLine State:ON�

«in service»

User

side

Line side

TX

RXForce LOSS activated

Laser currentstate = Off

Line State:Off�

«out of service»

User

side

Line side

TX

RXForce LOSS un-activated

APSD Disabled Laser is OnA B

User

side

Line side

TX

RXForce LOSS activated

APSD Disabled Laser is OnD

Force_LOSS to«Activated» Force_LOSS to

«Un-activated»

APSD to «LaserForced Off»

APSD to«Disable»

APSD to «LaserForced Off»

Force_LOSS to«Activated»Force_LOSS to

«Un-activated»(Note 3)

C(Note 1)

F orc e_

L OSS to

« Un- a

c ti va te

d »( N o

te 2 )

The above OGPI #101 block is the extremity of a given transponder on WDM side (refer to the previous page to see its environment).

Note 1: when the transponder has been declared with “Line State = OFF”, the APSD configuration is :“ APSD control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off”

- After modifications, the following state is equivalent: “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off” and “LASER current state = Laser Off”

Note 2: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be directly made only in one of the following cases:-> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. In such a case C state is “ APSD

control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1)OR-> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. In such a case, the operator must set first “ APSD control = Disable”. Then the direct transition from C (Off) to A (On) becomes possible.

Note 3: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be made through B only in one of the following cases:-> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. In such a case C state is “ APSD

control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1). In such a case, the operator must set first “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. Then the transition from C (Off) to A (On) through B becomes possible.

OR-> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. In such a case the transition from C (Off) to A (On) through B is possible.





6 Line State management6.3 Line State management diagram [cont.]

� Permanent states description:Line States A (ON) and C (Off) can be required for a given TR-OADM configuration:� Line State = ON is used when the Transponder is used for « AddDrop »� Line State = Off is used when the transponder is not used for « AddDrop ». In this case the transponder does not generate any power toward WMAN board to avoid any disturbance of an “Express” configuration

� Temporary states description:Line States B and D are temporary states which are used during transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) or from C (Off) to A (ON) � Direct transition from A (ON) to C (Off) is not possible� Transition from C (Off) to A (ON) can be directly made, or made through B, depending on the way the TX laser has been set to “Off” on C state (see previous page through B)





Exercise

� According to the trainer instructions, explore the ways to make the transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) and from C (Off) to A (ON).






7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview





� The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices:� full tunable transponders and filters (colorless ports)� capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the

added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention� the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical

Restoration capability� The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on:

� WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node� Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the

overall solution.� This architecture provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM, such

as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node.

� Each channel may be in any of the following states for the TR-OADM Node :� AddDrop� Express� Blocked

7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview7.1 Introduction





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder

TR-OADM

OADC1100 Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ

1:2



TDMX1180

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300


1:8

x81

VO

A2

1V

OA

2Rx side



OSC

LOFA11y0_UnidirOCNC1220

2 1VOA

Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ

TDMX1180

TDMX1180

TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop� The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability

� The WSS, the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes, is an N port device with the following functionalities:� Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped� WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing � Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports� WDM channels spectrum equalization

� The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and is reported in the following slide:� On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier, then several drop paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102, OADC1100 and OADC1300). The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers (TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels.

� Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.� On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750 and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3, which implements the power equalization.

� The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler (OADC0104).

� Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.]TR-OADM

LO

FA

1110

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ



Up to 32λ

Up to 32λ

OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8

21

VO

A

21

VO

ATx side

4:1 4:1Up to 4λ


Up to 4λ

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

ALCT

2 1VOA

OADC0104

Express

ADD





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS) configuration overview 7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder

TR-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT

D

D

M

M



OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2



M : Multiplexing partD : Demultiplexing part

TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation� All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier, then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC splitter card. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices.

� WMAN3 provides the following functions:� Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped� WDM channels Multiplexing� Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports� WDM channels spectrum equalization

� The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.� This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received by any transponder locally installed, removing the need for sites interventions unless new add/drop transponders are required





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.]

TR-OADM

D

OADC1100

VO

A2

1

VO

A2




TDMX1180

TDMX1180 TDMX1180L

OF

A1110

LO

FA

1110

OADC1300

1:2

1:8

OCNC1230

x8

De-multiplexingpart

M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing partOCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler- OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason:- Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application, it provides the opportunity to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life.

- OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. Nevertheless, it can be used also forDegree 2 and 3 applications. In particular when at Degree 3 application installation, it is already know that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.

OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM, before TR-OADM Degree 2. it can be kept instead of OCNC1230.

Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice: OCNC1230, OCNC1240 or OADC1102.

TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths to/from the aggregate signal for both directions.

Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s.Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states :

� Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.� AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.� AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions.� Blocked : the channel is blocked.





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.]

TR-OADM

M

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

VO

A2

1

LO

FA

1110

WMAN3174

8:1 8:1

4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

4:1 4:1



Up to 4λ Up to 4λ




OADC1750 OADC1750

OADC1750

OADC1300 OADC1300

x8 x8

Multiplexingpart

M : Multiplexing part





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder OCNC 1230

D

M

LOFA11y0

OSC

OCNC 1230

D

LOFA11y0

WMAN3174

OADC 0104

ALCT

LOFA11y0

OSC

OS

CO

CN

C

1230

D M

LO

FA

11y0

OA

DC

0104

AL

CT

LO

FA

11y0 OS

C

WM

AN

3174

TR-OADM

OTS 1 OTS 3

OTS 2

1 2VOA 1 2VOA

OSC

2 VOA 1

12

VO

A

2V

OA

1

M

OADC 0104

WMAN3174

ALCT

LOFA11y0OSC

2 VOA 1



To

/from

TR

BD

/TR

BC

(u

p to

72)




The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. A Y Node configuration may be used as a connection point in a meshed network. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80 channels.

Each channel of the TR-OADM Degree 3 (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following states : � Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.� Express from OTS13 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1.� Express from OTS23 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.� AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.� AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2.� AddDrop_3 : the channel from OTS 3 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 3.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 2 directions.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 3 directions.� AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions.� AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1, OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions.

� AddDrop_1 and Express from OTS23 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 direction and transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.



� Blocked : the channel is blocked.





7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview7.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder

R-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT



OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2


Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12


Express

ADDL

OF

A1110

1V

OA

2

VO

A1

2

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12



LO

FA

1110


� WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node;� Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.

� This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM, such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.

� The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node.





Notes Page






8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.1 Introduction� The Graphical User Interface of the R/TR-OADM is mainly based on the eight following windows, available from the « Equipment view »:

� “Cross Connection Management” for creation and display purpose� “Channel Configuration” for WMAN “Add, Express or Blocked”configurations� “TDMX configuration of port” for “Drop” configuration (only for TR-OADM)� “APSD Configuration” to manage the WDM line side of the transponders� “Specific parameter configuration” to manage “Force_LOSS” parameter of the transponders� “Current Instantaneous Measurements” may be useful to manage the WDM line side of the transponders and check WMAN board inputs� “ALC & Output power level configuration” for the transponders� “Spectrum Acquisition” around WMAN board is strongly suggested

� The global configuration of R/TR-OADM application is based on “Transitions” between two “wavelength routing” states.� Each “Transition type” is spread in “Elementary transitions” and related actions to be performed from the windows mentioned above.� The next following pages describe first and briefly these windows and then in details the way to perform each transition type.





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder � To open “Cross Connection Management”, choose the Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option

� Set « Search Criteria » (optional) and the click on Search to display (see below)

� Click on Create to open « Main Cross Connection »

- In the « Cross Connection Management » window above, an « Express ch. 34» cross-connection, between two OTS lines, is highlighted.

- The “Main Cross Connection” window shown below is used for creation purpose.





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration� To open “Channel Configuration” open the related WMAN board view

� Choose Board � Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option� Set the configuration and click on Apply.


This parameter makes part of a process which guarantees the channel output power if :• Power Maintain is Enabled, AND• Background Control Process is Enabled, AND• Correction Process is Enabled, AND• Control / Correction Type is set to Power

Power Maintain

Consist in 3 registers which store the current attenuation value assigned to a given Express input port. For a given wavelength :• The first register (left) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 1.• The second register (middle) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 2.• The third register (right) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 3.During operations, for a given wavelength and a given Express input port, a memorized attenuation can be restored if required

Stored Attenuation ProfilesPossible valuesDescriptionParameters

WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration [cont.]

� From “Channel Configuration”of WMAN board, the operator can “Export” and “Import” a given configuration choosing the following menu options:� Export � Save as CSV� � Save as XML� Import � Load XML File� � Load CSV File

� In that case, the operator can choose the .csv or .xml file location on the PC.

It could be useful to duplicate a given configuration, as a first step, on several NEs even if they may have to be customized in a second step.

This .csv file can be open and modified « off line » using « Excel » (see the example below).

The .xls file below comes from an exported .csv file. It has been customized adding the tiles at the top of each column.





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration � To open “TDMX configuration of port” window (only for TR-OADM):

� Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view� Choose Board � Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option

� CAUTION : All used connectors must be In Service and the Transmission view must be updated.The Channel parameter indicates the signal transmission status to output. The possible values are

Blocked (the signal is not transmitted to the output of the TDMX1180 board) or One of the 96 possible channels.

The Output Power parameter indicates the output power to be assigned to the selected port. The possible values are from –30 to –50dBm (1dB step).

� Each time a new TDMX port is configured, this port is shown in the board view and the operator can open the related transmission view and get back the configured frequency choosing :

Transmission � Display Channel Frequency menu option.





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side� To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side :

� Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board� Select the “port#101-OGPI” block on WDM line side� Select Transmission� APSD configuration…

The above APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF

After the first state modification, the two following states are available:





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ ReminderAs an example, for TRBD1191 :1. Display the board view2. Choose Board � Modify specific equipment configuration...

menu option.3. Select the required values and then click OK� Performing some transitions, Force_LOSS must be modified

accordingly.


Un-activated


Force_LOSS

DisabledEnabled- Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin


SBS_SUPPR




RPO_MODE









8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements”� To display current measurement from a board (such as WMAN3174) :1. Open the board view2. Choose Board � Current instantaneous measurements menu option





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.8 Output power level management on transponder� To modify the Output power level of a given a transponder:� From Equipment view, access to the Board view� Select the menu Board � Optical power level configuration

The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.� Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows.� Click on Apply.

Wait a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. During this process the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.

� Click on Close to finish.

Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191:





8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description8.9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition”� From the equipment view operate as follow:1. Select a WMAN3174 board and open the board view2. Select the menu Board � Spectrum Acquisition …

- The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed:

•Place the mouse on a given wavelength then

the related information is displayed

Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window.The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application.- In this particular case, only Input #1 is used.

For more details using Spectrum Acquisition facility, refer to the relevant part of this documentation in “Optical power tuning”.

WMAN

3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC OSC


ALCT

MDTo TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72)

VOA VOA

Input #1Output

1 2 1 2





Notes Page






9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management





9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview

• Delete express cross-connection• Create AddDropcross-connection

• Delete Express cross-connection

Express channel

• Delete AddDrop cross-connection• Create Express cross-connection

• Delete AddDropcross-connection

AddDropchannel

• Create Express cross-connection

• Create AddDropcross-connectionBlocked

channel

Express channelAddDrop channelBlocked channelFrom \ ToT1 T2

T4T3

T6T5

� CAUTION: Respect the configuration order.

Each transition type is described with more details in the following pages.





� Create an AddDrop cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,

then click Create button2. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK.

� Input: relevant port#1, channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the relevant OTS

� Output: � For TR-OADM, relevant port#1 to 8, same channel frequency, OGPIoch TP

present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS� For ROADM, relevant port#101 to 108, same channel frequency, OGPIoch

TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel





� To verify the channel is dropped only for TR-OADM (optional)1. Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view2. Choose Board � Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option3. Verify if the channel frequency to drop is assigned to the relevant port number4. Click on Cancel to close the window.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]





� To verify the channel is added (optional)1. Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board2. Select the port#101-OGPI block on WDM line side3. Select Transmission� APSD configuration …4. Verify if APSD is set to Disable and the laser is ON.

5. Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Un-activated”.6. Display the WMAN3x74 board view7. Choose Board � Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option8. Check the ADDj (j=1 to 4) or INi (i=1 to 3) position for the channel.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]

� Manual reconfiguration to tune the TRBX channel frequency:1. Remove the existing cabling declaration between the TRBX and the TMDX boards2. Set the related TRBX ports to OOS (Out Of service)3. Perform “Configuration � Transmission Update”4. Modify the TRBX frequency to the expected one5. Set the related TRBX ports to IS (In service)6. Declare the cabling between the TRBX and the TMDX boards7. Perform “Configuration � Transmission Update”





� Create an Express cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,


� Input: relevant port#1, channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS

� Output: relevant port#1, same channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS

� To verify the channel is unblocked (optional)1. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards, display the board view2. Choose Board � Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option3. Select the Express i (i=1 to 3) position for the channel.4. Click on Apply.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel





� Delete the AddDrop cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,

then click Search button2. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.

� To verify the channel is blocked (optional)1. Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board2. Select the OGPI block on WDM line side3. Select Transmission� APSD configuration…4. Verify APSD is set to Disable and the laser is OFF5. Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Activated”.6. Display the WMAN3x74 board view7. Choose Board � Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option8. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.9. Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view only for TR-OADM10.Choose Board � Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option11.Verify the relevant Port is Blocked.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel





� 1) Delete the AddDrop cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,

then click Search button2. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.

� The channel could be checked is blocked (see Transition #3)

� 2) Create an Express cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,


� Input: relevant port#1, channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS

� Output: relevant port#1, same channel frequency, OMSoch TPpresent in the splitter board (OADC1102, OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS

� The channel could be checked is unblocked (see Transition #2)

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel





� Delete the Express cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,

then click Search button2. Select the Express cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.

� To verify the channel is blocked (optional) 1. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards, display the board view2. Choose Board � Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option3. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel





� 1) Delete the Express cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,

then click Search button2. Select the Express cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.

� To verify the channel is blocked (optional) 1. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards, display the board view2. Choose Board � Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option3. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel





� 2) Create an AddDrop cross-connection1. Choose Configuration � Cross Connection Management menu option,


� Input: relevant port#1, channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS

� Output: � For TR-OADM, relevant port#1 to 8, same channel frequency, OGPIoch TP

present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS� For ROADM, relevant port#101 to 108, same channel frequency, OGPIoch

TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS

� The channel could be checked is added and dropped (see Transition #1)

9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]





Exercise 1

Prerequisite : a TR-OADM Degree 2 or 3 is needed for this exercise

� Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an AddDrop channel, following the instructions given by the trainer

� Perform a manual transition from an AddDrop channel to a Blocked channel, following the instructions given by the trainer

� Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an Express channel, following the instructions given by the trainer

� Perform a manual transition from an Express channel to a Blocked channel, following the instructions given by the trainer


T1

T5

T3

T2





TR-OADM Degree 3 test configuration is presented here :Exercise 2

Note : Ax : Analyser at the User Tx of the TRBxPx : Power meter at the WDM Tx of the TRBxSx : Optical Spectrum Analyser at the WMAN3 output





� Checks to be performed for a Blocked channel :� Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line� Px : no power� Sx : no lambda

� Checks to be performed for an AddDrop channel :� Ax : error free transmission� Px : power� Sx : no lambda

� Checks to be performed for an Express channel :� Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line� Px : no power� Sx : lambda

Exercise 2 [cont.]






10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder

ROADM

BM

DX

1x00

OA

DC

1102

WMAN1100

OA

DC

1102


CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1WMAN1100

BM

DX

1x00

Band 1

CM

DX

12

CM

DX

12

Band 12

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module. One part continues through WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths), the other part being dropped to BMDX1000. For each wavelength to be added in the ROADM - via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be blocked in WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct” wavelengths are coupled via OADC1102.

The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme. In a given band, some channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.

Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is present).





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview� There is one common Graphical User Interface for the WMAN1100 boards:

� For each channel, the traffic routing can be configured.� For each channel set in « Express » the attenuation can be tuned.

� The transponder state (WDM side) is automatically managed.� The relevant cross-connections are automatically created as soon as WMAN1100 board(s) configuration is done.

� The routing configuration possibilities for each channel are the following:Blocked, Express, AddDrop1, AddDrop2 or AddDropp12.





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.3 Graphical User Interface description � The ROADM Graphical User Interface is mainly spread over 2 windows:

� « R-OADM overview » and « Cross Connection management »1 « R-OADM overview » description:� Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration� ROadm menu

option to open it:� It is spread in 3 parts:1-1 Current channel configuration state overview

In addition to R-OADM Overview and Cross Connection management, the operator can use also :“Spectrum Acquisition” facility. This facility has been briefly described for TR-OADM application in the related previous part. An application for R-OADM will be described briefly in the next following pages.

� Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details.

All supported 96 channels (in 50Ghz grid) are spread over 4 columns and 24 rows in R-OADM Overview window.



In order to know which OTS line is considered as “1” and “2”, the operator has to place the mouse on the State value (e.g. AddDrop1). Then a bullet will appear showing the corresponding board (LOFA) and related rack, shelf and slot #.



10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.3 Graphical User interface description [cont.]1-2 Individual channel state: “R-OADM Configuration”To get this window click on a given channel # area (green cell)

1-3 Global and Selected Settings

� Global Settings can be used to manage the attenuation values or so set the following configurations:ALL EXPRESS, ALL BLOCKED, ALL AddDrop1, ALL AddDrop2 or ALL AddDrop1&2

� Selected settings can be used to set in one shot several selected channels in the following state:SEL EXPRESS, SEL BLOCKED, SEL AddDrop1, SEL AddDrop2 or SEL AddDrop1&2





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.3 Graphical User interface description [cont.]2 « Cross Connection Management » description:� Choose Configuration� Cross Connection Management menu option to open it. Then, click Search button to display:

� In the above screen shot, 5 cross connections are related to the ROADM� 3 « Express » and 2 « AddDrop » cross-connections

� The common features of window have been previously described.- The corresponding WMAN 1100 boards is shown below:





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.3 Graphical User interface description [cont.]� From the equipment view operate as follow to make a “Spectrum Acquisition”:� From a WMAN 1100 board view, select Board � Spectrum Acquisition

WMAN 1100Input

WMAN 1100Output

The following channels are present at the input: [26/24], [30/26], [32/27], [36/29], [45/33,5], [46/34] and 61/41,5

As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page), it is therefore the only one present at the output.

� Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details.





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.4 Single channel configuration� From Equipment view, operate as follow:1. Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration� ROadm menu

option2. From R-OADM Overview window click on the channel cell (green area)3. In R-OADM Configuration window choose the required State4. Click Ok to confirm this setting.5. At the bottom of R-OADM Overview click Apply to validate the

configuration

- Reminder: place the mouse on the State value to know the OTS line corresponding to “1” & or “2”- After step 4 the information in the cells related to the configured channel is shown in italic until Applyis launched.

- More than one channel can be modified before the validation is launched using Apply.

The channel is blocked. There is no transmission whatever the frequency state is.

Blocked

The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line 1 AND the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line2 toward client line. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line2

AddDrop12

The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line2 toward client line. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line2

AddDrop2

The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line1

AddDrop1The channel goes through the ROADM node.ExpressDescriptionFrequency State Values





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.5 Selected settings management� This facility allows the common configuration of several pre-selected channels in one shot.

� As an example,from Equipment view, operate as follow to set several channels in «Express»:

1. Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration� ROadm menu option

2. From the relevant pop down menu choose SEL Express option3. Select the channels to be configured (green cells become white and information in italic)

4. Eventually modify the attenuation (see next page for more information)5. Validate the setting with Apply





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.5 Selected settings management [cont.]� There are 2 ways to modify the attenuation in case of «Express» setting:

� A - It can be done from the current value directly to another one, quite different

� B - It can be done step by step from the current value

� Chosse the new attenuation� Confirm the setting with this buttonCase A

� Chosse the step size� Modify the setting step by step with this buttonCase B

The attenuation must be set separately for each direction.





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.6 Global settings management� This facility allows the common configuration of several or all channels in one shot.

� As an example,from Equipment view, operate as follow to modify the attenuation of all channels which are already in «Express» configuration:

1. Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration� ROadm menu option

2. From the relevant pop down menu choose ALL Express option3. All the “Express” channels are automatically selected (green cells become white and information in italic)

4. Modify the attenuation as previously described5. Validate the setting with Apply

The attenuation cannot be modified when setting all channels in « Blocked » state.





10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management10.7 Case study

Subrack #1 Subrack #2

WMAN1100 #3 WMAN1100 #16CMDX #2 CMDX #19

OADC1102 #31 OADC1102 #35

� This ROADM application is spread over two subracks:

� Here after the R-OADM Overview window configuration and the related cross-connections:





Exercise

� According to the trainer instructions, explore the ways to manage the ROADM with WB configurations.� For each configuration, compare the “R-OADM Overview” and the corresponding cross-connections.

� Verify that the lambda routing is properly made (according to trainer instructions) using “Spectrum Acquisition” facility.






Notes Page






11 Trail Trace Identifier management





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.1 OTS TTI trace management concept

� The OTS TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the 2Mb/s supervision frame.� It is inserted at the source of an OTS physical connection for transmission.� At the sink of the OTS physical connection, the received OTS TTI is compared with the expected one.

� In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.� The OTS TTI includes the following parts: � SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)� DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)� A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use (no check on this part)

The OTS TTI is supported by the OT1 byte in 2Mb/s supervision frame.





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.2 OTS TTI trace configuration

� To configure the OTS TTI trace:1. Select the port#1-OTS block in

the Transmission view

2. Choose Transmission � Trail trace management � on TP menu option

3. Set the Expected and/or Sentconfigurations

4. Confirm with related OK buttons





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept

� The ODU or OTU TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the G.709 frame.� It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.� At the sink of a trail, the received ODU or OTU TTI is compared with the expected one.

� In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.� The ODU or OTU TTI includes the following parts: � SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)� DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)� A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use (no check on this part)

� ODU TTI is supported by the following boards:� TRBD11y1 and TRBC1111

� OTU TTI is supported by the following boards:� TRBD11y1, TRBC1111, TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12

The OTU TTI is supported by one byte in a multi-frame concept over 64 G.709 frames.





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.4 ODU TTI trace configuration

� To configure the ODU TTI trace:1. Select the port#101-ODU2

block in the Transmission view2. Choose Transmission � Trail trace management � on TP menu option







11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.5 OTU TTI trace configuration

� To configure the OTU TTI trace:1. Select the port#101-OTU block

in the Transmission view2. Choose Transmission � Trail trace management � on TP menu option







11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.6 RS TTI management concept

� The RS TTI is a connectivity control entity carried by J0 byte in RSOH of an SDH frame.� It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.� At the sink of a trail, the received RS TTI is compared with the expected one.� In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.� There are 2 working modes:

� “Mode 1” : J0 transports a given string (15 characters)� “One Repeat Byte”

� When 1626 LM is inserted in a network, 2 cases have to be considered:� An SDH equipment creates the trace: in this case, 1626 LM monitors the trace� 1626 LM boards create and monitor the trace

� RS-TTI is supported by the following boards:� 2xGBE_FC, ETHC1000, TRBC1111, TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12

RS TTI : Regenerator Section Trail Trace IdentifierTIM : Trace Identifier Mismatch

“Mode 1” is based on a multi-frame concept (one byte per frame).





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC

� To configure the RS TTI trace management on 2xGBE_FC board, operate as follow:1. Open the board view then open the port#6 Transmission view2. Select the Port#6-RsTTP block then choose Transmission� Path Trace Configuration menu option

� The JO configuration window will appear.

The JO configuration for ETHC1000 is not shown in this manual (same way to configure).





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont.]

� TX side configuration :

1. Select the required mode2. Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte3. Calculate the CRC74. Confirm the configuration with OK

CRC7: Cyclic Redundancy Check 7





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont.]

� “Expected” configuration on RX side:

1. Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. Disabled / Enabled2. Select the required mode3. Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte4. Calculate the CRC75. Confirm the configuration with OK

When the configuration is done on both sides, check the received J0 trace and related TIM alarm if any.





11 Trace Trail Identifier management11.8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC� From the Transmission view of the TRBD or TRBC board, select the

relevant TP (see below)1. Choose Transmission � Trail Monitor � Create menu option2. Select the TM block then Transmission � Path Trace Configuration

menu option3. Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. Disabled / Enabled4. Set the expected trace5. Confirm with OK

SDH-RSPort#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU1 (TRBC1111)

SDH-RSPort#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12)

SDH-RSPort#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBC4x12)

SDH-RSPort#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1)to monitor JO trace on … layerYou can create a TM on transmission blocks on …





Notes Page






12 OCH configuration





12 OCH configuration12.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration � FEC configuration

1. From the Transmission view of TRBD or TRBC, select the port#101-OCH block2. From the Transmission menu, untick or tick beforeFec Enabled

� A « F » disappears or appears� BER threshold configuration

1. From the Transmission view of TRBD or TRBC, select the port#101-OCH block2. Choose Transmission � BER threshold configuration…menu option3. From the Low Threshold Set list box, select the required value4. Click OK

LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error Rate- The FEC must be “Enabled” to get any LTCER alarm.- The operator can configure the following threshold values : from 10-3 to 10-8 (UNI) or from 10-4 to 10-8(NNI).





Exercise

� Set and observe the OTS trace configuration for a given an OTS physical connection

� Set and observe the J0 trace configuration for a given transponder

� Set and observe the OTU2 trace configuration for a given transponder

� For a given transponder:� De-activate and activate the FEC� Modify and restore the LCTER configuration






Notes Page






13 Loopbacks management





13 Loopbacks management13.1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD

TRBC

TRBD

Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the transmission path with the help of an external test device. The external test device is used to compare the outgoing and returning signals. The result of the loopback is shown on the external test device.

The “Local loopback” is also called “B&W line loop & continue”. The received client signal on the B&W interface is copied and sent back through the B&W emitter. This signal is also transmitted to the WDM emitter.

.

Local loopback is not supported by TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12.





13 Loopbacks management 13.2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD

TRBD

The “Remote loopback” is also called “WDM line loop & continue”. The received signal on the WDM interface is copied and sent back through the WDM emitter. It is also transmitted to the User emitter.

The behavior is exactly the same for TRBC.It is not possible to configure a local and a Remote loopback in the same time on the same transponder.

Moreover, Remote loopback configuration cannot be applied on two TRBD/TRBC boards with the same channel. This problem can be encountered in an OADM configuration.





13 Loopbacks management 13.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards

Local (User) Loopback

Remote (Line) Loopback

n

n





1. In Equipment view, select the board (TRBD11y1, TRBC1111, 2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000)

2. Access to the Transmission view3. Select the Port#x-OGPI block (User side)

x=1 for TRBD11y1, x=1 to 4 for TRBC1111, x=1 to 2 for 2XGBE_FC, x=1 to 12 for ETHC1000

4. Choose the Transmission � Port Loopback Configuration… menu optionThe OGPI Termination Point is already defined

5. Click on OK twice to create the Loopback

13 Loopbacks management13.4 Creating a local loopback

It’s possible to create Line Loopback with either the choice Loop and Continue or Loop and Cut depending on the selected Termination Point.





1. In Equipment view, select the board (TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12,TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000)

2. Access to the Transmission view3. Select the Port#x-OGPI block (WDM side)

x=101 for TRBD/TRBC, x=6 for 2xGBE_FC and x=13 for ETHC1000 4. Choose the Transmission � Port Loopback Configuration

menu option5. Click on OK6. Click on OK to create the Loopback

13 Loopbacks management 13.5 Creating a remote loopback





1. In Equipment view, choose Configuration � Loopback Managementmenu option The Signal Loopback Management window appears

2. Click on Close to close the dialog box

13 Loopbacks management 13.6 Displaying the existing loopbacks





13 Loopbacks management 13.7 Deleting a loopback

� Select the loopback(s) you want to delete

� Click on Close

� Click on Delete





Exercise

� Connect a SDH tester on one Transponder� Loop the Line interface with an appropriate attenuation� Check on tester that traffic is good� Configure a local Loopback on the Transponder� Open the physical loop on Line interface� Check there is no error on the tester� Delete the Loopback and check traffic is disrupted






Module Summary� In addition to board, modules and optical cables declaration, some cross-connections must be created:� In TRBD1191 and in ETHC1000 boards� Warning : do not forget Configuration � Transmission Update

� Optical channel protection (OSNCP and OMSP):� The related cross-connections are automatically created� The operator can : Force Switch, Lockout or Release the protection state

� Line state management is included in TR-OADM transitions. Nevertheless, it is possible to manage it separately. � The R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration is based on “Transitions”. To perform a transition, a set of boards must be configured accordingly and related cross-connections may have to be created or removed. � Setting the ROADM (WB based) configuration, both WMAN1 boards, related cross-connections and transponders states are automatically managed. � The traces can be managed as follow:� OTS-TTI, ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI and RS-TTI are supported

� FEC and BER threshold can be managed on the OCH block� Loopbacks can be set on user side (Local) or on Line side (Remote)





End of ModuleOptical Channel Configuration





Module 3Optical Power Tuning








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Operation � Optical Power Tuning2 � 3 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for maintenance reasons





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Current instantaneous measurements 71.1 Monitoring points for transmission path 81.2 Monitoring points for reception path 91.3 Measurement from Equipment menu 101.4 Measurement from Board Menu 11

2 ALCT1010 board setting 132.1 Introduction 142.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode 162.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode 182.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board 192.5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board 20

3 LOFA board setting 213.1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction 223.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints 233.3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode 243.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode 253.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints 263.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode 273.7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box 283.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT 293.9 Setting the VOA attenuation 303.10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 313.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 32

4 Transponder output power setting 334.1 Setting the transponder output power 34

5 WMAN output power setting 355.1 Setting the WMAN output power 365.2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation 375.3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power 38

6 Spectrum acquisition operation 396.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder) 406.2 Introduction 416.3 Getting started 426.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application 43





1 Current instantaneous measurements





1 Current instantaneous measurements1.1 Monitoring points for transmission path

8:1

12:1

Transponder

External optical monitoring point

Loading channel(ALCT)

Band Mux(BMDX)

Channel Mux(CMDX)

Supervision(OSCU)

Inter-stage(for DCF use)

Internal optical monitoring point

OSC

LineAmplifier(LOFA)

WDM LINE

The above figures represent all the external and internal monitoring points for input and/or output optical powers in transmission path for a “terminal application”.

The external monitoring points are accessible on the front panel of boards. They are suitable to connect an optical spectrum analyzer or an optical photometer for example. Signal provided at these external monitoring points comes from a tap coupler, corresponding to a small percentage of the “traffic” signal flow. We can notice that there is no such test point on ALCT and OSCU boards.

The internal monitoring points provide from a tap coupler and after an analogue to digital conversion, an optical power measurement accessible from specific menus in CT or OS “Equipment View”. These “instantaneous measurements” do not concern only optical powers but also other parameters such as current unit temperature, laser bias current or laser temperature.





1 Current instantaneous measurements1.2 Monitoring points for reception path

8:1

12:1

Transponder

External optical monitoring point

Band Mux(BMDX)

Channel Mux(CMDX)

Supervision(OSCU) Internal optical monitoring point

OSC

WDM LINE

LineAmplifier(LOFA)

Inter-stage(for DCF use)





1 Current instantaneous measurements1.3 Measurement from Equipment menu

� Select a board � Select the

right option

� The result is displayed

BMDX board

Current instantaneous measurements are available on boards such as:� TRBD11y1� TRBD4x12� TRBC1111� TRBC4x12� CMDX1010� OMDXw100_y_z� BMDX1x00� WMAN3174� TMDX1180� OADC0104� ALCT1010� LOFA11yz� PSUP1000 (Current Unit temperature only)� HKSU1000 (Current Unit temperature only)� …

Click on Refresh to update the measurement values.

For all the boards, the measurements values have an error margin of 1dB.





1 Current instantaneous measurements1.4 Measurement from Board Menu� To display current measurement from a board:1. Open the board view (such as ETHC1000) 2. Choose Board � Current instantaneous measurements menu option





1 Current instantaneous measurements1.4 Measurement from Board Menu [cont.]� Example: Current Instantaneous Measurements for TDMX1180 board





2 ALCT1010 board setting





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.1 Introduction

� The above figure shows, the interconnections between ALCT, BMDX and LOFA boards in case of “Terminal” mode application. � The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser

Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after:

BMDX1000

1

12

ALCT1010

LOFA_R

LOFA_T

VOA DCU

DCU

IP1

1 2

12

Pre-VOA OP

Post-VOA OP

IP2 OP2

OP2 Pre-VOA OP

Post-VOA OP

IP2 IP1

VOA

The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow:

1 - “Disable”� In this case, the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power

at the the LOFA_T input . Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.

2 – “Dynamic”� When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the output power of the BMDX (i.e. IP1, the input

power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010 board.

� When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the “Booster input” reference value must be set operating as described on the next relevant page.

3 – “Loading”� This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5.0A� The Loading ALC is an algorithm which principle is to keep constant the BMDX mux output power

(which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at the provisioned level. The Loading ALC session manages the emitted power of the ALCT only or of the ALCT and tributaries. In the latter case, if there is no ALCT connected to the BMDX the Loading ALC session manages only the tributaries emitted power.





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.1 Introduction [cont.]

� The above figure shows the interconnections between WMAN3174, OADC0104, ALCT and LOFA boards in case of “Multi degree” mode application. � The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser

Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after:

TR-OADM

WMAN3174

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

ALCTMultiplexing structure of

incoming local traffic


1 VOA 2From other OTS lines of the TR-OADM

The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow:

1 - “Disable”� In this case, the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power

at the the LOFA_T input . Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.

2 – “Dynamic”� When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the output power of the OADC0104 (i.e. IP1, the input

power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010 board.

� When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the “Booster input” reference value must be set operating as described on the next relevant page.

3 – “Loading”� This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5.0A.





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode

� In Equipment view, select the LOFA11yz_Rboard

1.Access to the Transmission view2.Select the port#1-OMS block3.Choose the menu Transmission � AlcManagement

4.The Automatic Laser Control Managementdialog box is displayed.

1- Terminal, BOADM and ROADM (WB based) applications:The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain BMDX-muxoutput power (which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at a provisioned level.

Preliminary condition :ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode. Consequently, BMDX and ALCT1010 must be located in the shelf according to the following table:

2 – ILA PGE, ILA AGE, ROADM and TR-OADM (WSS based) applications:The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain the incoming power level of the related LOFA board in TX direction at a provisioned level.

Preliminary condition :ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode. Consequently, ALCT1010 and OADC0104 must be located in the shelf according to the following table:

1516171811121314789103456BMDX slot #

1817161514131211109876543ALCT slot #

3735333129272523OADC0104 slot #

1817161514131211109876543ALCT slot #





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode [cont.]

1. Click "Dynamic" in the “Mode Configuration" area. 2. In the Dynamic Alc Configuration area, enter the location of the

ALCT unit that must operate in Dynamic mode and click on Set.3. In the "Power Configuration" set the Booster Input Power by using

the up and down arrows.4. Click on Set.5. Click on Close to finish.

� Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the BMDX output power and/or amplifier input power level. Refer to the example given at the beginning of this module “Measurement from Equipment menu” _ BMDX board





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode� Get the relevant

Automatic Laser Control Managementdialog box

1. Click "Disable" in the “Mode Configuration"area.

2. Click on Set.3. Click on Close to finish.4. Configure the ALCT output

power level as shown on the next page until the target power is reached at the amplifier input.

� Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the OADC0104 output power and/or amplifier input power level.





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board

1. In Equipment view, select the ALCT board 2. Access to the Board view3. Select the menu Board � Optical power level configuration

The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.4. Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows.5. Click on Apply.


6. Click on Close to finish.





2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board

TR-OADM

WMAN3174

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

ALCTMultiplexing structure of

incoming local traffic


1 VOA 2From other OTS lines of the TR-OADM





3 LOFA board setting





3 LOFA board setting3.1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction

� Two main parameters may be configured for LOFA11yz :

� APT (Automatic Power Tuning) modes� Manual� POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in power

(only for unidirectional amplifier)� GAIN: Automatic Gain Control on 1rst and 2nd stages

� VOA (Variable Automatic Attenuator) modes� Manual� MSV: Middle Stage VOA tuning (only for unidirectional

amplifier)� SAC: Span Attenuation Control

- LOFA11y0 can work only in unidirectional configuration.- LOFA11y1 has two possible configurations : unidirectional or bidirectional.- When LOFA11yz is Unidirectional, VOA is placed at the first stage output. When LOFA11y1 is Bidirectional, VOA is placed at the first stage input.

APT (Amplifier Power Tuning) modes :� MANUAL: the 1st and 2nd stage output power is set at the value manually provisioned. � POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in Power (only for amplifier Unidirectional configuration). The 1st stage output power is automatically tuned according to the provisioned 2nd stage output power, to the measured VOA attenuation and parameters depending of the optical design of the link. This algorithm doesn't apply to 2nd stage whose output power remains manually tuned. � GAIN: Automatic Gain control on first and second stage. Amplifier is controlled to keep its gain constant on the two stages. It is therefore required that a link can be upgraded without ALCT unit but with an automatic tuning of the line amplifiers.

VOA modes : � MANUAL: VOA is set at the value manually provisioned.� MSV: Mid Stage VOA tuning (only for amplifier Unidirectional configuration); VOA is automatically tuned according to the LOFA input and output powers in order to control and optimize its spectral flatness.� SAC: The VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier. The VOA attenuation is tuned so as to maintain the input power level constant on the 1st stage of the LOFA (receive side). Refer to next relevant pages for more details.





3 LOFA board setting3.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints

� The “Manual” APT mode:- is possible for all types of LOFA boards.- is compatible with all VOA modes for unidirectional LOFA board.- is compatible with Manual VOA mode only for bidirectional LOFA board.� The “Power” APT mode:- is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.- is compatible with all VOA modes.� The Gain APT mode:- is possible for all types of LOFA board.- is compatible with Manual VOA mode only.

The 2 following parameters are configured manually:• ITThe Effective Inter-stage attenuation.This parameter represents the attenuation between the location wherethe channels are added and the 2nd stage input.• EOL spanThe Effective End Of Life span attenuation.This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream nodewhere the channels are added and the 1rst stage input.In the Gain APT mode, other parameters are inactivated.

Gain

The 2 following parameters are configured manually:• 2nd stage output power (OP2)• Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff)The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage output power (OP1).

Power

1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are entered manually.In the Manual APT mode, other APT parameters are inactivated.

ManualDescriptionAPT Modes





3 LOFA board setting3.3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode

BMDX1000

1

12

ALCT1010

LOFA_11y0

LOFA_11y0

VOA DCU

DCU

IP1

1 2

12

Pre-VOA OP

Post-VOA OP

IP2

OP2

OP2

Pre-VOA OP

Post-VOA OP

IP2 IP1

VOA

OP-Diff

OP-Diff

In “Power” mode, OP1 (PreVOA OP) is tuned according to the provisioned OP_Diff and OP2 and the current VOA attenuation value. Amplifier output power (OP2) and OP_Diff are constant.

The (constant) difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power is set by setting the difference between 2nd stage output and VOA output: OP_Diff = OP2 – PostVOA OP.

OP_Diff maintains a fixed difference between power at the input of transmission fiber and power at the input of DCM.

The difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power changes only if the VOA losses change, i.e. to compensate for fiber ageing. Since the VOA decreases with ageing, the 1-st stage output power also decreases with ageing to maintain PostVOA OP constant;

The OP_Diff must be chosen in order to have the good trade-off between:� higher power at the 2nd-stage input ⇒ better amplifier noise-figure (NF)� limited power at the DCM input ⇒ nonlinear effects accumulation in the DCMs must be below a certain threshold

An optimum OP_Diff could be identified link-by-link, but typical values can be generally applied, only depending on the fiber type: � G652 SMF: typical OP_Diff = 8 dB� G655 TeraLight: typical OP_Diff = 6 dB� G655 E-Leaf and TrueWave-RS: typical OP_Diff = 5 dB (even lower would be possible, but typically not possible to maintain such large power values at the output of the first stage)

“Power” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier.





3 LOFA board setting3.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode

BMDX1000

1

12LOFA_11yz

LOFA_11yz

VOA DCU

DCU

IP1

1 2

12

Pre-VOA OP IP2

OP2

OP2

Pre-VOA OPIP2

IP1

VOA

IT

IT

1

2LOFA_11yz

LOFA_11yz

IP1

OP2

EOL Span

EOL Span

In “Gain” mode, every amplifier stage keeps its gain constant (output power – input power = constant)� The input power is monitored, If the input power varies, the output power is changed accordingly,

� This algorithm is applied separately by 1st and 2nd stage of every amplifier.

In “Gain” mode, the amplifier automatically adapts OP1 (PreVOA OP) and OP2 to the number of input channels. Both amplifier stages are controlled in gain (constant gain). This allows controlling at the same time the impact of the nonlinear effects inside the transmission fiber and the DCM.

OP2 – PreVOA OP = 5 (for LOFA11y0 and LOFA11y1)-> OP1 = PreVOA OP = OP2 – 5 or OP2 = 5 + PreVOA OP

OP2 is tuned according to the provisioned IT parameter and the current input power measurement IP2 : IT = IP2 – PreVOA OP

-> IT = IP2 – OP2 + 5-> OP2 = IP2 + 5 – IT

OP1 is tuned according to the provisioned EOL Span parameter and the current input power measurement IP12 :EOL Span = OP2 – IP1

-> EOL Span = 5 + PreVOA OP – IP1-> OP1 = PreVOA OP = IP1 + EOL Span - 5





3 LOFA board setting3.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints

� The “Manual” VOA mode:- is possible for all types of LOFA board.- is compatible with all APT modes

� The “MSV” VOA mode:- is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.- is compatible with Manual and Power APT modes.

� The “SAC” mode can be used :- if the VOA is placed before the LOFA operating as pre-amplifier.

The Span Attenuation Control is used when the VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier.• When a repair is made after a fiber cut, the span attenuation may be increased. When the line is back to an operational state, the operator is able to launch the SAC function to reduce automatically the VOA attenuation in order to keep the input power level on the 1st stage of the LOFA (receive side) as it was before the failure.

SAC

In the Mid Stage VOA tuning, K_Diff is entered manually:K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant(given by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant.In the MSV VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.

MSV

Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually.In the Manual VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.ManualDescriptionVOA Modes





3 LOFA board setting3.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode

BMDX1000

1

12

ALCT1010

LOFA_R

LOFA_T

VOA DCU

DCU

IP1

1 2

12

Pre-VOA OP IP2

OP2

OP2

Pre-VOA OPIP2

IP1

VOA

Gain

Inter-Stage Loss

Gain

Inter-Stage Loss

The MSV adjusts automatically (in real time) the mid-stage VOA to adapt the mid-stage losses to the present amplifier gain, according to the following rules:

LOFA111z: “31-dB rule”The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 31 dBNote: 22+9=31dB

LOFA112z: “37-dB rule”The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 37 dBNote: 28+9=37dB

The constants 31 dB and 37 dB are indicated as “K_theoric” since they are theoretical (average) value.

In a true amplifier board, the optimum constant (K_flat) can differ from K_theoric. In this case: K_flat = K_theoric + K_diff

In very long links, where the accumulation of gain flatness imperfections can bring severe transmission degradation, it is possible to adjust the K_Diff parameter (default = 0) by CT or OS, in order to optimize it in field (or in the factory) for each specific amplifier. This optimization procedure is called Specific MSV (SMSV).

The “MSV” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier.





1. In Equipment view, select the LOFA11yz_R board 2. Access to the Board view3. Select the menu Board � APT/VOA

The APT/VOA Configuration dialog box is displayed

3 LOFA board setting3.7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box





3 LOFA board setting3.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT

1. Provision the APT mode in the APT area.� If Manual mode selected: provision the 1st and 2nd stages Output

Power, OP1 and OP2 fields� If Power mode selected : provision OP_Diff and the 2nd stage output

power OP2 fields� If Gain mode selected : provision EOLspan and IT fields

2. Click on Apply after each modifications. Wait for a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. During this process, the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.

3. Click on Close to terminate.

Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode, some fields are provisionable using the up and down arrows, and the others are greyed (not provisionable).

OP1 : Output Power of 1st stageOP2 : Output Power of 2nd stageOP_Diff : is the difference between the line fibre input power (OP2) and the Mid-Stage payload input power (post VOA first stage output power). Default value is 9 dB.

EOL Span : End of Life attenuation of the span. This value is estimated. This represents the attenuation between the upstream node where channels are added and the first stage input.

IT : Amplifier Inter Stage Losses





3 LOFA board setting3.9 Setting the VOA attenuation1. Provision the VOA mode in the VOA area.

� If Manual mode selected: provision the VOA attenuation� If MSV mode selected : provision K_Diff� If SAC mode is selected: tune the VOA attenuation on operator request

2. Click on Apply after each modifications. � Wait for a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. During this

process, the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.3. Click on Close to terminate.

Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode, some fields are provisionable using the up and down arrows, and the others are greyed (not provisionable).

Compatible APT modes are :� Manual or Power for Mid-Stage VOA mode

LOFA11y0 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage. This VOA is fixed and located at the interstage, just before the 1st stage output front panel connector.

Unidirectional LOFA11y1 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.

In Bidirectional configuration, the floating VOA of LOFA11y1 is before the first stage for maintain the loss variation of the span fiber during the life of the system (ageing or repairing).





3 LOFA board setting3.10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements”

LOFA_T

DCU 2

Pre-VOA OPPost-VOA OP

IP2

OP2IP1

1 VOA

OP-DiffGain

Inter-Stage Loss





3 LOFA board setting3.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements”� In R-ADM application, the OADC1102 board interconnects the following boards: the amplifier (LOFA), the BMDX and the WMAN1100 boards.

« Current Instantaneous Measurements » of OADC1102 are shown below:

BM

DX

1x00

OA

DC

1102

WMAN1100O

AD

C1102


CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1

WMAN1100

BM

DX

1x00Band 1

CM

DX

12

CM

DX

12 Band 12

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

Current Instantaneous Measurements for OADC1102:





4 Transponder output power setting





4.1 Setting the transponder output power1. In Equipment view, select a Transponder 2. Access to the Board view3. Select the menu Board � Optical power level configuration

The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.4. Set the output power by using the up and down arrows.5. Click on Apply.


6. Click on Close to finish.

Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191:





5 WMAN output power setting





5 WMAN output power setting5.1 Setting the WMAN output power

1. In Equipment view, select a WMAN Board 2. Access to the Board view3. Select the menu Board � Optical power level configuration

The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.4. Set the relevant attenuation value for each selected element5. Click Apply.

Attenuation applied to the selected channelAttenuation - Channel

Offset attenuation applied at the board output.The assigned value includes the offset attenuation defined in the previous parameter.

Attenuation – Line OutputDescriptionParameters

Attenuation applied to the selected channelAttenuation - Channel

Offset attenuation applied to any channel going through the given Express port.

Attenuation – Wavelength Selective Switch input

DescriptionParameters

WMAN1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters

WMAN3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters





5 WMAN output power setting5.2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation

Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN1100:





5 WMAN output power setting5.3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power

Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN3174:





6 Spectrum acquisition operation





6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder)

� On G652 fiber in extended C-band

BAND1 BAND4 BAND12

OSC

… BAND6 …BAND5 BAND11

195.90

0 TH

z

1510

nm

ALC

191.15

0 TH

zCh

11.5

BAND10

1530

.33

nm

1568

.57

nm

191.95

0 TH

zCh

19.5

8 Ch

Submarine

Terrestrial19

4.00

0 TH

z

Ch59

.0

The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing plan (from 1530.33nm up to 1568.57nm). This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH application (96 channels). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7, 8, 6, 4, 9, 3, 2,10, 1,11, 12 and 5 (ALCT removed).

The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band”channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm.





6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.2 Introduction � From 1626 LM R5.0 a new graphical facility « Spectrum acquisition » has been designed to facilitate the checks of Operation and Maintenance activities. It is available for WMAN boards.� It provides the inventory of the wavelengths and their power level for a given WMAN board access (input and output).





6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.3 Getting started� From the equipment view operate as follow:1. Select a board (WMAN1100 or WMAN3174) and open the board view2. Select the menu Board � Spectrum Acquisition

- The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed:

•Place the mouse on a given wavelength then the related information

Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window.The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application.- In this particular case, only Output monitoring is enabled.- The Input 1 monitoring could be enabled as well.

WMAN 3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC OSC



Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

Output

Input1





6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application

� ROADM (WB based) overview (reminder)ROADM

BM

DX

1x00

OA

DC

1102

WMAN1100

OA

DC

1102


CM

DX

1

CM

DX

1

WMAN1100

BM

DX

1x00

Band 1

CM

DX

12

CM

DX

12Band 12

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA

1 VOA 2

2 1VOA





6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.]

Here above the ROADM configuration.






6 Spectrum acquisition operation6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.]


As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page), it is therefore the only one present at the output.





Notes Page






How to Do it

� Determine the way to approximate the opticalattenuation introduced by an externalmonitoring point on a board


1. Connect a photometer to the external monitoring point2. Measure the power and note it (P1)3. Use the “current instantaneous measurement” menu option to get the internal measurement and note it (P2)

4. Calculate optical attenuation of the corresponding monitoring point : Att (dB) = P2 – P1





Determine the optical attenuation introducedby external monitoring points on the following boards(if present) :

� LOFA11yz� TRBD11y1� CMDX1010� BMDX1x00� OMDXw100_y_z

Exercise 1





1. Select a TRBD and note the output power from the “Optical power level configuration” menu

2. Connect an OPM to the “VOA” output point of corresponding TRBD and note the power

3. Decrease the output power of 2dB4. Observe the power decrease on OPM and from the

“current instantaneous measurements” menu5. Increase the output power of 1dB6. Observe the power increase in the same way7. Set the output power of TRBD to its initial value

Exercise 2

Pi + 1dB

Pi - 2dB

Initial output power = Pi

Delta(1) – (2)

(dB)

Measurement from OPM : (2)

(dBm)

Measurement from CT: (1)

(dBm)





Notes Page






End of ModuleOptical Power Tuning





Module 1Performance Monitoring


Section 3NE Maintenance






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Maintenance � Performance Monitoring3 � 1 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Monitor the signal transmission quality in line





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Introduction 71.1 Performance Monitoring overview 81.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12 91.3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards 101.4 Supported performance monitoring points 111.5 Supported performance monitoring counters 12

2 Performance threshold tables management 152.1 Displaying a performance threshold table 162.2 Modifying a performance threshold table 17

3 Performance Monitoring configuration 193.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP 203.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP 213.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP 22

4 Performance data display 234.1 Displaying current data 244.2 Displaying history data 254.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data 264.4 Displaying Q factor margin 28





1 Introduction





1 Introduction1.1 Performance Monitoring overview� Performance Monitoring provides the operator with the ability to

monitor the quality of the signal flowing through the WDM network.� Selected PM points at the network boundary have to be started.� Two granularity periods are available: 15 minutes and 24 hours.

� The Operator can analyze the « Current data » and the « Historical data ».� These data are based on counters.

� A set of counters is dedicated to a given layer (SDH, FEC and Ethernet layer1 and 2).� PM Threshold tables are assigned to the performance points.� When a given threshold is crossed, a TCA alarm is raised.

TCA: Threshold Crossed Alarm





1 Introduction1.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12

� The monitored layers on TRBD11y1 board can be:- FEC at 10Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors, Uncorrected Blocks).- SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and specific ETSI processing.

� The monitored layers on TRBD4x12 board can be:- FEC at 40Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors, Uncorrected Blocks).- SDH 40G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 40G overhead and specific ETSI processing.

� The monitored layers on TRBC1111 board can be:- FEC at 10Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors, Uncorrected Blocks).- SDH 2.5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2.5G overhead and specific ETSI processing.

� The monitored layers on TRBC4x12 board can be:- FEC at 40Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors, Uncorrected Blocks).- SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and specific ETSI processing.





1 Introduction1.3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards

2xGBE_FC 2xGBE_FC

� The monitored layers on 2xGBE_FC can be:- Layer 1 GbE PM (client side), based on 8B/10B coding (either on GbE or FC signals).- SDH 2.5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2.5G overhead and specific ETSI processing.

� The monitored layers on ETHC1000 board can be:- Layer 1 GbE PM (client side), based on 8B/10B coding.- SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and specific ETSI processing.

- Layer 2 PM





1 Introduction1.4 Supported performance monitoring points

ETHC1000Near end ingress Layer 2 PM

TRBD4x12Near end ingress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256)

TRBD4x12Near end egress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256)

TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12Near end egress FEC PM at 40 Gbps

ETHC1000Near end egress Layer 2 PM

2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000Near end ingress Layer 1 GbE PMTRBD1191, only if 10GbE LANNear end ingress layer 1 10 GbE PMTRBD1191, only if 10GbE LANNear end egress layer 1 10 GbE PMTRBC1111Near end ingress B1 PM at 2.5 Gbps (STM-16)TRBC1111 and 2xGBE_FCNear end egress B1 PM at 2.5 Gbps (STM-16)

TRBD11y1, TRBC4x12Near end ingress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64)

TRBD11y1, TRBC4x12 and ETHC1000Near end egress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64)

TRBC1111 and TRBD11y1Near end egress FEC PM at 10 Gbps1626 LM ETSIPM points

� Monitored “side” can be:- Egress if monitoring is performed on information received from WDM side (WDM -> BW).- Ingress if monitoring is performed on information received from B&W side (B&W -> WDM).





1 Introduction1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters

XXXXEthernet layer 1 at 1.25 Gbps (GbE) or 10.3125 Gbps (10GbE LAN)

XXXXXFEC layer at 10 Gbps or 40 Gbps

XXXXSDH-RS layer at2.5 Gbps or 10 Gbps or 40 Gbps

SUSBBUSCSBECBBESESESUASLayers \ Counters

� UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES (or SUS) events have been detected. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time. The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds. A reset is done at the end of each period. ES, SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time.� ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one B1 code violation or with at least one RS defect.� SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 2400 (approximately > 30%) B1 code violation, or at least one RS defect. A SES is also counted as an ES. � BBE (Background Block Error): Count of B1 code violations that do occur out of a SES.

� BEC (Background Error Corrected): count of FEC corrected errors that occurred outside a SCS (result is divided by 512). � SCS (Severely Corrected Seconds): count of seconds with a FEC layer defect or at least one FEC uncorrected block or more than 33 538 048 FEC corrected errors (this corresponds to a rate of FEC corrected errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3). � BBU (Background Block Uncorrected): count of FEC uncorrected blocks that occurred outside a SUS. � SUS (Severely Uncorrected Seconds): count of seconds in which a FEC layer defect occurred or in which more than 33 538 048 FEC blocks were uncorrected (this corresponds to a rate of FEC corrected errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3).

� UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES (or SUS) events have been detected. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time. The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds. A reset is done at the end of each period. ES, SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time.� ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet 1Gb/s, one HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10Gb/s or with at least one Ethernet defect.� SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 10000 ICG for Ethernet 1Gb/s, more than 255 HCV for Ethernet 10Gb/s or at least one Ethernet. A SES is also counted as an ES. � BBE (Background Block Error): Count of ICG that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 1Gb/s, count of HCV that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 10Gb/s.

SDH-RS Layer

FEC Layer

Ethernet Layer 1





1 Introduction1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters [cont.]

Total Dropped FramesTDFTotal Transmitted OctetsTTOTotal Transmitted FramesTTFTotal Received Service errored FramesTRSEFTotal Received Correct OctetsTRCOTotal Received Correct FramesTRCFMeaningCounter

Ethernet layer 2 counters

� TRCF: Total Received Correct FramesTRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port.TRCF sums the number of received unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.� TRCO: Total Received Correct OctetsTRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.� TRSEF: Total Received Service Errored FramesTRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port.� TTF: Total Transmitted FramesTTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port.TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.� TTO: Total Transmitted OctetsTTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.� TDF: Total Dropped FramesTDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port.

Ethernet Layer 2





Notes Page






2 Performance threshold tables management





2 Performance threshold tables management2.1 Displaying a performance threshold table

1. In Equipment view, choose Configuration �Performance � Threshold Tables… menu option

2. In the PM Threshold Table Select window, select one table

3. Click on Display…

Default tables





2 Performance threshold tables management2.2 Modifying a performance threshold table

� Define new value for alarm clearingthreshold

� Define new value for alarm raisingthreshold

� Define Severity for TCA

� Apply

For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager.

The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list. The user can display and modify such tables.

Different thresholds can be assigned for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours.

The TCA only reports the value of the counter which has crossed the threshold, it does not provide a complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. The user can retrieve this information from a dialog box.

The system behavior concerning the clearance of 15 min. and 24 h TCAs differs: � 15 min. (explicit clearance): A TCA is only indicated once in the alarm manager, even if the same threshold is crossed several times a day. TCAs are automatically cleared by the system after one 15 min. interval for which the counter was below the TCA low threshold.

� 24 h (implicit clearance): A TCA is indicated for each interval in which the related threshold has been crossed. The system implicitly clears TCAs, at the end of the 24 hours (midnight).

For all periods, stopping a PM causes related TCA clearance.





Notes Page






3 Performance Monitoring configuration





3 Performance monitoring configuration3.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP

� In Equipment view, select one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12 or 2xGBE_FC)

1. Access to the Transmission view2. Select the relevant TP (see below)3. Choose Transmission � Trail

Monitor � Create or Deletemenu option

� A Trail Monitor block appears or disappears beside the selected TP

� Reminder for Trail Monitor creation:

� Deleting a TM stops automatically all PM running on corresponding block.

SDH-RSPort#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBC4x12)

SDH-RSPort#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12)

Ethernet 1Gbits/secPort#x-OCH (X=1 to 2) (2xGBE_FC)

SDH-RSPort#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU1 (TRBC1111)

SDH-RSPort#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1)to start PM on … layersYou can create a TM on transmission blocks on …





3 Performance monitoring configuration 3.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP� In Equipment view, select

one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000)

1. Access to the Transmission view and select the relevant TP (see below)

2. Choose the Transmission � Performance �Configure Performance Monitoring menu option (PM Configuration window appears) and operate as shown :

6. Click Apply to confirm

� Select a counting period

� Tick to start PM

� Keep or set the Threshold Table configuration

� Reminder to start PM on a given monitoring point:

Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12)ETHC1000

Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or Port#101-ODU2TRBC4x12

Port#13-RsTTPETHC1000

Port#x-OCH (X=1 to 2)2xGBE_FCEthernet 1 Gb/s L1

Port#101-OCHTRBD11y1 or TRBD4x12 or TRBC1111 or TRBC4x12FEC

Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or Port#101-ODU1TRBC1111

Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU3TRBD4x12

Port#1-OCHTRBD1191Ethernet 10 Gb/s L1

Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12) or Port#13-RSTTPETHC1000Ethernet L2

Port#6-RsTTP2xGBE_FC

Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU2TRBD11y1

SDH / RS

Select …in a … boardTo start PM on …





3 Performance monitoring configuration 3.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP� In Equipment view, select

one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000).

1. Access to the Transmission view and select the relevant TP (see below)

2. Choose the Transmission � Performance �Configure Performance Monitoring menu option (PM Configuration window appears) and operate as shown :

6. Click Apply to confirm.

� Select a counting period

� Untick to stop PM





4 Performance data display





4 Performance data display4.1 Displaying current data� In Equipment view, select

one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000)

1. Access to the Transmission view and select the relevant TP

2. Choose the Transmission � Performance �Display Current Data menu option

Example for SDH or Ethernet L1 PM

Administrative State : indicates whether the PM data collection is locked or unlocked. “Locked” means that historical PM still remains available when PM is stopped.

Operational State : indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled.

Suspect Data : indicates if during the current period, a data collection problem occurred (« Yes » or « No ») leading to an incomplete or invalid counting period. It can be due to a PM counters reset action, a NE reset…

Threshold Table : indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity.

Current Problem List : indicates if counter value thresholds have been crossed during the current period.

Elapsed Time : indicates the time which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started.

To set to zero all counters in current period, click on Reset.

To update the counter values, click on Refresh. Refresh action is only available on operator request. Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 Refresh actions.

As soon as Performance Monitoring is started, current PM data are collected.





4 Performance data display 4.2 Displaying history data� From the Transmission view, select the relevant TP and choose the

Transmission � Performance � Display History Data menu option

To update the counter values, click on Refresh.

User can have access up to the 16 previous 15-minutes periods and the previous 24H period.





4 Performance data display4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data� To display the Ethernet L2

counters values in “PM Current Data” window , operate as previously described selecting « 15 min L2 » tab

Example for Ethernet L2 PM





4 Performance data display4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data [cont.]� To display « Ethernet Maintenance data” operate as follow: 1. Select the relevant TP then Transmission � Performance �

Display Maintenance Counters2. Operate as follow:

� Select the number of retries

� Select the polling time � Launch the polling

This facility on 1320CT is available only when the Local Access is granted.

The polling time possibilities are: 5, 10, 30 and 60 seconds.

The displayed counter values are the difference between the current and the previous ones.





4 Performance data display 4.4 Displaying Q factor margin� From the Equipment view, choose the Diagnosis � Counters menu option and operate as follow:

� Select OTS

� Tick counters you want to display� Apply

� Based on FEC decoding, Q factor is calculated from measured Bit Error Rate every 5s and 30s.- In fact, user has access to the margin on Q factor (or “channel margin”). This relative value is given comparing the “received” Q factor with the minimum Q factor value resulting in a 10-13 BER after FEC correction.

Not Valid





� Display the threshold table #3� Modify ES counter settings in threshold table #3

� Set the “value up” threshold at 10 (instead of 50)� Change “Warning” severity to major

� Connect an SDH analyzer on this Transponder and start measurement� Configure a PM on one transponder� Insert errors from SDH analyzer to crossover ES threshold� Check alarms on TM block � Display current PM data� After two periods of 15 minutes, display historical PM data and check alarms clearing

� Stop PM and delete TM� Set back the table#3 ES threshold to its initial value

Exercise

TRBD Line output

Line input

VOA

SDH

ANALYSER

Optional

Pad

B&W WDM

1620LM





Module Summary

� Performance Monitoring applies to� SDH Regeneration Section based on B1� OCH trail based on FEC� Ethernet layer 1 and L2 (ETHC1000 only)

� Counting periods are 15 minutes for Ethernet Layer 2, 15 minutes and 24H for SDH, FEC and Ethernet Layer 1� Alarms may be raised if threshold tables are attached to PM

� “Value up” threshold to raise alarms� “Value down” threshold to clear alarms

� Threshold Tables to attach can be “by default” or user specific� Performance reports

� Current counters� Historical counters� Maintenance data for Ethernet L2� Channel margin





End of ModulePerformance Monitoring





Module 2Alarms Handling








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Maintenance � Alarms Handling3 � 2 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Handle the alarms raised by the NE





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Alarms threshold configuration 71.1 Introduction 81.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table 91.3 Creating an alarm threshold table 101.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table 111.5 Assigning an alarm threshold table 121.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table 131.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management 14

2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 172.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view 182.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view 212.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view 242.4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder 252.5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel 262.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel 282.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder 322.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel 332.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel 352.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view 382.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view 392.12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view 402.13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view 412.14 Network view situation – Example 1 422.15 Network view situation – Example 2 432.16 Network view situation – Example 3 44

3 Automatic Power Shutdown 453.1 Overview 463.2 Laser class 473.3 Risks 483.4 Laser safety labels 493.5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process 503.6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status 513.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process 523.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status 533.9 APSD management for LOFA boards 543.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board 553.11 APSD management for TRBx, 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards 563.12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration 573.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1 583.14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2 59






Switch to notes view! Page





1 Alarms threshold configuration





1 Alarms threshold configuration1.1 Introduction

� An alarm threshold defines triggering points of for alarms such as:� IPL (Input Power loss)� LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)� OPL (Output Power Loss)� IPD (Input Power Degradation)

� Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards:� Transponders, CMDX, BMDX, OMDX and LOFA� OADC, OCNC, TDMX and WMAN

� Each of the above boards are assigned with a default threshold table which holds the alarm threshold values at port level for IPL, LOMS, OPL, IPD alarms.� Customized tables can be created and then assigned to one or more board

The default threshold tables cannot be modified.





1 Alarms threshold configuration1.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table� From a Board view (e.g.

LOFA11yz)1. Choose the Board �

Alarm threshold configuration menu option

2. In the Threshold table list, select one table and click on View

3. Click on Cancel to close the dialog box

4. Back to the Alarm Threshold Configurationdialog box, click on Close to finish.

- Some examples are shown below:

BMDX

CMDX

OMDX

LOFA





1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.3 Creating an alarm threshold table

1. In Equipment view, select one board such as LOFA11yz2. Access to the Board view3. Choose the Board � Alarm threshold configuration menu option4. In the Threshold table list, select one existing table5. Click on Clone6. In the Table name field, define the name of the new table7. In the Threshold fields, define the new value for each threshold8. Click on Clone to create the new table9. Select the new table in Alarm threshold configuration window 10. Click on Apply to assign the new table to the board types that are

displayed in Board type area11. Click on Close to finish.

Up to 14 alarm threshold tables can be created in the 1626 LM.





1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table

1. In Equipment view, select one LOFA11yz board2. Access to the Board view3. Choose the Board � Alarm threshold configuration menu option4. In the Threshold table list, select the table to modify5. Click on Modify6. In the Threshold fields, define the new value for each threshold7. Click on Modify to modify the table and close the dialog box8. Click on Close to finish.

The default table and the current table cannot be modified.





1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.5 Assigning an alarm threshold table

� From a Board view (e.g. LOFA11yz)

1. Choose the Board �Alarm threshold configuration menu option

2. In the Threshold table list, select the table to assign

3. Click on Apply to confirm4. Close the window.





1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table

1. In Equipment view, select one LOFA11yz board2. Access to the Board view3. Choose the Board � Alarm threshold configuration menu option4. In the Threshold table list, select the table to delete5. Click on Delete6. Click on Delete to delete the threshold table and close the dialog box 7. Click on Close to finish.

WARNING : The default table and current table cannot be deleted.





1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management1. For a given Transponder supporting FUE alarm (such as TRBD1191), open

the board view and then the Alarm threshold configuration window:

2. Select the current Alarm threshod table then View3. Get or modify FUE threshold at the bottom of the window4. Confirm if needed with Confirm

FUE : FEC Uncorrected Errors

The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in all 10Gbs TRBx of the 1626 LM) is 1020 bits. During one second there are 10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks.

A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5; this alarm is raised if the UE count overcomes a defined threshold in an observation window of 1s.

The FUE default threshold value is 10499451, which corresponds to no alarm in default state.





Exercise

� Select a LOFA11yz board� Display the default alarm threshold table� Create a new table and modify the thresholds� Assign it to the board� Assign again the default alarm threshold table to the board� Delete your threshold table

Time allowed :______ minutes





Notes Page






2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view

193550

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010 2 1

Band 6

194150

Band 5

VOA

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

193650LT

TRBD11y1 Transmission view

Port#1-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 User side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#1-OCH:� LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the client network.

Port#1-OCH_TM:� SSF: Server Signal Failure - Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. � LBER: Low Bit Error Rate - The SDH signal is degraded. 10E-6 LBER threshold is reached or exceeded.� AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.� TIM: Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.� PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.]

193550

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

OSCU1010 2 1

Band 6VOA

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

193650LT


LOFA11y0_R

194150

Band 5

Port#101-ODU2:� LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.� SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. � otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.� PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.

Port#101-OTU:� otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment.

Port#101-OCH:� LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). � LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded. � PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.

Port#101-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be

an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.]

193550

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010 2 1

Band 6

194150

Band 5

VOA

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

193650LT

From TRBD11y1 Transmission view

5

Port#102-OGPI:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost for the MUX/DEMUX. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#1-#193550-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.





193650

2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view

193550

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

Band 6

194150

ClientNE

1 2

12

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010 2 1

VOA

VOA

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

TRBC1111 Transmission view

LT

Band 5

Port#1-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 User side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.


Port#1-ODU1:� LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. � AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.� SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.





193650

2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont.]

TRBC1111 Transmission view

193550

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

193700BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010 2 1

Band 6

194150

Band 5

VOA

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

LT




Port#101-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 WDM side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.





193650

2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont.]

193550

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010 2 1

Band 6

194150

Band 5

VOA

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

ClientNE

TRBC1111

From TRBC1111 Transmission view

6

LT


Port#1-#193550-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view

1 2

CMDX1010

TRBD1191

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

2 1

Band 6

194150

VOA

ClientNE

Line Terminal

193650ClientNE

TRBC1111

193550

LT

12

LOFA11y0_R

OSCU1010

VOA

Band 5

LOFA11y0 Transmission view

Port#1-OTS:� LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side� LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side� LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists)

� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

� CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure - LAPD configuration problem.� otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.

Port#1-OMS_A:� LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received.

� DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section - Alarm not yet available.

Port#1-OMS:� SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.

� AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder

TR-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT

D

D

M

M



Up to 96λ

Up to 96λ

Up to 96λ

Up to 96λ

OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230

OADC0104

ALCT

D M

Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

Channel 31,5 : Express channelOTS 1 OTS 2






� DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available..



Port#1-#193150-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.5 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_Express channel [cont.]

OSC OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCTDM

Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ

OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

Channel 31,5 : Express channel

LOFA11y0_Unidir













2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC


OADC0104

ALCT

D M

Up to80λ

Up to 80λ

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2

Channel 34 : AddDrop channelOTS 1 OTS 2














2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.6 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel [cont.]

TR-OADM

D

OADC1100

TDMX1180

OADC1300

Up to 96λ



1:2

1:8 De-multiplexingpart

TRBD

193400

ClientNE

Port#1-#193400-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.

� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#2-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TDMX1180 channel port side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#101-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.






TR-OADM

D

OADC1100

TDMX1180

OADC1300

Up to 96λ



1:2

1:8 De-multiplexingpart

TRBD

193400

ClientNE


-Port#101-ODU2:� LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.� SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. � otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.� PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.



Port#101-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.







TR-OADM

M

WMAN3174

4:1 4:1


Multiplexingpart

TRBD

193400

ClientNE







4 1626 LM NE type configurations 2.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder

R-OADM

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OCNC1230OADC0104

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCT

ALCT



OTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA

1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2


Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12


Express

ADDL

OF

A1110

1V

OA

2

VO

A1

2

CM

DX

1C

MD

X 12



LO

FA

1110


� WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node;� Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.

� This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM, such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.

� The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channelChannel 29 : Express channelOTS 1 OTS 2


WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC


OADC0104

ALCT


1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

1

VO

A1

2LO

FA

1110

OSC












2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel [cont.]Channel 29 : Express channel

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

WMAN3174

OADC0104OCNC1230

ALCTOTS 1 OTS 2

2 1VOA2 1VOA


BM

DX

1000Express

ADD

LO

FA

1110

1V

OA

2

CM

DX

1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8)

Port#1-#192900-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.

� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.



� CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure - LAPD configuration problem.� otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.









2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channelOTS 1

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC

OCNC1230Up to 96λ at 10Gb/sUp to 80λ at 40Gb/s

1 VOA 2Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

VO

A1

2LO

FA

1110TRBD1191

ClientNE 193450


Channel 34,5 : AddDrop channel








2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont.]OTS 1

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC


1 VOA 2Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

VO

A1

2LO

FA

1110TRBD1191

ClientNE 193450










2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont.]OTS 1

WMAN3174

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OSC


1 VOA 2Express

ADD

BM

DX

1000

CM

DX

VO

A1

2LO

FA

1110TRBD1191

ClientNE 193450



Port#1-#193450-OMSoch:� LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.

Port#1-OTS:� LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side� LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side� LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. � CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure - LAPD configuration problem.� otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.

Port#1-OMS_A:� LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. � DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.

Port#1-OMS:� SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. � AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view

TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view

TRBD4x12_UNI Transmission view



Port#101-OTU:� otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. Wrong configuration of OUT section.� URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#101-OCH:� LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). � LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.� FUE: Fec Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded. � PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.

Port#101-OGPI:� LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. � URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Equipment failure (RUP, RUM, RUTM) detected on TRBD board.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view

LR

LOFA11y0_Unidir

LOFA11y0_Unidir

VOA

VOA

1

1

2

2

OSC

OSC

OSC

OSC

To/from WDM line

To/from WDM line






� DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view

VirtualConcatenation

VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v

GFP-T#1 #2

Mapping

#1 GE or FC #2 GE or FC

Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48(Bridge & Switch)

User side *

2xGBE_FC board

SFPLine #1

SFPLine #2

Not used in 1626 LM R5.0 Front side

Front side





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view

ETHC1000 board


VLAN tagging#xx #yy

#1 GE #12 GE

Matrix

User side *

10GE WAN Line P#13

Line #1

10GE WAN XFP P#13

Line #2

10GE WAN Line P#14

10GE WAN XFP P#14


Back planeaccess





2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting2.14 Network view situation – Example 1

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

VOA

VOA

ClientNE

LOFA11y0_R

LOFA11y0_T

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

1 2VOA

12VOA

OTS Physical

connection

OMS Trail

3 - SD

3 - SD 4 - SD4 - SD

4 - SD4 - SDODU2 Trail

ClientNE

LOS (port#1-OTS)1IPL (1st stage input) (minimum attenuation reached)

2 SSF (port#1-OMS)5 SSF (port#101-ODU2)6

LOS (port#1-OTS)1IPL (1st stage input) (minimum attenuation reached)

2SSF (port#1-OMS)5SSF (port#101-ODU2)6

IPL: Input Power Loss.COCE: Configuration Or Customization Error.SSF: Server Signal Failure.LOS: Loss Of Signal.






1 2

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

VOA

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

1 2

LOFA11y0_R

VOA

LOFA11y0_T

OTS Physical connection

ODU2 Trail

OpSPhysical

connection

LOS (port#1-OGPI)AIS (port#101-ODU2)

IPL (client input)

ClientNE

ClientNE

1 2 3

12

LOFA11y0_R

VOA12

VOA

IPL: Input Power Loss.AIS: Alarm Indication Signal.LOS: Loss Of Signal.






1 2

12

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

LOFA11y0_T

LOFA11y0_R

VOA

VOA

CMDX1010

TRBD1111

BMDX1000

ALCT1010

1 2

LOFA11y0_R

VOA

12

LOFA11y0_T

VOA

OTS Physical connection

OpSPhysical

connection

LOS (port#10x-OGPI)

ClientNE

ClientNE

1 IPL (mux input x)2

IPL: Input Power Loss.LOS: Loss Of Signal.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown





� What : Safety procedure � Why : Human eye damage risk in case of fibre break due to high

power outgoing the device (≈ 23dBm)� Where : On LOFA

� Two cases : Line with and without OADM� How : Automatic laser pump shutdown when LOS detected

3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.1 Overview

The APSD complies with IEC 60825 1 & 2 and ITU-T G.664 recommendations. - For more details, refer to the relevant « Technical handbook » such as 3AL 75138 EAAA Ed1.

Optical safety: general rulesOn handling optical equipment or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.

DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules:

1. Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present.

2. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

3. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

4. All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.

5. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.

6. Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

7. Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical links between the transmitter and the receiver.

8. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.2 Laser class

� The International Electro technical Commission IEC825:� Gives the safety recommendations.� Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.

Wavelength (nm)

Power (mW)

Class 1Class 2

Class 3AClass 3B

Class 4

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

0.1

0.0010.01

110100

1000

� Telecom laser domainClass

1 3A 3B 4271710

(500)(50)(10)27159.5

(500)(32)(10)27+2.5-4

(500)(2)(0.4)

dBm(mW)dBm(mW)dBm(mW)

1550nm

1300nm

850nm





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.3 Risks

No hazard if used in normal conditions*.* If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam.

Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm.

No hazard if used in normal conditions, except if you use optical appliances (binoculars, microscope, monocular, etc.).Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam.

Hazard for eye and skin, fire risk.Class 4

Class 3B

Class 3A

Class 2

Class 1

dBm DefinitiondBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). It is an abbreviation for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt.

dBm is different from dB. dBm represents absolute power, whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is used to represent gain or attenuation. For example, 3 dBm means 2 mW, and 3 dB means a gain of 2. Similarly, -3 dBm means 0.5 mW, whereas -3 dB means attenuation of 2.

The formula to calculate dBm from mW is:dBm = 10 log10( P )

1mW





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.4 Laser safety labels

� Indications given on panels and safety interlockers:

Optical Safety compliance with European NormsCompliancy to Optical Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfiesstandardized Norms:• EN 60825-1 ed.1994 + A11 ed.1996 + A2 ed.2001• IEC 60825-1 ed.1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999)• EN 60825-2 ed.2000• IEC 60825-2 ed.2000

Hazard Level classification and standardsThe classification refers to the IEC 60825 Standard (with amendments 1 & 2).This recommendation defines 4 HAZARD LEVELs for optical fiber applications in thirdwindow (1500 - 1800 nm):• HAZARD LEVEL 1, for optical power below +10mW (10dBm)• HAZARD LEVEL 1M, for optical power in [10mW; 136mW] (10dBm to 21,3dBm)• HAZARD LEVEL 3B, for optical power in [136mW; 500mW] (21,3dBm to 27dBm)• HAZARD LEVEL 4, for optical power higher than 500mW (>27dBm).

G.664 standard defines the optical safety mechanisms:• Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): Procedure to automatically shutdown the outputpower of laser transmitters and to avoid exposure to hazardous levels• Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD): Procedure to automatically shutdown the outputpower of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process

LT1

LOFA_T_11 2

LOFA_R_112 11

Repeater

LOFA_W_E3 4

LOFA_E_W10 9

LT2

LOFA_R_25 6

LOFA_T_28 7

Section 1 Section 2

No signal

SD SD

No signal

SD SD

After the fiber cut in section 1, first stage of LOFA_W_E detects a LOS. As a consequence, this LOFA shuts down his first stage and then sends a shutdown command to the opposite LOFA (LOFA_E_W) through the back panel. Because there is no amplification anymore in Repeater towards the LT1, the signal received at LOFA_R_1 becomes very low (attenuated by sections 1 and 2). This very low level is considered as a LOS. Therefore, LOFA_R_1 acts as LOFA_W_E, shutting down his first stage and sending also a shutdown command to opposite LOFA (LOFA_T_1).





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status

LT1

LOFA_T_11 2

LOFA_R_112 11

Repeater

LOFA_W_E3 4

LOFA_E_W10 9

LT2

LOFA_R_25 6

LOFA_T_28 7

Section 1 Section 2

No signal

SD SD

No traffic

SD SD

LOS

LOMS

No trafficLOMS

At the LOFA_W_E input, Optical Supervisory Channel and WDM channels are not detected because of the fibre cut in Section 1, causing the LOS alarm. At the LOFA_R_2 input, Optical Supervisory Channel and some power (noise) in the WDM window are detected, explaining the absence of LOS alarm but LOMS is raised.

At the LOFA_R_1 input, power corresponding to the WDM window is below the acceptable level, because of the total shutdown of LOFA_E_W. Nevertheless, Optical Supervisory Channel is not impacted, being independent on amplification. As a consequence, LOFA_R_1 raises a LOMS alarm.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process

LT1

LOFA_T_11 2

LOFA_R_116 15

OADM

LOFA_R_W3 4

LOFA_T_W14 13

LT2

LOFA_R_27 8

LOFA_T_210 9

Section 1 Section 2

No signal

SD SD

No signal

SD SD

LOFA_T_E5 6

LOFA_R_E12 11

In case of OADM, APSD will work in the way and will result in the same situation after a fibre cut occurring in section 1.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status

LT1

LOFA_T_11 2

LOFA_R_116 15

OADM

LOFA_R_W3 4

LOFA_T_W14 13

LT2

LOFA_R_27 8

LOFA_T_210 9

Section 1 Section 2

No signal

SD SD

No Traffic

SD SD

LOFA_T_E5 6

LOFA_R_E12 11

LOMS

LOS SSFon TRBx for all

pass-through channels

At the LOFA_R_2 input, we receive the added channels in OADM going through LOFA_T_E and the Optical Supervisory Channel. Assuming that the multiplex power is higher than the Degraded level, there is no alarm on this LOFA_R_2. Though channels coming from LT1 going to LT2 are lost in section 1, resulting in LOW alarms in all corresponding transponders of LT2.

Because of LOFA_T_W total shutdown, there is no acceptable WDM signal power anymore detected at the LOFA_R_1 input, the Optical Supervisory Channel being the only one signal detected, hence the LOMS alarm on LOFA_R_1.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.9 APSD management for LOFA boards

� To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow from the board view:1. Select Board � APSD configuration…2. Select a LOFA stage then Configuration3. Modify the configuration if needed4. Clik OK to confirm or close





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board

� To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow from the board view:1. Select Board � APSD configuration…2. Modify the configuration if needed3. Click OK to confirm or close

The control board in EMPM1000 includes logical control of laser shutdown command. It polls the signal on backplane (GEN_APSD, LOS_2MBPS, BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration (enabling signals) generates the shutdown commands. A Software shutdown command is also available.

The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the 1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions), the APSD functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.11 APSD management for TRBx, 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards� To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow:1.Open the Transmission view of the board2.Select the OGPI block3.Select Transmission � APSD configuration…4.Modify the configuration if needed:- Disable or Laser Forced Off

5.Clik OK to confirm or close

This APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration

� To get and modify the TRBD/TRBC shutdown criteria, operate as follow:1. Open the Transmission

view of the board2. Select the port#x-OGPI

(User side)3. Select Transmission �

Shutdown criteria configuration

4. Identify the current configuration and / or modify if needed

5. Clik OK to confirm or closeNot available on TRBD1131

TRANSPARENT- The signal flows without any change.

SHUTDOWN- If one of the corresponding alarms is raised, the client/user side laser is shutdown.

AIS- AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) is inserted toward client/user side.

- Defines the resultant consequence on the signal if one of the incoming alarm is raised.

Action

Radio button: Off- The associated Incoming Alarms / action is not selected

Radio button: On- The associated Incoming Alarms / Action is selected- By default the first group is selected

-A group of specific WDM incoming alarms that can be raised from the transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD boards.- For each group of alarms corresponds a set of 3 associated actions

Incoming alarmsPossible valuesDescriptionParameters





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1

TRBDUser WDM

GEN_AIS





The generic AIS [STM-AIS] is a new maintenance signal at STM-N level� a continuous repeating 2047-bit PN-11 (1 + x9 + x11) sequence

In existing SDH equipment, the generic AIS is detected as a STM-LOF.





3 Automatic Power Shutdown3.14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2

TRBDUser WDM

SD









Discover

� After Trainer has generated various faults on the training equipment (fiber disconnection, board removal, wrong trace identifier,…), identify the corresponding alarms raised by the NE

Give an explanation for each resulting alarm

Time allowed :______ minutes





End of ModuleAlarms Handling





Module 3Boards Replacement








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceNE Maintenance � Boards Replacement3 � 3 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Replace any board, belonging to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A, respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate procedure





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Board handling 71.1 Tools 81.2 Board extraction 91.3 Board insertion 10

2 Board replacement procedures 132.1 Overview 142.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board 152.3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board 162.4 Replacing a PSUP unit 17





1 Board handling





1 Board handling1.1 Tools

Electrostatic discharge cable

For SFP modules�

�

� For boards without levers

Tool � : any time you handle a board, you should use the electrostatic discharge cable, this one being connected to the rack earth, to avoid any damage due to potential electrical discharge from your body into the board.

Tool � : this metallic rod must be used to extract boards without levers such as RAIU, PSUP…Normally, this tool is located at the rear of each shelf cover.

Tool � : this tool must be used to remove / insert SFP modules from/ in 2xGE_FC or ETHC1000 boards.

XFP modules do not need any tool to be removed / inserted. They are equipped with a built-in lever.





1 Board handling1.2 Board extraction� Use the electrostatic discharge cable� Verify that each optical fiber is labeled� Disconnect cables on the board faceplate

� Use caps on optical fibers to avoid dust exposure

� Remove screws fixing the board to the shelf� Extract the board

or





1 Board handling1.3 Board insertion

� Use the electrostatic discharge cable� Pre-set the board by aligning this one in the orange rail

� Open the levers� Push the board on the front panel and check at the end that levers (if present) are pre-set





Before connecting fibre to the board, make sure there is no dust on optical connector, using a scope. Clean until there is no dust spot anymore on the optical surface

1 Board handling1.3 Board insertion [cont.]

� Close the levers (if present) to

complete board insertion

� Screw the board to the shelf

� Reconnect cables on the board

Forbidden operations for unit insertion :� Do not push just on one lever only� Do not force the units� Avoid impact during board handling� Avoid impact on adjacent boards during board insertion





Notes Page






2 Board replacement procedures





� Use the same board type� Refer to the Part Number

� No need to reconfigure the slot� Software and slot configuration

automatically downloaded

2 Procedures2.1 Overview

� Master ESCT card and Mass Memory� ON/OFF dip switches on board� MIB Restore/Activate� Software download

� PSUP� TRU –48V power switch

� Other boards� No specific procedure

Most of the boards in 1626LM do not need any specific procedure to be replaced. Operators just have to follow the safety rules regarding the board handling (see previous chapter) .

Furthermore, there is no need of slot reconfiguration and software download. This will be done automatically by the EC function through SC function.

In the case of a Master ESCT2000 / Mass Memory or PSUP1000 replacement, Operators should follow a specific procedure (see after).





2 Board replacement procedures2.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board

Does the Mass Memory work properly ?

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf

Remove the Mass Memory from the broken ESCT

Put the Mass Memory on the new ESCT2000.Check that dipswitches are set to OFF

Plug the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf

Take a new ESCT2000

Yes

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelfTake a new ESCT2000 with a new Mass

Memory loaded with the same software release

Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON

Plug in the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf

Wait for the communication is restored(EC LED is red, SC LED is green)

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelfSet all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back

Configure Comm./Routing parameters, Restore a NE backup and Activate it.

No

Wait for the communication is restored (EC and SC LEDs are green)

Start Supervision and open the Equipment view to check database

The ESCT2000 board located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications and NE data base.

DIP SWITCHES CONFIGURATION :1 ON / 2 OFF : Clear the hardware configuration and the Communication& Routing parameters. EC

communication with any SC is disabled.1 OFF / 2 ON : Clear the hardware configuration and upload Communication & Routing parameters. EC

communication with any SC is disabled.1 ON / 2 ON : In Testing mode, the communication and routing physical database is not backed up on the EEPROM.

EC communication with any SC is disabled. Once the configuration is checked to be convenient for the NE configuration, the DIP SWITCH position should go to the Normal position. This mode is used to check if a configuration is ready to be applied.

1 OFF / 2 OFF : Normal position.

Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) are located both in NE Database (Flash memory) and in an external media (EEPROM).

The NE Database is a logical database which aggregates several physical databases. There is a database for the Hardware Equipment Configuration, the Performance Monitoring, and for Communication and Routing topics.

The EEPROM stores all the necessary data to keep supervision of the NE (communication and routing parameters) even if the physical database is damaged.

The Local Configuration (communication and routing parameters) is duplicated in the physical database for commodity (2 storage areas are dedicated to communication and routing parameters in the physical database).

Actually each time the NE restarts, the content of the Local Configuration of the physical database is backed up and the EEPROM content is erased by this backup.

The Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) in EEPROM is always rewritten by the Local Configuration backed up from the physical database when the NE restarts.

The EEPROM media is used as a persistency reference of the Local Configuration Data.





2 Board replacement procedures 2.3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board

Is there a Mass Memory configured in a Dummy NE with the last NE configuration ?

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf

Remove the Mass Memory from the ESCT

Plug the ESCT2000 in the master shelf

Put the new Mass Memory with the NE configuration, on the ESCT

Yes

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf and remove the Mass Memory

Put a new Mass Memory loaded with the same software release on the ESCT

Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON

Plug in the ESCT2000 in the master shelf

Wait for the communication is restored(EC LED is red, SC LED is green)

Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelfSet all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back

Configure Comm./Routing parameters, Restore a NE backup and Activate it.

No

Wait for the communication is restored (EC and SC LEDs are green)

Start Supervision and open the Equipment view to check database

This blockThis switch





2 Board replacement procedures 2.4 Replacing a PSUP unit

1. Ensure that the second PSUP board is inserted, works properly, has no active alarms and the green LED is lit

2. Turn off the power of the PSUP board to be replaced. Therefore switch off the related circuit breaker in the TRU

3. Disconnect the power cable on the front side4. Plug out the faulty PSUP board and remove it5. Plug in the new PSUP board6. Connect the power cable on the front side7. Turn on the power of the new PSUP board. Therefore switch on the

related circuit breaker in the TRU8. Check that the green LEDs of both PSUP boards are lit

Do not plug out any PSUP boards or disconnect any power cable before switching off the related circuit breaker in the TRU! This can cause a flashover at the PSUP board power connectors or at the backplane pins.





Notes Page






Exercise 1

� Proceed to a PSUP replacement on your NE without completely turning off the corresponding shelf, following the appropriate procedure� Use the installed PSUP as a spare

____ minutes





Exercise 2

� Make a backup of your NE � if not already done

� Connect a SDH tester to one transponder at least and run trafficthrough your NE

� Replace the Flash memory of your NE following the appropriate procedure� Use a spare Flash memory if possible.

� At the end of the procedure, make sure that traffic was not disrupted and NE configuration is compliant with the original one

� Put back the original Flash memory in your NE

______ minutes





End of ModuleBoards Replacement





Module 1SPLM Overview


Section 4SPLM Operation






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceSPLM Operation � SPLM Overview4 � 1 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 SPLM description 71.1 1626 LM management _ Reminder 81.2 Introduction 91.3 SPLM architecture 10

2 Getting started on SPLM workspace 112.1 Getting the workspace 122.2 Main window description 13





1 SPLM description





1 SPLM description1.1 1626 LM management _ Reminder

WDMMetro ring network

F

Q3

DCC/OSC DCC/OSC

DCC/OSC DCC/OSC

LR

BtB

BtB

DCNDCN

GNE

1350 OMS SPLM� Three software applications

can be used to operate and maintain the WDM network :� 1320 CT� 1350 OMS� SPLM Tool

BOADMSPLM 1320 CT

Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1353 Node Manager and 1354 Regional Manager. In latter case, the directly connected NE to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE.

When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface, it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the same optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels, carried by the OSC :

� OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes)� OTS- DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes)

In addition to DCC, the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice channel) and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel. A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G.703) between each NE is available for any purpose, carried also by the OSC.

Most of the time, when a Network Element is under 1353 NM control (and eventually 1354 RM control), the 1320 CT operator can only display the equipment configuration, the cross-connections and the alarms status. No modification can be done from the 1320 CT in this case.

“Full access” (display and modification rights) from 1320 CT can be “Requested” by the 1320 CT operator (in case of urgent needs during a DCN problem for instance) or “Granted” by the 1353 NM operator.

� SPLM tool descriptionThe Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic subnetwork. SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R5.0A), SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0.





1 SPLM description1.2 Introduction� SPLM tool description

� The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic subnetwork. SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with 1350 OMS on a server.

� In the current release the SPLM:� provides a network topology management function,� calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel,� tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based)

configurations.� With SPLM you can:� manage a graphical representation of the optical network with the ability of

displaying OTS, OMS and OCH layers,� identify the channels to be monitored,� anticipate the required tuning tasks to avoid any transmission service disruption

when BER becomes too high and FEC does not correct transmission errors,� tune the optical spectrum to be as flat as possible at terminal, ROADM (WSS based)

and TR-OADM nodes, via APE process.

The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI.





1 SPLM description1.3 SPLM architecture

� * 1626LM R 5.0A is managed by 1350 OMS and not by 1353NM / 1354RM*

The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks :� TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology.� LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters along the photonic line. It implements the following groups of features :� APE Sequencer, used to optimize meshed photonic lines.� APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an automatic way.

� Line Tuning, providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line, and usable by any other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer).

� LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic line automatic commissioning. This module is able to parse a LDT file, check the compliancy of its content with the NE current data, display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the operator, and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line, with respect to a given sequence of operations, defined in the Commissioning handbook.

� FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part.





2 Getting started on SPLM workspace





2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace2.1 Getting the workspace� From 1320 CT PC desktop double click on the SPLM icon and login as follow: � Login: “Operator”� Password: “operator”





2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace2.2 Main window description

1

2

3

General Information Status: The area where operation status are displayed for the selected operation entity:• Node• Physical link/OMS trail/ OCH group• Subnetwork

3

Resource Tree: The area where the subnetwork components are graphicallyrepresented in a hierarchical tree structure.

2

Menu Bar: The area where all action menus and submenus are available.1

DescriptionArea #





2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace2.2 Main window description [cont.]

4

5

6

7

� Node connection states colour convention:� Red: SPLM cannot reach the node� Orange: the node is not connected to SPLM� Green: he node is connected to SPLM

� SPLM Manager Connection States� Red: SPLM software manager is stopped� Yellow: SPLM software manager is running. SPLM GUI is not connected to the SPLM manager process� Green: SPLM software manager is running. SPLM GUI is connected to the SPLM manager process

Graphic Tools: Icons which activate management tasks.6SPLM Software Manager Status: A graphical representation of the connectionstatus between SPLM GUI and SPLM manager process.

7

Network Map: The map which displays a graphical representation of the photonic subnetwork nodes.

5

Network Displaying Tools: The area where network displaying tool icons are available.

4DescriptionArea #





2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace2.2 Main window description [cont.]� From Components menu option, several lists are available :

- Filtering area is available on the left side- Making a right click on any column header, it is possible to customize the list:






� From any list such as Physical Links Manager a Print button is available.� The operator can select one of the printers already installed on the PC.





Notes Page






End of ModuleSPLM Overview





Module 2Topology Management








1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceSPLM Operation � Topology Management4 � 2 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Setup the relevant SPLM configuration





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Photonic Network construction 71.1 Topology processing rules 81.2 Photonic Network example 91.3 Managing the map background 101.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1 111.5 Calibrating a map _ Step 2 121.6 Calibrating a map _ Step 3 131.7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5 141.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list 151.9 Declaring a Photonic Line 161.10 Deleting a Photonic Line 171.11 Displaying the Node list 181.12 Declaring and uploading a Node 191.13 Displaying Node information 201.14 Modifying or deleting a Node 211.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line 221.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes 231.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link 251.18 Deleting a Physical Link 26

2 Photonic Line life cycle management 292.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line 302.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line 312.3 Validating a Photonic Line 322.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line 332.5 Displaying OMS Trail list 352.6 Displaying OCH Trail list 362.7 Displaying the channel margin 37

3 Basic administration tasks 413.1 Modifying Password 423.2 Saving the SPLM database 433.3 Loading the SPLM database 443.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent 45





1 Photonic Network construction





1 Photonic Network construction1.1 Topology processing rules

The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks :� TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology.� LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters along the photonic line. It implements the following groups of features :� APE Sequencer, used to optimize meshed photonic lines.� APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an automatic way.� Line Tuning, providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line, and usable by any other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer).

� LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic line automatic commissioning. This module is able to parse a LDT file, check the compliancy of its content with the NE current data, display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the operator, and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line, with respect to a given sequence of operations, defined in the Commissioning handbook.� FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part.





1 Photonic Network construction1.2 Photonic Network example

The above figure details the main resources managed by the SPLM (Photonic Network, Nodes,Photonic Lines), and the way they are organized through an example:� The Photonic Network owns 14 Nodes (6 LT, 2 LR, 4 OADM and 2 BtoB), and manages 4 Photonic Lines: 2 point to point Photonic Lines (PL2 and PL4), 1 “T “Photonic Line (PL1) and 1 ring Photonic Line (PL3).

A Photonic Network (only one is managed) is a WDM network composed of the several elements (subnetwork, node, port, physical link, trail, …).

A Photonic Subnetwork (also called Photonic Line) is a set of nodes whose boundaries are:� Either LT (Line Terminal) or BtB (Back to Back Terminal) if any in the Photonic Network.� OADM if there is neither LT nor BtB in the whole Photonic Network.

A Photonic Subnetwork contains nodes, a set of physical links, a set of OMS trails, a set of OCH trails, a set of OCH groups. It may represent a simple point-to-point WDM line, or a more complex topology such as a ring.





1 Photonic Network construction1.3 Managing the map background� Before the network construction phase, the operator has to choose a given map background.

� It could be done using one of the default available background.

� Nevertheless, it is still possible to «Calibrate » a default map.� This is done zooming in a selected geographical from a larger map (such as world map or any other default one).

� At the end of the calibration phase, the selection becomes one more available choice for network construction phase.





1 Photonic Network construction1.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1� To calibrate a map, select the Map � Calibrate menu option. Then follow the procedure step by step:





1 Photonic Network construction1.5 Calibrating a map _ Step 2





1 Photonic Network construction1.6 Calibrating a map _ Step 3





1 Photonic Network construction1.7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5





1 Photonic Network construction1.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list� To display the Line list choose Components � Line menu option.





1 Photonic Network construction1.9 Declaring a Photonic Line 1. To declare a Line, right click in the list and select Add menu option.2. Fill in the Add Photonic Line window3. Click OK to launch the declaration.

The available Conf. Types are : Submarine and Terrestrial (to be selected for 1626 LM)

The available Topology types are: Undefined (for meshed structure), Point to Point or Ring.





1 Photonic Network construction1.10 Deleting a Photonic Line1. To delete a Line, select the Line in the list then right click and choose

Delete menu option.2. Click OK in the Photonic Line Deletion message window.

Make sure that « Service State » = « Defined » to be able to delete the line.

CAUTION:- It is not possible to delete a Subnetwork which topology has been completed.For such a subnetwork:• Service State is Validated.• All the relevant trails have been calculated by SPLM and this the reason why you cannot delete it.- Prior to subnetwork deletion, the Service State must be updated to Defined.- When the subnetwork deletion is done, all the associated configuration related to nodesand physical links are lost.





1 Photonic Network construction1.11 Displaying the Node list� To display the Node list choose Components � Nodes menu option.





1 Photonic Network construction1.12 Declaring and uploading a Node1. To declare a

Node right click in the list

2. Choose Add Node menu option

3. Fill in the AddNode window and launch the declaration with OK.

� To upload the node configuration:

1. Select the node in the list

2. Right click and choose Upload.

The Node creation can be done before the subnetwork / Line creation as the related association is not included in the Node creation window.

Select a town gives the opportunity to place the Node at one particular place on the world map.

Upload step:- Node State turns to Uploading. When upload is complete, Node Sate becomes Ready. If upload fails,Node State becomes Declared.





1 Photonic Network construction1.13 Displaying Node information� There are two ways to get the Node Configuration:� Select the node in the list, right click and choose Show or Modifymenu options





1 Photonic Network construction1.14 Modifying or deleting a Node

� Select the Node in the list then right click and choose:Modify or Delete menu options.

� Modification- The following parameters can be modified: « Conf. Type » and « GIS coordinate ».

� Deletion- The node must not be declared as part of a subnetwork to be able to launch the deletion.





1 Photonic Network construction1.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line� From the Resource tree:1. Select the Line / Subnetwork2. Right click and choose Add Nodes.

� From “ Add/Remove Node(s) in Photonic Line “ window:

1. From Available nodes select a node and click Add>> to get Associated nodes

2. Confirm with OK.





1 Photonic Network construction1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes1. From the Network map, click on “Trace

Link” icon first

2. Then draw the physical link between

two Nodes

A Physical Link is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following information:� Source node, source physical port.� Destination node, destination physical port.





1 Photonic Network construction1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes [cont.]3. Fill in the creation window and confirm with OK.





1 Photonic Network construction1.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link� From Physical Links Manager window, select a Physical Link, right

click and choose Show Boards menu option.





1 Photonic Network construction1.18 Deleting a Physical Link� From Physical Links Manager, select a Physical Link, right click and choose Delete menu option.

Make sure that « Progress State » of the related subnetwork / line is “Defined” or “Under Construction” to be able to delete the Physical Link.





Exercise

� Get started on SPLM workspace.� Choose a given map background� Declare a Photonic Line� Declare the nodes� Upload the node configuration� Add the nodes in the Photonic Line� Create the Physical Links between the nodes






Notes Page






2 Photonic Line life cycle management





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line� From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and

choose Show menu option.

The Subnetwork / Line life cycle is based on 2 parameters:

Service State� Defined� Subnetwork configuration and Physical layer declaration are not complete� Optimization is not possible.� Topology can be changed.� Validated� Subnetwork configuration is complete. This value results from the validation process performed by the

operator. It’s not possible to modify the Subnetwork topology.

Progress State � Defined� Under Construction� Correspond to Service State = Defined� Ready to Finalize� Waiting for OMS Trails, OCH Trails, or OCH Groups calculation.� Under Finalization� OMS Trails OCH Trails OCH Groups calculation in progress.� Ready for use� No operation in progress. Data ready for optimization or Commissioning procedures.� Correspond to Service State = Validated� Under Synchronization� Synchronization in progress.� Corresponds to Service State = Defined or Validated� Under Optimization� Optimization in progress.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line� Synchronize SPLM with a real subnetwork to upload the up-to-date

subnetwork configuration into SPLM to make sure of the exact match between:

� the real subnetwork topology and configuration, and� the representation of the subnetwork topology and configuration into SPLM.

� To synchronize a Line / Subnetwork:� From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and choose

Other Actions menu option, then Synchronize





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.3 Validating a Photonic Line� A Line / Subnetwork can be validated when:

� Line is declared,� Nodes have been added to the line,� Physical links have been declared.� The validation process will trigger the creation of all the relevant

trails of the transmission layer.

� To validate a Line / Subnetwork:� From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and choose

Other Actions menu option, then Validate

Once a subnetwork topology is validated, you cannot modify it unless you change its Service State with Invalidate command.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line

The SPLM relies on a topology based with the 3 layers :� Physical layer (Physical Links, Physical Ports)� OMS layer (OMS Trails, OMS Ports) (relies on physical layer)� OCH layer (OCH Trails, OCH Ports) (relies on OMS layer)

The managed entities follow the next basic rules:� Each Node is declared inside one Photonic Network� A Photonic Line is defined by a list of Nodes, located in the same Photonic Network� Each Node may contain a set of Physical ports, a set of OMS ports, a set of Bands and OCH ports� In LR Nodes, there are no OCH ports (OMS Ports are cross-connected, i.e. channels are not

demultiplexed)� In a given Photonic Line, each Node is linked to the next Node through a Physical Link (manually

defined by the operator)� OCH trail route relies on a set of OMS trails� OMS trail route relies on a set of Physical Links





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line [cont.]

An OMS Trail is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following information:� Source node, source OMS port.� Destination node, destination OMS port.

An OCH Trail is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following information:� Source node, source OCH port.� Destination node, destination OCH port.

An OCH Group is a set of OCH trails using the same route (i.e. relying on the same OMS trails, in the same order).

The OMS Trail, the OCH Trail, the OCH group shall automatically be built by the system in case of finalization of the photonic subnetwork.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.5 Displaying OMS Trail list� From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose: Components � OMS Trail menu option.

From the map, click

OMS trails are graphically displayed in red color.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.6 Displaying OCH Trail list� From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose:Components � OCH Trail menu option.

From the map, click

OCH Groups are graphically displayed in blue color.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.7 Displaying the channel margin� To display the channel margin, operate as follow:1. From SLPM resource tree, expand Line to display subnetwork

resources.2. Expand the relevant subnetwork type.3. Select the relevant subnetwork and right-click Other Actions �

Centralized Channels Margin. Result: The Photonic Line Channel Margin dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Yes.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.7 Display the channel margin [cont.]� When the Centralized Channel Margin window is displayed. The

channel margin values are flagged to ?.? before calculation.

5. Click Get Margin to start channel margin calculation. Result: The Start Channel Margin Algorithm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click Yes.





2 Photonic Line life cycle management2.7 Display the channel margin [cont.]� As soon as the calculation is done, the following fields are completed:

Error, Output Power (dBm), Margin (dB) and BER.

7. Click OK to close the END OF OPTIMIZATION dialog box.





Exercise

� Display general information for the Photonic Line� Synchronize the Photonic Line� Validate the Photonic Line� Display the OMS Trail list� Display the OCH Trail list� Display the channel margin






3 Basic administration tasks





3 Basic administration tasks3.1 Modifying Password� To change the

« Operator » password, operate as follow:

1. From the SPLM GUI main window, choose Administration �Operator Profile�Modify Password menu option

2. Fill in the window accordingly

3. Confirm with OK.





3 Basic administration tasks3.2 Saving the SPLM database� To save the SPLM

database, operate as follow:

1. From the SPLM GUI main window, choose Administration �Database� Save the database menu option


3. Launch with Save.4. Click OK in the Save

Database dialog box.





3 Basic administration tasks3.3 Loading the SPLM database� To load the SPLM

database, operate as follow:

1. From the SPLM GUI main window, choose Administration �Database� Load the database menu option


3. Launch with Open.4. Click OK in the Load

Database dialog box.





3 Basic administration tasks3.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent� To manage SPLM software agent, operate as follow:1. From the SPLM GUI main window, choose Administration �

Manager menu option

2. Assign NSAP address to the SPLM manager software agent.3. Start and Stop the SPLM manager software agent.4. Connect or Disconnect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM

database.

The NSAP address assigned to the SPLM manager software agent is the NSAP

address of the local NE connected to the CT





Exercise

� Save the SPLM database� Modify the Photonic network� Load the SPLM database� Verify a NSAP address is assigned to the SPLM manager software agent � Disconnect and connect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM database






Module Summary

� The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks in R 5.0A:� TM (Topology Management)� LO (Line Optimization)

� The main steps to create a Photonic Network:� Declare at least one Photonic Line� Declare the nodes� Upload the node configuration� Add the nodes in the Photonic Line(s)� Create the Physical Links between the nodes� Synchronize the Photonic Line(s)� Validate the Photonic Line(s)





Notes Page






End of ModuleTopology Management





Module 3Line Optimization3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0







1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceSPLM Operation � Line Optimization4 � 3 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Getting ready to APE 71.1 Introduction 81.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC) 111.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power 12

2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 132.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power 142.2 Running the APE sequencer 192.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power 202.4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA 212.5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power 222.6 Verifying output power level on transponder 23

3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 253.1 Introduction 263.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete 273.3 Running the APE sequencer 30





1 Getting ready to APE





1 Getting ready to APE1.1 Introduction� Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is an optimization algorithm run

by the operator in case of ADD or REMOVE of service.� The goal of APE algorithm is to obtain and maintain, at the output of

a Network Element, a channel power (Pref) in function of the span and the data rate.

WMAN3174

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

ALCT

1 VOA 2- 14dBm

2dB

P_BOOSTER_INPUT = - 16dBm

OP2=+8dBm (NDT)

P_ALC_INIT_COM=-16dBm (NDT)

3 channels at 1rst installation

WMAN3 Reference Power=-19dBm (NDT)

NDT : Network Description Table.

APE algorithm is run during Commissioning procedure for Long Haul systems in case of first installation or ADD of service or REMOVE of service.

APE algorithm applies only to the following nodes in R 5.0A:Line Terminal, Back-to-Back Terminal, ROADM (WSS based), TR-OADM (WSS based) and AGE repeaters.





1 Getting ready to APE 1.1 Introduction [cont.]� The power tuning process is the following:

� The user indicates channels which must be optimized.� SPLM regroups these channels which have the same route / optical path

(same source , pass-thru nodes and destination). � Each group of channels will be optimized into the same APE Line Sequencing

demand.� SPLM indicates this list of channels to the different NEs.� NEs calculate new attenuations for selected channels in function of Pref and

Pch (read from Optical Channel Monitor) and send these attenuations to WMAN3 board.

APE algorithm can be run if the Automatic Level Control is set to a reference power value first (P_ALC_INIT_COM provided by NDT). Once the ALC reference power is set, one or several OCH groups can be selected to start the APE algorithm.


NDT: Network Design Table.





1 Getting ready to APE 1.1 Introduction [cont.]� The APE sequencer runs automatically all the required actions:

� To set all the involved amplifiers to Gain mode, to deactivate control loops of WMAN boards, to avoid conflicts between board processes and APE process.

� To apply relevant reference powers to all the involved boards and nodes of a selected group of channels.

� At the end of APE process:� To set all the involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.� To re-activate control loops of WMAN boards.

WMAN3174

OSC

LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104

ALCT

1 VOA 2- 13dBm

(total power change)

2dB

P_BOOSTER_INPUT =- 15dBm > P_ALC_INIT

_COM

OP2=+9dBm

1 channel is added: 4 channels now

WMAN3 Reference Power=-19dBm (NDT)

New Initial ALC Target Reference Power

=-15dBm

1

2

3

4

5






1 Getting ready to APE 1.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC)� During 1626 LM life cycle, the transmitted channel number can vary to a large extent. This is mainly due to the fact that the first installed channel number can be quite low compared to 1626 LM maximum capacity. It is therefore necessary to keep the channels’ power within the correct transmission limits whatever their actual number.� This adjustment is called Automatic Level Control (ALC) and it is performed by means of an extra channel that enables the total optical power to be kept constant at the input of the booster whatever the number of channel is.� Before running the APE process, you need to assign a specific initial reference power value to the ALC. This power value is given by the Network Description Table (NDT) which is provided at the commissioning phase. The ALC power value is related to your network configuration and the number of channels supported by your network.� The ALC:

� ALC enables to maintain the booster amplifier input at a constant power.� helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low channel count to avoid non-linear effects on working channels.� helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are missing.

� As ALC acts on the booster amplifier input via the ALCT board, it is located within an OMS Trail.






1 Getting ready to APE 1.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power

1. From the map, click OMS Trails are graphically displayed in red color

2. Select an OMS Trail3. Right-click and select

Set Initial ALC Target Reference PowerThe Initial ALC Target Reference Power window appears.

4. From Initial ALC Target Ref. Power, set the required value for both direction (Go and Return) .

5. Click OK.

Make sure the Network Description Table (NDT) is available and amplifiers have been set to their initial output power before setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power (P_ALC_INIT_COM).

The Initial ALC Target Reference Power is set only at first installation.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power1. From the map, click

OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color2. Select one or several OCH group(s)3. Right-click and select Optimize with APE

The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.] 4. Verify that Optimize Channels radio button is activated.5. Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status.

To add an OCH group for power setting:� From the list, select an OCH group.� Right-click and select Involved.

To remove an OCH group from power setting process:� From the list, select an OCH group.� Right-click and select Not Involved.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.] 6. Double-click ... in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell

corresponding to an OCH group selected for reference power setting. The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and all the boards of the selected OCH group are listed, sorted by direction and by node.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.] 7. Double-click... in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell

corresponding to the board selected for reference power setting.The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and Reference Power values are listed for each channel frequency supported by the selected board of a specific node for a given direction.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.] 8. Update the reference power.

The update applies on the reference power of the selected board of a specific node for a given direction.In case of Line Terminal or Back-to-Back Terminal, check that the

power corresponds to the related transponder output power.� To update the reference power channel by channel:

� Click Pref by Channel radio button.� Click on Pref Value (dBm) cell corresponding to the related channel

frequency and assign the relevant value.� Click Apply and OK to return to the previous window.� Repeat action Step 7 or Click Quit to return to the Optimization (APE)

of Photonic Line window.� To update the reference power for all channels:

� Click Global Pref (by OCH Group) radio button.Each frequency row are greyed.

The Enter a Global Pref Value (dBm) combo box is activated.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.2 Running the APE sequencer

9. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window, Click Start.10. Click OK

11. Click Yes to start the APE sequencer.12. Click Quit to return to the initial window.

Running the APE sequencer in GO direction then RETURN direction.

A trace of all the performed actions is displayed.





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power � To open “Channel Configuration” window:

� Display the relevant WMAN board view� Choose Board � Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA � To open “APT/VOA Configuration” window:

� Display the relevant LOFA board view� Choose Board � APT/VOA menu option





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power � To open “TDMX configuration of port” window:

� Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view� Choose Board � Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option





2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.6 Verifying output power level on transponder � To verify the output power level of a given a transponder:

� Display the relevant transponder board view� Choose Board � Optical power level configuration menu option





Notes Page






3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion





3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.1 Introduction � Use this procedure when you want to run the APE sequencer in thecontext of preparing your network for channel deletion.

� This procedure:� assigns to the relevant ports of boards crossed by the channels to be deleted, the minimum output power, namely:� -27 dBm for WMAN boards,� -30 dBm for TDMX boards.

� runs the APE sequencer, taking into account the channels to ignore.

� After this procedure, you can delete the related cross connections without any impact on the traffic.





3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete1. From the map, click

OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color2. Select one or several OCH group(s)3. Right-click and select Optimize with APE

The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.





3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont.]4. Verify that Delete Channel(s) radio button is activated.5. Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status.

To add an OCH group for power setting:� From the list, select an OCH group.� Right-click and select Involved.

To remove an OCH group from power setting process:� From the list, select an OCH group.� Right-click and select Not Involved.





3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont.] 6. Double-click ... in the relevant Select Channel(s) to delete cell.

The Select OCH Trails to delete on OCH Group window is displayed.

7. To flag channels for deletion: � From Available OCH Trails, select a channel.� Click >>> .

The channel is removed from Available OCH Trails and added to OCH Trails to delete.

To cancel channel deletion flagging:� From OCH Trails to delete, select a channel.� Click <<< .

The channel is removed from OCH Trails to delete and added to Available OCH Trails.

8. Click OK.The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed.





3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.3 Running the APE sequencer 9. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window, Click Start.

10. Click OK

11. Click Start

12. Click Yes to start the APE sequencer.

9. Click Quit to return to the initial window.

Don’t forget to delete the relevant cross connections (next step).

A trace of all the performed actions is displayed.





Exercise

According to the trainer instructions:� Set the Initial ALC Target Reference Power� Select one OCH group in a Photonic Line� Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization for a given direction� Verify the results� Run the APE sequencer for channel deletion� Verify the results






Notes Page






End of ModuleLine Optimization





Module 1RMPM Description3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0

Section 5RMPM Operation and Maintenance






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceRMPM Operation and Maintenance � RMPM Description5 � 1 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Product description 71.1 Distributed Raman Amplification 81.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module 131.3 Pump Module Block Diagram 151.4 RMPM software structure 16

2 Cabling description 192.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack 202.2 Optical cabling 212.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site 242.4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site 252.5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site 262.6 Electrical cabling 27

3 Remote management 333.1 RMPM communication 343.2 Remote management 353.3 One RMPM in the first remote site 363.4 One RMPM in the second remote site 373.5 Two RMPM in the first remote site 383.6 RMPM in several remote sites 39

4 Housekeeping management 414.1 Introduction 424.2 External Points view 434.3 Commands 444.4 Inputs 45

5 Laser safety 475.1 Laser class _ reminder 485.2 Risks _ reminder 495.3 Safety instructions 505.4 Automatic Power Reduction 515.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms 525.6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APR 535.7 Warnings 54





1 Product description





1 Product description1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification

Short wavelength source

Stimulated emission

Residue emission

Excited atoms : high energy level

Low energy level atoms

A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process.

SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) is caused by the interaction of light with molecular vibrations. Light incident on the molecules creates scattered light at a longer wavelength than that of the incident light. A portion of the light travelling at each frequency is downshifted across a region of lower frequencies. The light generated at the lower frequencies is called the Stokes wave. The fraction of power transferred to the Stokes wave grows rapidly as the power of the input signal is increased. In multiwavelengths systems, the shorter-wavelength channels will lose some power to the longer-wavelength channels. To reduce the amount of loss, the power on each channel needs to be below a certain level.

In WDM systems, Spontaneous Raman effect is undesirable since it may result in amplification of adjacent channels.

In the Raman amplifier, SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) produces photons with the same wavelength, phase and polarization than the transmitted signal and thus the stimulated scattering mechanism can be used to amplify the signal.





1 Product description1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.]� Raman amplification can be used to reduce the impact on the OSNR of the longest spans� the longest spans have the strongest impact on the received OSNR

� The effect of the Raman amplifier can be roughly seen as a reduction of the span losses

DCM

EDFA

DCM

EDFA Raman pumps

Opticalpump power

Amplifiedsignals





1 Product description1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.]� Raman amplification in a WDM line reduces the gain of involved EDFA and improves the OSNR

Pump

EDFARaman pumpunitWDM C Band signals

and in band OSC

� In the last 20 to 40 Km of transmission line adjacent to Raman source, the pump wavelength is attenuated and the outgoing signal is amplified.





1 Product description1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.]� Raman amplification performance depends on the fiber type of the line:





1 Product description1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.]� Gain and gain equalization are achieved by adjusting pumps’ power

Resulting gain profile

P2 P3 P4

Wavelength [nm]

Gai

n [d

B]

P1





1 Product description1.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module� RMPM1200, two pumps Raman amplifier, typ. 475mW (+27 dBm) pump

power, Min Gain = 9dB, Min OSNR improvement ≈ 5.5dB� RMPM1300, three pumps Raman amplifier, typ. 690mW (+28,5 dBm) pump

power, Min Gain = 14dB, Min OSNR improvement ≈ 7.5dB� Three operating modes: Max pump power, Manual pump power, Gain

setting� 1530-1562nm operating bandwidth, from Band #1 to Band #10 of the 1626

LM loading plan� Flat gain shape (Max ∆G = 1.4 dB)� Low insertion loss

The Raman Multi-Pump Module (RMPM) is a device which ensures extra power margins for long spans applications within the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM.

When used in conjunction with conventional Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) technology, Distributed Raman Amplification (DRA) enables many important applications, such as single span links up to ≈ 300km, long span masking in multi-span links, or ultra long haul links.




1mW





1 Product description1.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module [cont.]

� Maximum span loss with current specifications ≈ 52dB for RMPM1300 and 49dB for RMPM1200

� Dual pumping wavelength: 1424nm & 1452nm� Designed for most deployed fibers: SMF (G.652), LEAF (G.655), TeraLight

(G.555), TrueWave (G.655), PSCF (G.654) and DSF (G.653)� Safety and automatic power reduction� SNMP management interface� Redundant hot swappable power supplies and fans





1 Product description1.3 Pump Module Block Diagram

coupler(wideband 1550)

2x2

WDM 1480/1550.Pass band I:1420-1480

Pass band II:1500-1565

Line

Coupler(DW)2x2

DetectorDPes

Coupler 1%,Back reflection

(DW)2x2

WDM pump combiner

WDM forsupervisory

1510/C Band

DetectorDpinEDFA

DetectorPump Power

DetectorDpinLine

DetectorShort Band

DC Mod

1510nm

Output

OSC

Coupler50%(WB)

Monitor

DetectorOsc

Forward

Pump 2 Pump 3Pump 1

1452nm 1452nm 1424nm

The block diagram describes the main building blocks of the pump module within the RMPM.

Various detectors exist within the pump module :� Detector Pes – Measures back reflected light in the pump wavelengths entering through the line port.� Detector Short Band DC – Measures ASE power within the Short Band (1500-1520nm for C-Band amplifiers) entering through the line port. In counter propagating direction the measured power also includes that of the supervisory channel, typically located within the Short Band.

� Detector Short Band MOD – This detector is used only in counter-propagating operation, and measures the modulation power of the OSC.

� Detector Pump power – This detector measures the composite pump power exiting the line port.� Detector Dpin Line – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from the line port.

� Detector Dpin EDFA – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from the EDFA Port

� Detector OSC forward – This detector is used in co-propagating operation, and measures the supervisory channel power entering from the supervisory port.





1 Product description1.4 RMPM software structure� RAMAN amplifier software in charge of:

� Optical data traffic � Eye-safety mechanism

� EMS software� For monitoring and controlling the RAMAN remotely� Implements an SNMP agent � SNMP is a standard network management protocol

EMS GUI software (Java applet)

(file: raman_xxxxalc.con)

EMS SNMP Agent software(file: raman_zzzzalc.bin)

RAMAN amplifier software(file: raman_yyyy.H64)





1 Product description1.4 RMPM software structure [cont.]� GUI software

� A Java applet is loaded via the network into any web browser upon typing the unit’s IP address.

� HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and SNMP communication.

Internet Explorer 1) http:// 150.1.1.192 port 80

3) Send Java applet(and HTTP header)

4) SNMP communication

2) Retrieve Java applet (HTTP ‘Get’ request)

Control parametersThrough the EMS GUI software interface, the user is able to:

� Shutdown or restart manually the RMPM� Configure the automatic shutdown process of the RMPM� Adjust the Raman gain from 3dB to the maximum available gain� Adjust the Raman pump diode power from 50mW to the maximum available power� Set the RMPM to get the maximum available power and the line fiber type

Monitoring parametersThrough the EMS GUI software interface, the user should be able to monitor:

� Individual and total launched pump power (in mW)� For each pumping wavelength, pump current and pump temperature� Total signal input power, OSC input power (in dBm)� Cause of an RMPM shutdown� Absence of 48V power supply at each connector input� History of most important parameters (pump power, OSC band power, back-reflection power)





Notes Page






2 Cabling description





2 Cabling description2.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack

� It’s recommendedto implement the RMPM in the ETSI Optinex rack as follows :

The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but in the OptinexETSI rack.





2 Cabling description2.2 Optical cabling

1626LM NE

The pump power is launched contra-directionally in the line fiber then it acts as a distributed pre-amplifier for the LOFA.

The RMPM can be associated to a line amplifier and also to the pre-amplifier of the line terminal.





2 Cabling description2.2 Optical cabling [cont.]

� The E2000 high power cable is connected to the Line Port (Green connector) :

� The RMPM Output port (MU type) is connected to the Input port of the LOFA :





2 Cabling description2.2 Optical cabling [cont.]

� The RMPM OSC port (MU type) is connected to the OSC Input port of the OSCU :

� The RMPM Monitor port (MU type) can be connected to an Optical Spectrum Analyzer :





2 Cabling description2.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site





2 Cabling description2.4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site





2 Cabling description2.5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site





2 Cabling description2.6 Electrical cabling

� Two power supply cables coming from the Top Rack Unit are connected to the RMPM :

� There are two redundant power connectors on the front panel of the RMPM. The RMPM can work when only one of the connectors is connected to a power supply.





2 Cabling description2.6 Electrical cabling [cont.]

� The Housekeeping connector allows the user to manage some electrical relays and opto-couplers in order to monitor some status of the Raman Pump Module or to remotely command its restart and shutdown. Through the DB25 housekeeping connector, up to 8 status and up to 8 commands can be managed.

NC means not connected, GND means ground.






� The Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet port in the RMPM.

� The Ethernet port is the Craft Terminal Connector used for connecting the RMPM to an Ethernet network (LAN) via a HUB or Switch device or a peer device (e.g a PC equipped with Ethernet Network card)






� The RS232 connector (DB9) is used for first time setup upon integration of the RMPM into the network or modifying configuration.

� The RS232 connector is usually used to configure the IP address of the RMPM or to modify the SNMP security passwords to upgrade its software.






� RMPM front panel has four LED indicators :

� The four front panel LEDs indicate pump unit status





Notes Page






3 Remote management





3 Remote management3.1 RMPM communication

Manager(GUI)

RMPM(EMS)

SNMP Traps (Alarm on/off)

Management Application

MIBSNMP Agent

SNMP DataGetRequest, GetResponse, SetRequest

The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on a PC, either locally or remotely through a LAN.





3 Remote management3.2 Remote management

� Simple web-based user interface (GUI) � Seamless and unlimited access and control of RMPM units from everywhere

in the organization network and via the internet, depending on security restrictions.

� The GUI is accessible from any remote location� Using OSCU and USIB board from 1626LM� Using G.703 – Ethernet media converter� Using Ethernet HUB for more than one RMPM in one site

� Through OSC + USIB link, a media converter is necessary between the USIB and the RMPM to convert the 64kb/s G703 frame into 10M Ethernet frame.





3 Remote management3.3 One RMPM in the first remote site





3 Remote management3.4 One RMPM in the second remote site

Note : In such case the USIB in intermediate sites must be de-configured (for the OSC traffic to be in pass-through).





3 Remote management3.5 Two RMPM in the first remote site





3 Remote management3.6 RMPM in several remote sites





Discover

� Looking at the training equipment, identify the optical cabling between the RMPM and the 1626LM.

Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate the optical cabling he discovered.

� Looking at the training equipment, identify the electrical connectors used at level of RMPM and the way to manage it.

Time allowed : ___ minutes





4 Housekeeping management





4 Housekeeping management4.1 Introduction� Input (CPI#) and output (CPO#) housekeeping points are managed by

the operator.

� Input housekeeping points correspond to the external defect which not concern the NE itself and are reported by means of gates on the controller card.

� Output housekeeping points, which are managed by the equipment, can be declared and managed by the operator.

� Two commands and four alarms synthesis are available for RMPM.





4 Housekeeping management4.2 External Points view

Warning: the quantity of Housekeeping points must be checked case by case according to 1626 LM release. As example: in R3.0 there are 8 input and 8 output points but from R5.0 there are 9 input and 9 output points (see the above screen shot)





4 Housekeeping management4.3 Commands� Commands

� Manual shutdown� Manual restart

� A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Outputs (commands)) :

Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Outputs (commands)) :





4 Housekeeping management4.4 Inputs

� A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Inputs (alarms)) :

Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Inputs (commands)) :





Notes Page






5 Laser safety





5 Laser safety5.1 Laser class _ reminder

� The International Electro technical Commission IEC825:� Gives the safety recommendations.� Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.

Wavelength (nm)

Power (mW)

Class 1Class 2

Class 3AClass 3B

Class 4

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

0.1

0.001

0.01

1

10

100

1000

� Telecom laser domainClass

1 3A 3B 4271710

(500)(50)(10)27159.5

(500)(32)(10)27+2.5-4

(500)(2)(0.4)

dBm(mW)dBm(mW)dBm(mW)

1550nm

1300nm

850nm





5 Laser safety5.2 Risks _ reminder

No hazard if used in normal conditions*.* If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam.

Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm.

No hazard if used in normal conditions, except if you use optical appliances (binoculars, microscope, monocular, etc.).Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam.

Hazard for eye and skin, fire risk.Class 4

Class 3B

Class 3A

Class 2

Class 1




1mW





5 Laser safety5.3 Safety instructions

Precautions to be taken in class 3A… Hazard in class 3B and 4: So you need to quantify and locate the corresponding power.

INSTRUCTIONSThe optical interfaces peculiar to powers 3A, 3B and 4 are identified by the following symbol:

LASER RADIATION:DO NOT LOOK INSIDE

THE BEAMCLASS-3A LASER RADIATION UNIT

BASIC PRINCIPLESDo not observe a connector or a fiber in its longitudinal axis.Do not observe a connector or a fiber unless you are at a distance of 10 cm or more.Place systematically the protective caps on a free connector.





5 Laser safety5.4 Automatic Power Reduction

During normal operation, when the Raman amplifier is connected through the line port to a closed fiber transmission line, the amplifier may emit up to 29 dBm (700 mW)

� A potential hazard can occur in case of fiber break or connectoropening. To avoid this risk, the Raman Amplifier is equipped with four different firmware mechanisms designed to detect a fiber break or connector opening, and to activate Automatic Power Reduction (APR) of the Raman pumps to reduce output power to below the level defined for Class 1M laser products.

� The Raman amplifier product is thus classified as a Class 1M laser product according to IEC 60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001, and CDRH 21 CFR §1040.10.





5 Laser safety5.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms� Pump power back-reflection

� The pump back reflection entering the Raman unit from the line port is continuously monitored, and compared to the output pump power. Changes in the back reflection level indicate an open connector in the system.

� Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)� This mechanism continuously monitors the presence of the OSC signal.

Absence of the signal indicates an open connector or fiber break.

� Amplified Spontaneous Emission (ASE) in the short band:� This mechanism continuously monitors the ASE (or Noise) in the Short Band

(1500-1520nm for the case of a C-Band amplifier) entering the Raman unit from the line port. Changes in ASE indicate an open or degraded line (high loss points).

� Signal Band Power� The total signal band (C-Band) power is monitored, and changes in the

signal band power (simultaneously with other mechanisms) indicate an open or degraded transmission line.

High loss along the transmission line, and in particular discrete loss points occurring close to the Raman amplifier, can severely decrease the available pump power for DRA (Distributed Raman Amplification), and thus the achievable Raman gain. Discrete loss points can occur due to dirty or faulty connectors, or sharp bends and other stress point along the fiber.

High back-reflection is often associated to loss, and thus can occur at discrete loss points. If there is high back-reflection, then part of the pump-energy propagating along the line will be back-reflected, and will return to the pump laser diode from which it originated. A high level of back-reflection can degrade the performance of the laser-diode, and thus decrease the available pump power.

The Raman amplifier provides four independent laser-protection mechanisms related to safety of operating personnel and transmission equipment.

There are two levels of APR protection :� The product level of protection, based on two of the mechanisms (Pump power back-reflection, Amplified Spontaneous Emission in the Short Band), ensures that the product itself is qualified as Class 1M (according to IEC 60825-1 and CDRH 21 CFR §1040.10), so that any open connector or broken fiber in the direct vicinity of the amplifier will activate Automatic Power Reduction (APR) of the Raman pumps.

� The system level of protection, based on all four mechanisms, enables classification of the full communication system (according to IEC 60825-2) as Class 1M. Those mechanisms ensure that when the transmission line fails (even tens of kilometers from the amplifier location), APR of the Raman pumps will be activated).





5 Laser safety5.6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APRTwo possible scenarios can automatically restart the RMPM :

� When RMPM detects modulated OSC signal with power > -42dBm.

� When RMPM detects Carrier Wave power in OSC Band > -50dBm for 2 pump module or > -52.5dBm for 3 pump module.

In both of these cases, if RMPM turns “ON” and one of the reasons for APR still exists, RMPM will shutdown within 150 ms.





5 Laser safety5.7 Warnings

The product level of APR protection is password protected.� Alcatel-Lucent advises to keep the APR protection at all times and not

disable it.

Once the product level of APR protection is disabled, the amplifier is classified as a Class 4 laser product, and exposure to direct or scattered radiation may cause severe physical injury.





End of ModuleRMPM Description





Module 2RMPM Handling and Maintenance


Section 5RMPM Operation and Maintenance






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceRMPM Operation and Maintenance � RMPM Handling and Maintenance5 � 2 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives


� Get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 71.1 Getting the workspace 81.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab 101.3 System configuration parameters 111.4 Pump operating modes 121.5 ARP Time configuration 131.6 Safety parameters 141.7 Status parameters 151.8 Product parameters and history 161.9 Alarms 171.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status 181.11 RMPM Reboot 231.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab 241.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab 251.14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab 261.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab 27

2 RMPM Maintenance 292.1 Replacing a Power supply 302.2 Replacing a FAN 312.3 Replacing the Dust Filter 32





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.1 Getting the workspace

1. Open a web browser (such as Internet Explorer) application2. Type the specific unit’s IP address in the address field

(this is the HTTP connection request to the unit)

� RMPM acts as an HTTP (web) server with fully customizable web pages

150.1.1.192 is the default RMPM IP @

For the above case, the IP @ of the PC is 150.1.1.2 / 255.255.255.0 . Both, RMPM and PC are located in the same subnetwork: 150.1.1.0

If it is not possible to reach the RMPM, contact your administrator who will check the IP address and the DCN state.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.1 Getting the workspace [cont.]

GUI Login screens are displayed:

� Enter the SNMP passwords:� Default passwords are:

public for Read Passwordprivate for Write Password

� Enter the user password:� Super user who can change RMPM settings

� Monitor user who can only view RMPM information

� Example: Sup123

� The main GUI will be displayed





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab

The RMPM GUI Panel consists of five tabs.

The “Main” tab, shown above, contains eight sub-windows and three operating icons. The eight sub-windows are :� Configuration – General operating parameters� Status – General Status information� RMPM Production Parameters – Production related information� History since reboot – Events that occurred in the past 24 hours since reboot� Communication – Indicates if communication is operative� Sample – SNMP protocol related parameters� Alarms – graphical representation of high importance alarms� HSKU Command Status – Indication for commands given through Housekeeping port and not through management

Operating icons are : � On / Off switch (green / red icon)� Restart button (blue icon)� Return to factory settings button (red arrow icon





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.3 System configuration parameters� Operating Mode

� Pump Operating Mode (Max pump power, Manual pump power, Gain setting).

� W1 Manual Power Set (mW)� Power settings in mW of the 1452nm pump(s). Relevant only in Manual

pump power operating mode.� W2 Manual Power Set (mW)

� Power settings in mW of the 1424nm pump. Relevant only in Manual pump power operating mode.

� Manual Gain Set (dB)� Relevant only in Gain setting operating mode. Sets pump powers in order to achieve required gain and optimal gain flattening for required fiber type.

� Line Fiber Type� Transmission line fiber type (for adaptive Gain Flattening) : SMF, Leaf, Truewave, G654, Teralight or G653 (DSF).





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.4 Pump operating modes� To change the operating mode,

operate as follow:

1. Click on the … on the right to open the Operating Modewindow

2. Choose the required mode3. Click on OK to confirm

Cancel

� Max pump power mode� In this mode, maximum pump power

(EOL) is launched through the line port into the transmission fiber. The ratio between different wavelength pumps is set according to the transmission fiber type.

� With this operating mode, best OSNR improvement occurs.

� Gain setting mode� In this mode, the pump power of each

wavelength is adjusted to provide a required average gain and gain flattening according to the transmission fiber type.

� Manual pump power mode� In this mode, the pump power for each

of the pump laser diodes can be set manually.

� No gain flattening mechanism in this mode.

Gain setting mode- To change the gain configuration, operate as follow:1. Click on the … on the right to open the Manual Gain set (dB) window2. Enter the required gain3. Click on OK to confirm

Manual pump power mode- To change the pumps power settings configuration, operate as follow:1. Click on the … on the right to open the Wx Manual Power set window for W1 and / or W22. Enter the required power level3. Click on OK to confirm





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.5 ARP Time configuration� In case of problem, the RMPM will shutdown according to the «Pumps Shutdown switches »configuration.

� After relevant repair action, the RMPM will restart according to the « Automatic Restart Procedure Time » configuration

� By default, the ARP Time is set to 10 seconds.

� To change the ARP Time, operate as follow:

1. Click on the … on the right to open the ARP Time window2. Choose the required setting3. Click on OK to confirm

Cancel





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.6 Safety parameters� Input Loss

� Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown or activating in case of line input loss in the C Band.

� High Temp� Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case module PCB temperature exceeds 85°C.

� High Back Reflection� Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case High Back reflection ration threshold (in dB relative to pumps power) or transient in back reflection.

� OSC Loss� Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case OSC modulation loss.

� OSC Band Drop� Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case of less than required power in 1500-1520nm Band, or of a sudden drop in this Band.

� Change password – This allows changing the password that is required to disable switch status� High Back Reflection Threshold (dB) – Threshold relative to pump power in which back-reflection alarm/shutdown becomes active. � Pump power [dBm] + High Back Reflection threshold [dB] > Back reflected power [dBm] � OSC Band Threshold [dB] – Threshold for transient in OSC Band loss in which a change of ASE level in the 1500-1520 nm Band in a period of less than 150 ms, activates alarm/shutdown.� OSC Band Threshold = Expected OSC Band power – OSC Band Power + 1� ARP Time - Delay between Automatic shutdown and Restart. Can be set to any value between 1 second to 100 seconds. Default value 10 seconds.

CAUTION : To guarantee the laser safety, all switches (Input Loss, High Temp., High Back Reflection, OSC Loss, OSC Band Drop) must be enabled.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.7 Status parameters� Status

� Detailed Raman Status. When OK then Raman is properly operating.Otherwise detailed faults/alarms are reported. When a status item follows OK then this item is of minor importance.

� RMPM Temp� Temperature of PCB Pizza Box (Celsius).� The Pizza Box temperature should typically be the ambient temperature.

� Internal Module Temp� Temperature (PCB) of Raman module (Celsius).� The module temperature should be below 75°C before starting.

� Gain (dB)� Module Gain when it is operated in Gain setting Mode.

� Input Power� Total input Power from the Line (dBm). This also takes into account the back-reflected pump power (noise).

� Pumps Power – Combined total Pumps Power (mW).� OSC Band Power – Power in 1500-1520nm band (ASE power + OSC Power in dBm).� For RMPM1300, -52dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm� For RMPM1200, -49.5dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm� OSC Power – Power of modulated OSC in dBm.� Back Reflection Power – Back Reflection power (dBm).� Back Reflection Ratio – Ratio (dB). of the Back relection power to the pumps power� It should be > -22dB.� For good fibers it should be around -30dB. � Power W1 – Pump power in 1452 nm wavelength band in mW.� Power W2 – Pump power in 1424 nm wavelength band in mW.� Current (1) – Pump #1 current in mA.� Current (2) – Pump #2 current in mA.� Current (3) – Pump #3 current in mA.� Fans Status – Fans status : OK or Fail Fan 1 or 2 or 3 or 4.� Internal Pwr Supply Stat. – Power Supply Status : OK or fail of Power Suply 1 or fail of power supply 2.� Pumps Status - Raman pumps status : Pumps Active or Shutdown.� OSC State – Modulated Optical Supervisory Channel signal status : Exists or Not exists.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.8 Product parameters and history� RMPM Production Parameters

� Serial Number� Software Version� Hardware Version� Firmware Version� Production date

� History Since RebootThis window shows the number of times since reboot that:

� Pumps off event occurred� OSC Band Loss event occurred� High Back Reflection event occurred





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.9 Alarms� Pumps On

� Green = Pumps On� Red = Pumps Off

� OSC Band Loss� Green = Power in 1500-1520nm band is OK� Red = Power in 1500-1520nm indicates fiber cut and shutdown occurred

� High Back Reflection� Green = No High Back Reflection in pump band

� Red = High Back Reflection (transient or threshold) occurred followed by a shutdown

� OSC Loss� Green = OSC exists (modulated signal)� Red = OSC does not exist

� Input Loss� Green = Input signal in C Band above threshold� Red = Input signal in C Band below threshold, restart can not occur

� Internal Power Supply � Green = Internal power supply is OK� Red = Internal power supply failed

� Ext. Power Supply A or B � Green = Power Supply A or B is OK� Red = Power Supply A or B failed

� ARP pause� Green = Raman in steady� Red = Raman amplifier in ARP pause (length dictated by ARP time parameter). Raman amplifier will turn on when ARP pause will be terminated.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status� In the related 1626 LM NE, some External Points (inputs and outputs)

have to be customized as follow:1. Open the External Points window selecting View � External Points2. Right click and select Show External Input Points or Show External

Output Points or Show All External Points 3. Select an Input and/or an Output point (such as ExtInPt#1 or

ExtOutPt#1001), then right click and select Configuration4. Update the User label accordingly and confirm with OK

� In case of single associated RMPM, the following External Points have to be configured as described below:

� ExtInPt#1, 2, 7 and 8 _ ExtOutPt#1001 and 1002

- External Points _ Input Points User Label settings

- External Points _ Output Points User Label settings





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.]� External outputs #1001 (Manual shutdown) and #1002 (Manual restart)

can be used together to shutdown and restart the RMPM. To perform these actions, operate as follow:

� Shutdown steps:1. From 1626 LM USM, open the External Points window selecting View �

External Points2. Select #1001 (Manual shutdown) then right click and select Configuration3. Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will shutdown) 4. Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain

in shutdown state)





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.]� Restart steps:1. From 1626 LM USM, open the External Points window selecting View �

External Points2. Select #1002 (Manual restart) then right click and select Configuration3. Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will restart) 4. Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain

in started state)





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.]� Line Degraded AlarmThis alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings :





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.]� RMPM Degraded AlarmThis alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings :





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.11 RMPM Reboot� Reboot description

� Equivalent to power down and up through 48V power supply� Configuration parameters before the reboot kept in memory are re-applied� To perform a reboot cycle, operate as follow:1. From the “Main” tab, click on the relevant icon2. Click on Yes in the dialog box to confirm the action3. After a few seconds, make sure that RMPM is back in operational state





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab

� Meaning of the event codes:� 2176: OSC loss along with ARP time� 4096: Not stabilized mode (NST). Pumps on (after APR shutdown or power

up)� 32768: House Keeping shutdown or restart command

The Events History tab summarizes the events, time and date stamped as shown above.- Refer to the Appendix (RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers) for more details.

The events history can be cleared by pressing “Reset Events History” button in the GUI.

Note 1 : If there is no real-time clock hardware in the RMPM, events will be logged, but the time-stamp will show “0-0-0 0:0:0:”.

Note 2 : Events will be logged also when the GUI window is not opened.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab

Week number

The Pumps Pwr Chart tab shows pumps output power weekly average samples.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab

Week number

The OSC Ban Pwr Chart tab shows the OSC Band power weekly averaged samples.





1 Getting started on RMPM GUI1.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab

Week number

The Back Reflection Pwr Chart tab shows the back reflection power weekly averaged samples.





Exercise

According to the instructions of the trainer :� Get started on RMPM GUI� Discover the current configuration and status of the RMPM� Using ON/OFF button, shutdown and restart the RMPM. Analyze the alarm status for each case.� Customize the user label of the relevant House Keeping points� Using House Keeping points shutdown and restart the RMPM� Launch an RMPM reboot� Analyze the Events history� Compare the charts and the current related values� Verify that the Back-reflection pump ratio is greater than -22dB

____ minutes





2 RMPM Maintenance





2 RMPM maintenance2.1 Replacing a Power supply

RMPM has a redundant power supply. At service time, shut down the related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.

� Take off lid at upper cover of RMPM by taking out the seven screws as shown in the figure below� Take out the three screws harnessing the small PCB card with defective power supply on it to the RMPM motherboard� Pull out the power supply� Replace with new power supply (insert power supply card into socket)� Harness power supply PCB with screws to motherboard PCB� Put back lid and close the screws� Extract the board





2 RMPM maintenance2.2 Replacing a FAN

RMPM has a redundant FAN. At service time, shut down the related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.

� Take out the six screws connecting the side cover of RMPM as seen in the drawing below.� Disconnect the wire to wire connector of the defective FAN� Take out the defective FAN� Replace with a new FAN� Connect new FAN with the wire to wire connector� Put back side cover and six screws





2 RMPM maintenance2.3 Replacing the Dust Filter

To allow good air flow into module while maintaining good protection from dust entering the module, a dust filter is located in front of fans.

� It is possible to replace the dust filter taking out the two screws in the front panel that are related to the dust filter cassette





Exercise

� Proceed to a FAN replacement on your RMPM without completely turning off the power supply, following the appropriate procedure� Use the installed FAN as a spare

____ minutes





Notes Page






End of ModuleRMPM Handling and Maintenance





Module 1Miscellaneous


Section 6Appendix






1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A � Operation and MaintenanceAppendix � Miscellaneous6 � 1 � 2

Blank Page



Document History





Module Objectives

� None





Table of Contents

Switch to notes view! Page1 SFP modules 72 XFP modules 93 ALCT channels 114 Transponder channels 134.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid 144.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid 17

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 195.1 Equipment alarm list 205.2 RUP, RUM alarm description and related corrective actions 225.3 RUTM, UEP alarm description and related corrective actions 235.4 RUU, OCCO alarm description and related corrective actions 245.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actions 255.6 LAN, PP alarm description and related corrective actions 265.7 VM, HT alarm description and related corrective actions 275.8 TF, TD alarm description and related corrective actions 285.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actions 295.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actions 305.11 OPD, IPD alarm description and related corrective actions 315.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actions 325.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actions 335.14 PD, UDCL alarm description and related corrective actions 345.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actions 355.16 AUP, EM alarm description and related corrective actions 365.17 TOOR alarm description and related corrective actions 37

6 Ethernet frames overview 396.1 IEEE 802.1 frame 406.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames 416.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board 42

7 WIS overview 437.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead 447.2 WAN PHY MS Overhead 45

8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 478.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes 488.2 ALS Code Numbers 50

9 Abbreviations and Acronyms 53





1 SFP modules





SFP modules list

�FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC / SMFFC/2FCmm

�FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC / SMFFC/2FCsm

��L-16.2 / B&W SFP / LC / SMFL-16.2 DDM

��1000BASE-SX / B&W SFP / LC / MMF1GbESXDDM

��1000BASE-LX/LH / B&W SFP / LC / SMF1GbELXDDM

��1000BASE-ZX / B&W SFP / LC / SMF1GbEZXDDM

�L-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMFL-16.1 DDM

�APD DWDM / DWDM SFP / LC / SMFDWA200->600

��S-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMFS-16.1 DDM

��I-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMFI-16.1 DDM

Equipped on ETHC1000

Equipped on 2xGBE_FC

Equipped on TRBC1111

Description(Interface / Module type / Connector / fiber type)

ACRONYM

The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) is an SFP function supporting analog parameters measurementsas temperature, laser bias, laser power. It is an optional feature: the availability information is present in the SFP remote inventory.





2 XFP modules





XFP modules list

�

�

�

�

Equipped on TRBC4x12

�P1L1-2D2 (L-64.2) / B&W XFP / LC / SMFXP1L12D2

�10GBASE-S / B&W XFP / LC / MMFX10GBASES

��S-64.2b/10GBASE-E / B&W XFP / LC / SMFXS642

��I-64.1/10GBASE-L / B&W XFP / LC / SMFXI641

Equipped on ETHC1000

Equipped on TRBD1191

Description(Interface / Module type / Connector / fiber type)

ACRONYM





3 ALCT channels





ALCT frequencies

191.35 THz12191.75 THz11192.15 THz10192.55 THZ9192.95 THz8193.35 THz7193.75 THz6194.15 THz5194.55 THz4194.95 THz3195.35 THz2

ALCT FrequencyBAND#

ALCT board is not available in Band 1.





4 Transponder channels





4 Transponder channels4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid





4 Transponder channels4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid [cont.]





4 Transponder channels4.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid





Notes Page






5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.1 Equipment alarm list

26EquipmentPP927EquipmentVM1027EquipmentHT1128EquipmentTF1228EquipmentTD1329EquipmentOPL1430EquipmentIPL1531EquipmentOPD16

23EquipmentRUTM323EquipmentUEP424EquipmentRUU524EquipmentOCCO625EquipmentSCP726EquipmentLAN8

22EquipmentRUM222EquipmentRUP1

PageAlarm typeProbable cause





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.1 Equipment alarm list [cont.]

37EquipmentTOOR25

35EquipmentWD2236EquipmentAUP2336EquipmentEM24

33EquipmentHVCSP1934EquipmentPD2034EquipmentUDCL21

32EquipmentCOCE1831EquipmentIPD17

PageAlarm typeProbable cause





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.2 RUP, RUM alarm description and related corrective actionsRUP

RUM





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.3 RUTM, UEP alarm description and related corrective actionsRUTM

UEP





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.4 RUU, OCCO alarm description and related corrective actionsRUU

OCCO





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actionsSCP





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.6 LAN, PP alarm description and related corrective actionsLAN

PP





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.7 VM, HT alarm description and related corrective actionsVM

HT





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.8 TF, TD alarm description and related corrective actionsTF

TD





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actionsOPL





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actionsIPL





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.11 OPD, IPD alarm description and related corrective actionsOPD

IPD





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actionsCOCE





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actionsHVCSP





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.14 PD, UDCL alarm description and related corrective actionsPD

UDCL





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actionsWD





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.16 AUP, EM alarm description and related corrective actionsAUP

EM





5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting5.17 TOOR alarm description and related corrective actionsTOOR





Notes Page






6 Ethernet frames overview





6 Ethernet frames overview6.1 IEEE 802.1 frame

� The common fields are:� Preamble - Used to synchronise the receivers� MAC addresses - Destination and Source MAC @ such as: 00 20 60 12 34� Type - Indicate the type of protocol used by the upper layer� Length - Length of the data field� Data - From 46 to 1500 bytes� FCS - Frame Check Sequence also called CRC taking into

account the fields from Destination MAC @ to Data

PreambleDestination

MAC Address

68

Source MAC

Address

6

Data

-

FCS

4

Type or Length

2

Number of bytes

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check





6 Ethernet frames overview6.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames

PreambleDestination

MAC Address

68

Source MAC

Address

6

Data

-

FCS

4

Type or

Length

2

1Q

2

TCI

2

Number of bytes Customer VLAN tag

PreambleDestination

MAC Address

68

Source MAC

Address

6

Data

-

FCS

4

Type or

Length

2

1Q

2

TCI

2

Number of bytes

1Q

2

TCI

2

Customer VLAN tagProvider VLAN tag

� The “added” fields (802.1P/Q), in a given VLAN (Virtual Local Area network), are:� 1Q - 802.1Q field (a constant fixed value: 8100)� TCI - Tag Control Information� 3 bits: user priority 802.1P (8 levels: from 0 to 7)� 1 bit: CFI (Canonical Field Identifier)� 12 bits: VLAN identifier 802.1Q (0 to 4095)

� VLAN tags can be stacked when crossing the service provider networks. In such a case:� The first tag : IEEE 802.1 P/Q is also called “customer tag”� The second tag : IEEE 802.1ad is called Q in Q tag or provider tag





6 Ethernet frames overview6.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board

Number of bytes

Source MAC

Address

6

Data

-

FCS

4

Type or

Length

2

1Q

2

TCI

2

1Q

2

TCI

2

� A « WDM tag » is added on all frames carried on the 10 GbE interface.� The « WDM tag » follows 802.1ad concept.� The « WDM tag » is added even if the incoming frames are already tagged twice.

� The tag is added for each 1 GbE port and removed before user restitution.

--- 1Q

2

TCI

2

Customer VLAN tagProvider VLAN tagWDM VLAN tag





7 WIS overview





7 WIS overview7.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead

Byte Description STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHYA1 Framing Frame alignment Fixed : 0xF6A2 Framing Frame alignment Fixed : 0x28J0 RS TraceZ0 Growth Undefined Unused : 0xCCB1 RS BIP-8E1 Orderwire optional 64kbps channel between STEF1 RS User Channel optional for user communicationD1-D3 RS DCC optional for data communication

User programmable RS message

Bit interleave Parity for RS error monitoring of previous frame

Unused : zero

� The WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) is specified by IEEE 802.3ae.

The WIS provides a simplified SONET/SDH framer for the 10 Gbit/s Ethernet WAN PHY, as well, as SONET/SDH management information. The WIS operates between the 64B/66B PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) and serial PMD (Physical Medium Dependant) layers common to the LAN PHY.





7 WIS overview7.2 WAN PHY MS OverheadByte Description STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHY

H1,2 Pointer byte

H3 Pointer actionUsed to adjust the fill of input buffers in case of negative pointer justification. Also used for frequency justification

Fixed : 0x00, no pointer action required

B2 MS BIP-1536Request (bits 1-4) : Specifies Automatic Protection Switching request type

Fixed : 0x0, no request

Channel (bits 5-8): Channel to switch from Fixed : 0x1, working channelChannel (bits 1-4): Channel to switch to Fixed : 0x1, working channelredundancy (bit 5) : 1+1 or 1:n Fixed : 0 1+1Status (bits 6-8): Indicates MS-AIS (111), MS-RDI (1110), bi-directional (101), unidirectional (100), rest undefined

indicate MS-RDI, MS-AIS or set to zero

D4-D12 MS DCC optional for data communication Unused : zero

S1 SynchSynchronisation status Fixed : 0x0F, no MS synch

requiredZ1, Z2 Growth Undefined Unused : zeroM1 FEBEE2 Orderwire optional 64kbps channel between STE Unused : zero

K2 Linear APS

Bit interleave Parity for MS error monitoring of previous frame

Reports detected Block Errors (B2) to Far End

Location of SPE in each STS relative to the pointer (in bytes). Also used for frequency justification

K1 Linear APS





Notes Page






8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers





8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes

The Raman Amplifier Status Codes appear in the “Status” parameter.





8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes [cont.]





8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.2 ALS Code Numbers

The ALS Code Numbers are listed for different types of events.





8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.2 ALS Code Numbers [cont.]

The APRs are shutdown scenarios. The ALS code numbers corresponding to the various APR scenarios described in the table above.

The sum of these numbers is displayed together with the « ALSnnn » status code, where « nnn » is the sum (for example, if both input loss and high back reflection : status : ALS 3).





Notes Page






9 Abbreviations and Acronyms





Abbreviations and Acronyms

Switch to notes view!A ACO Alarm Cut Off ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer AIS Alarm Indication Signal ALC Automatic Loading Channel ALCT Automatic laser ConTrol ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown AMS Alcatel (Proprietary) Maintenance Signal APE Automatic Power Equalization APR Automatic Power Reduction APSD Automatic Power ShutDown APT Automatic Power Tuning AS Alarm Surveillance ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission B BBE Background Blocks Errors BBU Background Blocks Uncorrected BEC Background Errors Corrected BER Bit Error Rate BMDX Band Multiplexer / DemultipleXer BNC Bayonet Not Coupling B-OADM Band-OADM BOFA Band Optical Fiber Amplifier BOL Beginning Of Life BtB Back-to-Back B&W Black & White C CBR Constant Bit Rate Ch Channel CLNP Connection Less Network Protocol CM Channel Margin CMDX Channel Multiplexer / DemultipleXer CPE Customer Premises equipment CPI Card Presence Interface CSF Customer Sub-system Failure CT Craft Terminal CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing D DCC Data Communication Channel DCF Dispersion Compensating Fiber DCN Data Communication Network DCU Device Compensating Unit DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitoring DMS Degraded Multiplex Section DTV Digital Threshold Voltage DW Digital wapper DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E EC Equipment Controller EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory EMPM External Multi Pump Module EOL End Of Life EOW Engineering Order Wire ES Erroneous Seconds ESCT Equipment Shelf Controller ESD Electrostatic Discharge ETHC ETHernet Controller F FC Fiber Channel FCS Frame Check Sequence FDI Forward Defect Indication FEC Forward Error Corrector FIT Failure In Time FPGA Field Programmable Date Array G GCC Generic Communication Channel GFP Generic Framing Procedure GIS Geographic Information System GNE Gateway Network Element GUI Graphical User Interface H HK House Keeping HSKU HouSe Keeping Unit I IEC International Electrotech. Commission IL Insertion Loss IPL Input Power Loss ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus L LAN Local Area Network LAPD Link Access Protocol for D channel LH Long Hall LM Light manager LOF Loss Of Frame LOFA Line Optical Fiber amplifier LOMS Loss Of Multiplex Section LOS Los Of Signal LOSC Loss Of Supervisory Channel LOSCF Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame LR Line Repeater LSP Laser Shutdown for Protection LT Line Terminal M MAC Media Access Control MCC Multirate Channel Card MIB Management Information Base MSV Mid-Stage VOA MZ Mach-Zehnder





Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!N NDC Negative Dispersion Chromatic NE Network Element NF Noise Figure NNI Network to Network Interface NRZ Non Return to Zero NSAP Network Service Access Point NTP Network Time Protocol O OADC Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADM Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer OAM Operation And Maintenance OCC Optical Channel Carrier OCH Optical CHannel OCPU Optical Channel Protection Unit OCHA Optical CHannel Adaptation OCM Optical Channel Monitoring OCNC Optical CoNnectivity Coupler ODU Optical channel Data Unit OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface OH Over Head OMDX Optical Multiplexer / DemultipleXer OMS Optical Multiplex Section OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection OMSA Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation OPS Optical Physical Section OPU Optical channel Payload Unit OS Operation System OSA Optical Spectrum Analyzer OSC Optical Supervisory Channel OSCU Optical Supervisory Channel OSNCP Optical Sub-Network Connection Protection OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio OTN Optical Transport Network OTS Optical Transport Section OTU Optical channel Transport Unit P PCB Printed Circuit Breaker PCS Physical Coding Sublayer PDG Polarization Dependant Gain PDL Polarization Dependant Loss PGE Programmable Gain Equalization PM Performance Monitoring PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion PSUP Power SUPply R RAIU Rack Alarm Interface Unit RM Remote Monitoring RMPM Raman Multi Pump Module ROADM Reconfigurable OADM RPO Receiver Parameter Optimization

S SAC Span Attenuation Control SBS Stimulated Brillouin Scattering SC Shelf Controller SCS Severely Corrected Seconds SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SES Severely Erroneous Seconds SFF Small Form Factor SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable SMF Single Mode Fiber SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork SPC Super Physical Contact SPI Serial Peripheral Interface SDH Physical Interface SPLM Smart Photonic Layer Manager SSF Server Signal Failure SUS Severely Uncorrected Seconds T TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm TCI Tag Control Information TCO Total Cost of Ownership TDF Total Dropped Frames TDM Time Division Multiplexing TEC Thermo-Electric Cooler TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch TDMX Tunable DeMux TP Termination Point TRBC TRiButary Concentrator TRBD TRiButary Direct TRCF Total Received Correct Frames TRCO Total Received Correct Octet TR-OADM Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames TRU Top Rack Unit TTF Total Transmitted Frames TTI Trail Trace Identifier TTO Total Transmitted Octets U UDC User Data Channel UFEC User Forward Error Correction ULH Ultra Long Hall UNI User to Network Interface URU Underlying Resources Unavailable USIB USer Interface Board V VLAN Virtual Local Area Network VOA Variable Optical Amplifier VSR Very Short Reach





Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]

Switch to notes view!W WAN Wide Area Network WB Wavelength Blocker WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing WIS WAN Interface Sublayer WMAN Wavelength MANager WSS Wavelength Selective Switch





Notes Page






End of ModuleMiscellaneous

@@COURSENAME - Page 2All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its

contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

Documents

Transcript of 7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance